You are on page 1of 262

The Future

Is for Islam
SA E E D K AU S E R
© page
CONTENTS

Preface | 1
Chapter 1 GOD | 9
Existence of God | 11
Creation of Man | 14
Messengers of God | 17
What Will It Take to Believe? | 18
Does Every Religion Have Its Own God? | 19
The Need to Follow the Rules of the Game | 21
Chapter 2 THE QUR’AN | 25
The Bible, the Qur’an, and Science | 27
Mathematical Miracle of the Qur’an | 29
Number Nineteen | 30
Qur’anic Initials | 31
What the Qur’an Says | 35
Chapter 3 THE PROPHECIES OF THE MESSENGER OF GOD | 41
The Messenger of God Foretold Future Events | 42
Downfall of Muslims and Its Causes | 42
Phases of Muslim Rule | 46
World Wars | 47
Conflicts in the Middle East | 49
Two Roman Armies | 51
Iran-Iraq War | 54
The Gulf War | 54
Sanctions on Iraq and Syria | 56
Arab-Israeli Conflict | 56
Iraq War | 57
Iraq, Syria, Egypt, and the Arabian Peninsula | 57
War of the Euphrates | 59
Fight for the Caliphate | 60
The Tyrant | 60

iii
iv The Future Is for Islam

Invasions of Iraq and Afghanistan | 61
Invasion of Saudi Arabia | 63
Signs of the Mahdi | 63
Battles in Mina | 66
The Mahdi | 68
Sinking of the Army in the Desert | 74
Black Banners from Khurasan | 77
Great War (Battle of Kalb) | 84
Seven-Year Peace Agreement | 89
The Hidden Treasures of Antioch | 90
Conquest of Constantinople (Istanbul) | 91
Conquest of India | 95
The Dajjal (False Messiah/“Antichrist”) | 96
Details Regarding the Antichrist | 98
Jesus, Son of Mary | 107
Armageddon and the End of the Antichrist | 112
Marriage, Children, and Death of Jesus | 116
Gog and Magog | 117
The Golden Age | 121
The Qahtaani | 122
The Smoke | 123
Sun Rising in the West | 126
The Beast | 127
Breeze from the South (the Rapture) | 128
Loss of Religious Knowledge | 131
Arabia Turns to Idolatry | 132
Abandonment of Medina | 133
Destruction of the Ka’ba | 133
Three Landslides and the Fire in Yemen | 134
End of the World | 135
Chapter 4 INTERPRETATION OF EVENTS | 139
World Wars I and II | 141
Conflicts in the Middle East | 142
Contents v

World War III | 144
Attack on Iran | 147
Fighting During Haj | 148
Year One of the Mahdi | 151
Years Two to Five of the Mahdi | 160
Year Six of the Mahdi | 161
Year Seven of the Mahdi | 162
Return of Jesus | 165
Death of the Antichrist | 166
What Happened to Jesus? | 167
Death of the Mahdi | 169
Appearance of Gog and Magog | 169
The Golden Age | 171
Rule of the Qahtaani | 171
Decay of Society | 172
The Smoke and Rising of the Sun from the West | 172
Appearance of the Beast | 173
End of the Believers | 174
The Worst of People Left | 175
Commencement of Doomsday | 176
The Resurrection | 178
Chapter 5 CURRENT STATE OF THE MUSLIM WORLD | 181
The Potential | 182
Challenges | 187
Chapter 6 THE NEW CALIPHATE | 189
The Sovereignty of God | 191
The Structure of the Caliphate | 195
Federal Structure | 195
Gubernatorial Structure | 196
Local Administration | 197
Judiciary | 197
Education | 198
Science and Technology | 199
vi The Future Is for Islam

Health | 199
Communications | 200
Low Barrier to Entry | 200
Resistance to the Caliphate | 200
Realistic Expectations | 202
New United Nations | 203

Chapter 7 THE WEST | 207
The Cost/Benefit Ratio of Relations with the West | 208
9/11 and Other Black Operations | 211
Shock and Awe Therapy | 213
Crime and Social Disintegration | 214
The Continuing Crusade | 216
Evangelical Christians of America | 217
Christianity | 218
Christian vs. Islamic Prophecies | 223
Ishmael, Hagar, and the Well | 225
The New Jerusalem | 226
Millennialism | 230
The Abomination of Desolation | 232
Tribulation | 234
The Antichrist | 235
Second Coming of Jesus | 236
The Whore of Babylon | 237
Armageddon | 238
Gog and Magog | 238
The Beast | 240
The Rapture | 242

Conclusion | 243
Glossary | 245
Books Cited or Recommended | 247
Web Sites Cited or Recommended | 248
Index | 250
Preface
These are interesting times for Muslims. A global crusade has been
declared on Islam that is predicted to last for several decades. At the
same time, the Islamic world is finally waking up from a deep slumber
that has lasted for centuries.
Some Islamic countries are being invaded, occupied, and destroyed,
while others are making windfall profits from rising oil prices. Even
as the former are fighting for their lives, the latter are happily raking
in the dollars while they can — before their own turn comes for regime
change and democratic reform by means of aerial bombardment.
Almost all Muslims are affected in some way. Either they are
directly suffering the misfortunes, or they are mourning for those who
are. There is confusion in the minds of people about what is going on
and how it will all end.
Most Muslims would be amazed to know that most of the events
that are currently unfolding were predicted by Prophet Muhammad,
the Messenger of God (God bless him).
If we study the sayings of the Messenger of God, we find that a
large number of his sayings pertain to current times — which implies
that the present days are very important in terms of Islamic history.
In fact, the sayings we present in this book cannot apply to any
time other than the present as they form part of an interrelated series
of events that have either already taken place or are in the process of
happening. These prophesied events have not occurred in the past, and
the chance of the same set of circumstances arising together with the
same set of participants at any other time would be slim or nonexistent.
If we read the sayings of the Messenger of God that we have com-
piled in this book and then watch the news on a major television news

1
2 The Future Is for Islam

channel like Al Jazeera or CNN, we will see an astonishing correlation.
Yet these prophecies were made 1,400 years ago, which makes them
truly remarkable.
It is almost as if the Messenger of God were talking to Muslims
and telling them that what is happening is decreed by God to occur and
advising us on how events will turn out. For almost 50 generations,
Muslims have been passing down these words of the Messenger of God
so that today we are finally able to understand what he was talking
about and make use of this information.
The bad news is that many of the predicted battles have yet to take
place and much death and destruction has yet to be suffered. The good
news is that victory has been promised to Islam, and Muslims are on the
verge of the establishment of a great Islamic Caliphate that will bring
in a golden age with immense wealth and security for all Muslims.
Most of the sayings of the Messenger of God that we have here
are from the popular books of hadith (sayings of the Messenger of
God), such as Bukhari, Muslim, and Abu Dawud that are widely read.
We also have some that are less commonly known. All of the informa-
tion is publicly available, especially over the Internet. However, most
of the sayings are scattered about in books and on the Internet and
not put together in a coherent way and in proper order so that sense
can be made of the information.
I have tried to put the available information in context and in the
most logical chronological order based on current events. This is like
finding fragments of an ancient manuscript and putting them together
in the proper sequence and then trying to understand what it says.
For several years, I have been scouring around for sayings of
the Messenger of God to find prophecies related to current events.
While there are many books about Christian prophecies, there are
few with Islamic prophecies containing all the information that I
have compiled here. The books of Harun Yahya regarding prophecies
related to the End Times are very informative, and I have found them
to be most inspiring.
Preface 3

Before I get to the sayings of the Messenger of God, I will discuss
issues related to belief in God and His book, the Qur’an. This is for the
benefit of those who may not be followers of Islam and also to help
Muslims firm up their belief in God and the Qur’an so that they are confi-
dent that what the Messenger of God said is true and that the prophecies
he made are going to happen. Only then will Muslims believe that
those things that we will talk about in this book will truly come about.
The need for this reinforcement in belief is necessary, as many
Muslims don’t believe that the promised leader, the Mahdi, would
appear or that God would send Jesus back. But the Messenger of God
said that both these things would happen, and based on current events,
it appears that they will happen very soon.
We will then look at the sayings of the Prophet that relate to pres-
ent times. They are sorted in the order that events have happened
in the past and how they are most likely to occur in the future based
on current world events. We have over 200 sayings of the Messenger
of God here; there are many more that I have left out because they
are very similar to the ones we have quoted here. Based on these say-
ings, I have built a narrative that describes how the events will likely
play out.
We will also briefly look at the current state of the Islamic world,
so that Muslims can appreciate the abundance of resources they
already have in their possession as raw materials for building the
Caliphate. The coming Islamic Caliphate will be a glorious chapter in
world history. We will discuss this to give readers a rough idea about
what the Caliphate might be like and to get people thinking about it,
as plans for it still need to be fully conceptualized and executed.
Finally, we will look at the West — led by Israel, America, and
Britain — that has taken it upon itself to recolonize the Islamic world,
and we’ll discuss Christianity and biblical prophecies. Because God is
the Master Planner, the role of these countries is really to play the part
that is already predetermined for them: to help facilitate the revival
of Islam.
4 The Future Is for Islam

This book is really one that I had wanted to read myself, and since
I was unable to find it, I took it upon myself to write it. The process
has been very inspiring because it has made me realize that some
truly amazing events are about to occur, and good days are very near.
This is why it can be said with confidence that the future truly belongs
to Islam.

■ ■ ■

I have quoted extensively from translations of the Qur’an and from
books containing the sayings of the Messenger of God. The translation
of the Qur’an from which the quotes were taken is by Abdullah Yusuf
Ali, while the hadith are from multiple sources.
Out of the many translations of the Qur’an that are available, I
have chosen to work with the one by Abdullah Yusuf Ali. This par-
ticular version is dated, using archaic language and odd punctuation
and grammar, but it remains my favorite translation of the Qur’an out
of the dozen or more that I have read.
If you’re interested in reading the Qur’an, you can find many
different translations on the Internet. I have listed several Web sites
at the back of this book. The latest and one of the best translations is
by Abdel Haleem, but it is only available in book form.
There is a generally accepted preference nowadays to leave the
name “Allah” in the translated text instead of using the equivalent
English word “God.” We have left this unchanged in the translated text,
while using the word “God” elsewhere.
Similarly, many translations leave several Arabic words in the
English text. For example, they use Dajjal instead of Antichrist, and
Sufyaani for Tyrant. I have tried to avoid this and changed the words
into their English equivalents wherever it is suitable and does not
change the meaning in any way. In some cases, however, I’ve left
the term unchanged; for instance, I retained the word Mahdi instead
of changing it to Leader, as it relates to a person who is generally
referenced by that name.
Preface 5

When mentioning the Prophet, there is a generally accepted
tradition of adding a few words of blessing. In Arabic, the words are
always the same and translate to “may Allah’s peace and blessing be
upon him.” In English, there are a variety of phrases that are used,
including “peace be upon him,” and “upon whom be blessings and
peace,” and many others.
This tradition comes from the following narration:
In a report related by Abu Zharr, we read, “The Prophet said, ‘The
most miserly among people is the one who fails to invoke blessings
upon me when my name is mentioned in his or her presence.’”
However, blessing the Prophet while verbally mentioning him is
different from writing about him, regarding which we find this report:
Al Khatib al-Baghdadi said, “I saw the handwriting of Imam Ahmad
Ibn Hanbal and I found that often he wrote the name of the Prophet,
peace be upon him, without invoking Allah’s blessings upon him.”
Then he added, “It has come to my knowledge that he used to invoke
Allah’s blessings upon the Prophet verbally.”
As there is no universally accepted practice for written English,
we will set our own rules. I will use the phrase, “God bless him,” as
this is the closest term commonly used in English.
I will add the blessing only when the Prophet is mentioned by
name and omit it when he’s referred to by a title, such as Messenger,
Prophet, or Apostle of God.
Following the practice of Muslims to also invoke God’s blessing
with the mention of other prophets, I will use the same term when
mentioning Jesus.
However, because Jesus (God bless him) is mentioned directly
by name over 200 times in this book, I will only include the blessing
if, in the same paragraph, the blessing has been invoked for Prophet
Muhammad (God bless him). This is as a show of respect and in
keeping with the Qur’anic injunction of not distinguishing between
the prophets.
This will be a compromise between the preferences of those
Muslims who would want the whole phrase used consistently and
6 The Future Is for Islam

those readers who would prefer none. While we want to keep things
simple for the sake of readability, we don’t want to totally do away
with a good practice, either.

■ ■ ■

I originally planned to write this book for fellow Muslims, especially
those living in the West, but I soon realized that the information con-
tained here might be of interest to non-Muslims as well. After all, the
interaction between the West and Islam is an important topic nowa-
days. But even beyond the current general interest in Islam are the
Islamic prophecies regarding the return of Jesus that should be of
interest to every Christian in the world, particularly those who are
interested in End Time prophecies. There’s much here of interest to
Jews also, who, it is hoped, will not get too upset at the negative
portrayal of some members of their faith. They should remember that
the people condemned in the prophecies are those who support evil,
and this by no means includes all Jews. If nothing else, the prophecies
quoted here might enable many people to save themselves by getting
out of trouble spots before it is too late.
It is my hope that by the time the reader finishes reading this book,
if they are Muslim, their belief would be reinforced and they would be
glad to know that good times are not far away. If they are non-Muslim,
then I hope that they would understand Islam better, or have their
curiosity aroused enough to want to find out more, or actually decide
to jump onto the Islamic ship that, far from sinking, is set to sail high
in the near future.
I got the inspiration for this book from a Web site with the same
name.* This site is run by an enthusiast who prefers to remain anony-
mous. With the kind permission of the creator of that site, I borrowed
material from there and organized and arranged it based on my own
understanding and then added many thoughts of my own to put this

*Please see “Web Sites Cited or Recommended” at the end of this book.
Preface 7

book together. Therefore, I consider myself to be only a co-author of
this book.
I would like to thank my sister, Durdana Ahmed, for contributing
her thoughts to the original manuscript, and Simone Gabbay for
thoroughly editing the text several times and recommending changes.

■ ■ ■

The Web site connected with this book is at
www.thefutureisforislam.com.

If you would like to state an opinion or recommend new ideas for a
future edition of this book, or if you find mistakes that you would like
to point out, then please go to the above site and express your thoughts.
CHAPTER 1

God
It is He Who hath sent His Messenger
with Guidance and the Religion of Truth,
to proclaim it over all religion, even though
the Pagans may detest (it).
Qur’an 9:33

Islam is built on the foundation of belief in one God, and the expec-
tation of God’s help is the basis of every Muslim’s hope of success in
this world as well as in the next. A belief in God is necessary before
one will believe in His messengers. A belief that Muhammad (God
bless him) was one of the messengers of God is necessary to believe
that the Qur’an is the word of God. A belief in the sayings of the
Messenger of God (hadith) is necessary to believe that what he proph-
esied will actually come true. If you don’t believe in the prophet, you’re
not likely to believe in his prophecies.
When discussing the future of the Muslim world, it is imperative
that we start with a discussion of the existence and nature of God
before we discuss what is in the Qur’an and before we look at what the
Messenger of God said about future events.
The question is whether God exists, and if He does, then whether
Islam is the religion that He revealed and wants us to follow. If the
answer to either of these questions is in the negative, then the Muslim

9
10 The Future Is for Islam

world may as well give up all hope because the Darwinian theory of
the survival of the fittest will apply to them. In that case, with the
Muslims currently in the role of the hunted prey, the predators are
likely to finish them off in the near future, as they have embarked
upon doing. Indeed, the lack of belief in God and lack of belief in Islam
as the religion of God are the reasons why its opponents think that they
can finish off the Muslims and steal their resources. A shaky belief
among many Muslims is the reason why they’ve found themselves in
a situation where others think they can do that.
However, if God does exist, and Islam is indeed the religion that has
been revealed and approved by Him, then the situation changes com-
pletely, and God’s promise applies that He will make Islam prevail over
all religions, no matter how much the nonbelievers may hate the idea.
Indeed, the Islamophobes, who have gained control of many
Western countries, are trying to implement a strategy of wiping out
Islam and totally subjugating the Muslims. But this has been the
declared aim of the enemies of Islam from the lifetime of Muhammad,
the Messenger of Allah (God bless him), so there’s nothing new about
it. What is new, however, is that until recently, and ever since the
earliest days of Islam, no one dared to embark on such a quest.
In fact, some of the techniques and arguments the enemies of Islam
used 1,400 years ago are the same as those they are using now. For
example, the Jews of Arabia were among the foremost opponents of
Islam during the time of the Prophet. They rallied the various non-
Muslim Arab tribes and incited them to attack and finish off the newly
created Muslim state in Medina, which led to the Battle of the Trench
in 627 AD, during which the Muslims came close to being totally anni-
hilated. Fourteen centuries later, we again have the Jews inciting
others — this time the West — to attack and finish off the Muslims
once and for all.
They failed then and, needless to say, they’re going to fail now.
The reason they will fail is the same as it was then and boils down
to the existence of God and the fact that He has promised victory to
those who believe in Him and follow Him.
God 11

EXISTENCE OF GOD

The fact is that all the scientists in the world, a large number of whom
are atheists, have as of yet not provided any proof that God does not
exist. During their extensive investigations, all they have managed to
do is discover the laws of nature. They have made remarkable strides
in extending human knowledge, for which they deserve great credit.
However, nothing amongst the vast accumulated fields of knowledge
has proven that God does not exist, nor has it proven that the existence
of God is in any way beyond the realm of scientific possibility.
Of course, the lack of proof of the nonexistence of God does not
prove the existence of God, either.
The lack of belief among many scientists raises doubts in the
minds of those people who don’t realize that this lack of belief is due
to the particular cultural background of these scientists. The real
reason that many scientists are atheists is because Western science
has its roots in Europe, which was ruled during the Dark Ages by the
Christian Church that was very much against scientific inquiry. In 1633,
when Galileo, the “father of modern physics,” insisted on the idea
that it was the earth that revolved round the sun instead of the other
way round, he was declared a heretic by the Church and imprisoned
for the rest of his life. This was due to the fact that the Bible is cate-
gorical about the earth being in the center and the sun going around
it, and any other idea was contrary to what the Bible clearly states.
For the next several hundred years, scientists had to struggle with a
resistant Church as new discoveries went against something or the other
in the Bible. Coming from this background, the scientists in the West
developed an aversion to religion and stopped being believers in
Christianity or any other religion. This led to the Age of Enlightenment,
which was an intellectual movement that proposed that rationality was
the means of establishing a system of ethics, aesthetics, and knowledge,
and was by and large in conflict with the Church and religion.
The reason for this great clash between rationality and religion
can be attributed in great part to the political role the Church played
12 The Future Is for Islam

at that time and to the fact that the Bible is littered with scientific
inaccuracies, having been subjected to centuries of editing by groups
and individuals to fit their understanding of reality.
By contrast, all through the several hundred years during which
Muslims were the leaders in science and learning, they never had to
go through a similar experience of conflict with a written scripture.
The end result of the centuries of tension in the West between
rationality and the Church is that rationality won and religion lost, and
today in Europe, the traditional heartland of Christendom, Christianity
has largely been abandoned and churches are lying empty and being
sold off to be converted to dwellings, offices, and nightclubs.
Science and rationality have not proven the nonexistence of God,
but rather brought down the edifice of Christianity. Nonbelievers in the
West assume that exactly the same set of arguments applies against
Islam that was used in their battle against Christianity.
It is being said that Islam also needs to go through its own age of
enlightenment, just like Christianity, before it will catch up with the
times. But the main difference is that the Qur’an does not contain a
single scientific inaccuracy, so it cannot be judged by the same yardstick
as the Bible.
However, that is not to say that everything in the Islamic world is
perfect, because there is certainly a need for reform in the mountain
of traditions that has built up over the centuries beyond the original
scriptures.
The Muslim world has many pressing problems, but a religious text
full of inaccuracies is not one of them, as we will discuss in chapter
two, The Qur’an.
So, how can the existence of God be proven beyond doubt? There
are two ways that this may happen. One is that scientists discover God
through their experiments and confirm His presence, and the other is
that God reveals Himself.
It seems unlikely that scientists will be able to “discover” God
either through an experiment or through a mathematical formula, at
least with the current state of human knowledge. Increasing knowledge
God 13

in quantum physics, the study of small, subatomic particles, and gen-
eral relativity, the study of large-scale bodies such as planets, have
shown no signs of leading us to God. All discoveries result in either
finding smaller and smaller particles or a larger and larger universe,
maybe even a multiverse — a vast collection of independent universes.
So, a scientifically acceptable proof of God is not within our reach for
the foreseeable future. However, a scientific proof is different from a
logical understanding, as we shall see later.
So, if we can’t find Him, even after trying for thousands of years,
could it be that He helps us out by taking the initiative Himself?
If God really wants us to believe in Him, then He could certainly
prove His own existence. One way to do this would be to reveal
Himself by appearing for everyone to see. But apparently He chooses
to remain hidden and wants us to be content with figuring things
out using our logic. In the past, He sent prophets who proved their
truthfulness by performing miracles granted by God. None of the
prophets ever saw God, and only one ever spoke to Him directly,
and that was Moses. Even Muhammad, the Messenger of God (God
bless him), never saw God and received revelation through the
angel Gabriel.
Muslims have been told that the only time anyone will ever see
God is on the Day of Judgment, when God will be as clearly visible
to the naked eye as the sun is now. So, we can give up the thought of
seeing God in our present lifetime. If someone asks: “But how do we
know that Judgment Day will not happen in our lifetime?” the answer
is that even if Judgment Day came about tomorrow, you would still
have to die and be resurrected before you see God.
Let’s make the above statement clearer. We are talking about two
events here: Doomsday and the Day of Judgment. Doomsday is when
everything on earth will perish and the whole universe will be folded
up. The Day of Judgment will happen when God recreates the universe,
including the earth, and brings everyone back to life. So, Doomsday
and the Day of Judgment are two distinct events separated by possibly
billions of years.
14 The Future Is for Islam

If we cannot see God in this life, then are there other ways for God
to prove His existence? God says in the Qur’an that if He wanted to, He
could send a sign that would make every single one of us believe in Him:

If (such) were Our Will, We could send down to them
from the sky a Sign, to which they would bend their
necks in humility.
Qur’an 26:4

Mankind will never ever be able to confirm or deny God’s existence.
Here’s why:
If God does not exist, then obviously you cannot prove His exis-
tence. However, you cannot prove His non-existence, either, simply
because it is impossible to prove a negative.
If God exists, as I believe is the case, then the reason that you can’t
prove His existence is that from thousands of years of human history,
we know that God does not want to prove His own existence. If He
did, then the whole world would have believed a long time ago.
But God’s purpose does not include proving His existence beyond
all reasonable doubt, as then everyone would believe, and there would
be no merit left in believing. This would be like everyone in a class
getting 100 percent in their exams. How would it be possible to rank
them then?

CREATION OF MAN

In the Gospel of Barnabas,* Jesus talks about the creation of man.
When God decided to create the first human, Adam, a powerful being,

*The Gospel of Barnabas was accepted as a Canonical Gospel in the Churches of
Alexandria until 325 AD. In 325 AD, the Nicene Council was held, where it was
ordered that all original Gospels in Hebrew script that contradicted the decisions
of the Council be destroyed. An edict was issued decreeing that anyone in pos-
session of these Gospels be put to death. Please go to http://www. barnabas.net/
for an online copy.
God 15

Satan, was upset and challenged God for authority over the universe.
Satan was in the company of angels but was himself a jinn, a different
creation. In challenging God, Satan was behaving like some men today
who expound the theory that with the exponential growth of knowl-
edge, in the near future, when we have full knowledge of how everything
works, we would be able to act like God and be able to create whole
universes comparable to the one we have now. These people, with an
exaggerated opinion of their own capabilities, feel that they can be
equals of God and therefore consider the idea of submitting to God’s
will as beneath their dignity.**
Because of his arrogance, when Satan found out that God was
going to create man and give him a status higher than Satan’s, he
decided to rebel and challenge God with the help of those who followed
him. God knew about the brewing rebellion and Satan’s disdain for
humans, so when He created Adam, He asked all the angels to bow
down to Adam, presumably to expose Satan in front of all those pres-
ent in the heavenly assembly. As expected, Satan refused to bow and
argued that he was superior to this “lump of clay,”*** and therefore
God cursed him. Satan asked to be allowed respite until the Day of
Judgment and said that he would lead most humans astray to defeat
the purpose of God. God granted him this respite and said that He
would fill hell with Satan and those who follow him, both jinn and
men, and also decreed that Satan would have no power over the true
believers in God.
Thus God made a deal with Satan that Satan could try to mislead
whomever he was able to. If God then forced the belief in His exis-
tence, He would be breaking this deal. This is because, if God proved
His existence beyond all doubt, then everyone would believe in Him
and would very likely obey Him, no matter what Satan suggested, and
therefore Satan would not get a level playing field. As the saying goes,
“a deal is a deal.”

**The Singularity Is Near, Ray Kurzwiel
***Gospel of Barnabas
16 The Future Is for Islam

In fact, if God proved His existence and also meted out instant
punishment for wrongs and provided immediate rewards for good,
then every human would act like an angel. This would be a complete
negation of free will.
Would it be correct to say that God entrapped Satan and had
preplanned the whole thing? No, because while the angels, created
out of light, only follow God’s orders, Satan was a jinn created with
fire, or energy, and had the power to choose between right and wrong,
just like humans. Free will is just that, free will. If God was going to
choose what a being with free will should decide to do, then it would
not be free will.
Time is just another creation of God, and the past, present, and
future are the same from God’s vantage point, and He knows the con-
sequence of everything He does. So, He would have known what Satan
was going to do. But should that have stopped God from creating
Satan or other beings with free will because He knew the mischief they
would cause? If God had chosen to create only those beings that do
good deeds and had not created those He knew would do bad deeds,
then this would have been tantamount to restricting free will. In effect,
free will would not exist.
So why did God create beings with free will in the first place?

I have only created Jinns and men, that they may
serve Me.
Qur’an 51:56

One answer could be that, since God loves to be appreciated, the
love and praise of a sentient being that can choose to love and appre-
ciate God or not, pleases God more than that of a being who can only
adore God unceasingly like an angel.
In addition, the immense intelligence of humans and the vast
amounts of knowledge they have the ability to acquire allow them to
marvel at God and appreciate Him more. A top scientist working on
God 17

the frontiers of science can appreciate the wonders of the universe
more than anyone else.
The creation of man with free will was what God wanted to do,
and He was not going to abandon the idea just because He knew that
Satan was going to try to spoil things. To abort the idea of creating man
would have been to give in to Satan’s will. And the same applies to cre-
ating the jinns, because not to create them at all would have been giving
in to the will of Satan. To create the jinns, but not to create Satan, would
mean that God was being selective with free will by only creating those
jinns who were going to be good and not creating those who were going
to be bad. This would have meant not free will, but controlled will.
Therefore, we can say that God did not desire the situation of the
rebellion of Satan, nor did He set up the whole thing deliberately, but
rather He went ahead with His plans despite the knowledge that some
of the beings He created were going to be mischief makers. The rebel-
lion of Satan and the mischief of humans were the price to be paid for
the creation of intelligent beings with free will.
Ultimately, when the time for judgment comes, many humans and
jinns will be sorry that they even exist, while a good number will be
grateful to God for creating them and will live happily ever after. The
good ones will praise God for all eternity and will probably be relieved
that God did not abandon the idea of creating them. Not to have
created anyone because of what the bad ones among them would do
would have been unfair to the good ones.

MESSENGERS OF GOD

One way God has helped man is by sending prophets to all communi-
ties in the world. All the prophets taught that we should believe in one
God, but after they passed away, the followers of the prophets started
worshipping the prophets themselves instead of God. This is apparently
a universal behavior pattern, as the Hindus worship Rama and Krishna,
the Buddhists worship Buddha, and the Christians worship Jesus.
18 The Future Is for Islam

The prophets used every conceivable logical argument to convince
people of the existence of God, but most were rejected, abused,
tortured, and sometimes even killed.
God helped many of the prophets with miracles, but even these
were not able to convince most people. Some of those who actually
saw a miracle with their own eyes would believe, but those who did
not see the miracle were unsure, and later generations were less and
less likely to believe at all. Even when the staff of Moses turned into
a serpent, not everyone who saw it believed that Moses was a prophet
or that he was telling the truth about God. Despite all the miracles that
Moses performed, some of his followers demanded yet more, and
some even asked to see God Himself.

WHAT WILL IT TAKE TO BELIEVE?

So, the reality of human nature is that even miracles don’t convince
most people, especially if they don’t see the miracle performed right
in front of their eyes.
At this point, let us try to figure out what it will take to convince
everyone to believe in God.
It is likely that the minimum requirement for everyone to believe
in God would be to see Him personally, and it would be even better
to have a small chat, during which we could ask a few trick questions
that we know only God could answer.
This would mean that for all people to believe in God, we would
need to have a permanent location where God is visible all the time.
Nowadays many children don’t even believe what their parents tell
them; therefore every child would have to be shown God. When they
come of age, let’s say at the age of 18, they would be led to a place
where God would be visible. Since there would be millions of people
lining up to see God, there would have to be some sort of booking
arrangement and crowd-control mechanism, maybe even a moving
walkway, so that some people wouldn’t hang around gawking and
chatting with God more than their fair share of time.
God 19

What I’m describing here sounds very much like a museum, or
rather like a circus, with God as an exhibit. Despite the ridiculousness
of the idea, this is what it would take for everyone to believe in God.
And, of course, we know that He is not likely to oblige.
We have a situation here where, on the one hand, God is not going
to show Himself, and on the other, no one has proven that God does
not exist. Therefore, everyone is ultimately on their own. Believe if you
want to, and don’t if you don’t want to. As far as Muslims are concerned,
they choose to believe in One God of absolute power who is in control
of the whole universe down to the very last subatomic particle. No
religion other than Islam has the same concept of God as part of their
fundamental belief.

DOES EVERY RELIGION HAVE ITS OWN GOD?

If God exists, does each religion have a different god? And if there are
many, then whose god is the most powerful?

“I KNEW that my God was bigger than his,” Lieutenant General
William G. Boykin said of his Muslim opponent. “I knew that
my God was a real God, and his was an idol.” That and other
remarks derogatory of Islam caused a stir last week, espe-
cially because the general holds a key position in the war on
terrorism. The Boston Globe 10/21/2003.

You have to marvel at the ignorance displayed in this statement
by a man in a position of authority charged with waging the “War
on Terror.”
Lieutenant General William G. Boykin, judging from the senior
positions he has held, likely represents a Christian fundamentalist opin-
ion held by many others in similar positions. When he says that his god
is bigger than Allah, then he is implying that there are multiple gods,
and he believes that his is bigger. Then he goes on to say that his god
is real, and Allah is an idol. But he ignores the fact that churches have
20 The Future Is for Islam

idols of Jesus that the churchgoers pray to, while mosques do not
have any idols, not even any pictures of living things.
The fact is that only the Muslims believe in one God, and “Allah”
is a generic Arabic term for the Supreme Being equivalent to the
English word “God.” In the Qur’an, God has ninety-nine names, each
of which describes his qualities. Different words for God in one or
many languages do not imply that each god is different.
The Christians, who are the main challengers to Muslims for God’s
favors, actually believe in the Trinity — the Father, the Son, and the
Holy Ghost. God is one part out of a three-way split. While I don’t know
how many Christians pray to the Holy Ghost, it certainly seems that
they have divided loyalties between the Father and the Son, while
others pray to Mary, the mother of Jesus. Although Christians claim
to be monotheists, they are in reality tri-theists or quad-theists if Mary
is taken into account.
In actual fact, there is only one God — call Him God, call Him Allah,
or call Him by any other name — and He is with those who believe in
Him and don’t divide their loyalties. If someone who’s not a Muslim
wanted to challenge the statement that only Muslims believe in one God
and argue that, in fact, they too believe in one God, then no one would
be happier than the Muslims. But the proof of the truth of this claim
would be to renounce ascribing any partners with God. If they can’t do
that, then they don’t worship one God and are therefore not monotheists.
We don’t even want to get into the discussion of whether there’s
a chance of there being multiple gods in this universe or beyond it.
Suffice it to say that if there were multiple gods, then there would be
an almighty row between them for power, and the universe would not
be as harmonious as it is. And why would these gods all hang around
in the same universe and not create their own? If some humans can
talk about creating their own universe some day,* then why wouldn’t
each god create his or her own universe?

*The Singularity is Near, Ray Kurzwiel
God 21

As far as Islam is concerned, not only is there no other god in this
universe, but there aren’t any other gods with their own universes,
either.

Say: He is Allah, the One and Only; Allah, the Eternal,
Absolute; He begetteth not, nor is He begotten; And
there is none like unto Him.
Qur’an 112:1-4

THE NEED TO FOLLOW THE RULES OF THE GAME

Nothing I’ve said here may convince anyone who does not believe in
God to start believing in Him. As I’ve stated, if God exists, then He
chooses to remain hidden so no one can possibly provide a formula to
prove His existence, although using pure logical reasoning should tell us
that the immense complexity and perfection of all that exists couldn’t
have been randomly generated out of nothing. If you tell a scientist
that a supercomputer sitting on a mountaintop appeared out of thin air,
he would never believe you and would then try to come up with a the-
ory of who built it and how it was transported to the top of the mountain,
and yet that same man will argue till kingdom come that the whole
universe, which is a million times more complex than the supercom-
puter, actually appeared not only out of thin air but out of absolute
nothingness. Some theorize that the right mix of ingredients — a few bil-
lion years, a tiny amount of intelligence, and some primeval matter —
would have been sufficient to create the universe. The counterargu-
ment would ask who created time and matter, and where that tiny bit
of intelligence came from in the first place. This may then prompt the
atheist to throw his trump card. If God exists, then who created God?
At this, the believer would have to give up, as this question has
been asked for millennia, and the only answer is: “To you, your belief —
and to me, mine.” Another answer would be that wherever God came
from, the question is moot because, as far as we’re concerned, we
22 The Future Is for Islam

come under the domain of one single God, and this is the only God
we have to deal with as long as each one of us is alive, and we might
as well be on good terms with Him as our scope of existence doesn’t
extend beyond this universe and is not likely to in the future. In the
term of our existence, we have to deal with this one God in whatever
terms He establishes because not only can we not change the rules of
the game, but also by not accepting the rules we cannot escape from
the consequences of our actions, whether we like the rules or not.
The reach of the human mind is vastly greater than the human
body. Our eyes can see only for a few miles and our bodies can only
go a few hours before needing to eat and drink. Our mind, however,
knows no bounds in its capacity to imagine. It is quite easy for us to
speculate, as scientists do nowadays, that there may be countless
universes out there — a multiverse with billions, zillions of universes.
Similarly, it is possible to imagine a gigallion gods out there, all of whom
would be totally useless to us if they existed, apart from the one we
need to deal with.
All the religious texts combined, including the Qur’an, encom-
pass only a small amount of knowledge compared to all there is to
know. Therefore, it is given that God has only revealed a tiny fraction
of knowledge about Himself and left out most information, including
the answer to where He comes from. But while, in human relations,
it is considered impolite to ask a lady her age, nevertheless we expect,
or rather demand, for God to lay bare His soul to us as a precondition
for our believing in Him. Indeed, man has an exaggerated opinion
of himself.
Most of the world does not believe in God, but as far as Muslims
are concerned, they choose to believe. Both the believer and the
nonbeliever will die one day, and then all questions will be answered.
Denying reality in no way changes the facts. If you’re blind and deny
there’s a brick wall because you don’t see it and run into it at full
speed, you’ll break your head. Denying the wall’s existence won’t make
it go away.
God 23

As the Muslims are the only true believers in one God, then it
follows that the Muslims are the rightful claimants to His help. In the
high stakes game of life on this planet, the Muslims have placed their
bets on the existence of God.
If you believe in one God, then you should be with those who
believe the same. Islam is the home country of the belief in God.
CHAPTER 2

The Qur’an
And if ye are in doubt as to what We have
revealed from time to time to Our servant, then
produce a Sura like thereunto; and call your
witnesses or helpers (If there are any) besides
Allah, if your (doubts) are true.
Qur’an 2:23

Or do they say, “He forged it”? Say: “Bring then
a Sura like unto it, and call (to your aid) anyone
you can besides Allah, if it be ye speak the truth!”
Qur’an 10:38

Or they may say, “He forged it.” Say, “Bring
ye then ten suras forged, like unto it, and call
(to your aid) whomsoever ye can, other than
Allah! — If ye speak the truth!
Qur’an 11:13

Say: “If the whole of mankind and Jinns were to
gather together to produce the like of this Qur’an,
they could not produce the like thereof, even if
they backed up each other with help and support.
Qur’an 17:88

25
26 The Future Is for Islam

Let them then produce a recital like unto it, —
If (it be) they speak the truth!
Qur’an 52:34

Narrated Abu Huraira: The Prophet said,
“There was no prophet among the prophets but
was given miracles because of which people had
security or had belief, but what I was given was
the Divine Inspiration which Allah revealed
to me. So I hope that my followers will be
more than those of any other prophet
on the Day of Resurrection.”
Sahih Bukhari, Volume 9, Book 92, Number 379

All through history, prophets performed miracles in order to convince
people of their truthfulness. Some people believed in them, but many
of those who witnessed the miracles were not convinced and attrib-
uted the miracles to magic or trickery. Fewer still believed out of those
who were not eyewitnesses, and as time passed, people started doubting
whether the event had even occurred.
Islam has a permanent miracle in its possession, and that is the
Qur’an. Non-Muslims don’t know about it, and it’s not even certain
whether all Muslims realize the miraculous qualities of the Qur’an.
As the above-quoted verses from the Qur’an state, God Himself has
repeatedly challenged mankind to get together and to produce some-
thing like the Qur’an or even a tiny part of it, but as of now, fourteen
centuries have passed, and no one has been able to meet the challenge,
although at various times, many have tried.
The layman who reads the Qur’an will not necessarily be able to
appreciate it and may wonder what the fuss is all about. This is espe-
cially so if a translation is being read that does not convey the poetic
beauty of the original Arabic.
The Qur’an 27

Here, we will discuss only two qualities of the Qur’an: one is its
conformity with scientific knowledge, and the other is the numerical
code that pervades the book.

THE BIBLE, THE QUR’AN, AND SCIENCE

Many in the Muslim world are familiar with the work of French sur-
geon Dr. Maurice Bucaille, The Bible, the Qur’an, and Science, in which
he studied the Bible and the Qur’an from a scientific point of view. In
the conclusion of his book, he states:

The Qur’an follows on from the two Revelations that preceded
it and is not only free from contradictions in its narrations,
the sign of the various human manipulations to be found in
the Gospels, but provides a quality all of its own for those
who examine it objectively and in the light of science i.e. its
complete agreement with modern scientific data. What is
more, statements are to be found in it (as has been shown)
that are connected with science: and yet it is unthinkable
that a man of Muhammad’s time could have been the author
of them. Modern scientific knowledge therefore allows us to
understand certain verses of the Qur’an which, until now, it
has been impossible to interpret.
The comparison of several Biblical and Qur’anic narra-
tions of the same subject shows the existence of fundamental
differences between statements in the former, which are
scientifically unacceptable, and declarations in the latter
which are in perfect agreement with modern data: this was
the case of the Creation and the Flood, for example. An
extremely important complement to the Bible was found in
the text of the Qur’an on the subject of the history of the
Exodus, where the two texts were very much in agreement
with archaeological findings, in the dating of the time of
28 The Future Is for Islam

Moses. Besides, there are major differences between the Qur’an
and the Bible on the other subjects: they serve to disprove
all that has been maintained-without a scrap of evidence-
concerning the allegation that Muhammad is supposed to
have copied the Bible to produce the text of the Qur’an.
In view of the level of knowledge in Muhammad’s day, it
is inconceivable that many of the statements In the Qur’an
which are connected with science could have been the work
of a man. It is, moreover, perfectly legitimate, not only to
regard the Qur’an as the expression of a Revelation, but also
to award it a very special place, on account of the guarantee
of authenticity it provides and the presence in it of scien-
tific statements which, when studied today, appear as a
challenge to explanation in human terms.

The Qur’an is free of all scientific error, even though it mentions
many natural phenomena. For example, regarding the movement of
the sun and moon, it says:

It is He Who created the Night and the Day, and the
sun and the moon: all (the celestial bodies) swim
along, each in its rounded course.
Qur’an 21:33

It says that both the sun and moon follow a circular orbit. Anyone
reading it in olden times would continue to believe that the sun goes
around the earth, but someone reading it now will know that the sun
follows a circular orbit not around the earth but around the Milky
Way galaxy. This is an example of the Qur’an masterfully sidestepping
making a statement that is factually incorrect.

Do not the Unbelievers see that the heavens and the
earth were joined together (as one unit of creation),
The Qur’an 29

before we clove them asunder? We made from water
every living thing. Will they not then believe?
Qur’an 21:30

Moreover He comprehended in His design the sky, and
it had been (as) smoke: He said to it and to the earth:
“Come ye together, willingly or unwillingly.” They
said: “We do come (together), in willing obedience.”
Qur’an 41:11

The above two verses from the Qur’an state the following facts:

1. The universe was one singular piece of matter.
2. “Clove” them asunder suggests an explosion.
3. The early universe consisted of smoke or vapor.
4. The earth was created from this smoke collecting together.
5. All living things are made from water.

The first four points describe the Big Bang theory of the creation
of the universe, and the last one describes the creation of life. All
these facts have been confirmed only recently. Today, scientists look-
ing for life on other planets always try to find out if there is water on
those planets.
These are just a few examples of the Qur’an mentioning natural
phenomena. There are many more, and they’re all scientifically correct.

MATHEMATICAL MIRACLE OF THE QUR’AN

While many Muslims are familiar with the work of Dr. Bucaille, far fewer
know about the work done by the late Dr. Rashid Khalifa to discover
the Mathematical Miracle of the Qur’an.
This is totally different from the “Bible Code,” which extracts
hidden messages from the text of the Bible.
30 The Future Is for Islam

Dr. Khalifa entered the text of the Qur’an into a computer and
found that there is a code that permeates the whole book that is based
on the number 19. This discovery explains the meaning of the myste-
rious letters at the beginning of many Qur’anic chapters, which have
been found to play a role similar to checksums that are widely used
in computer science to validate the accuracy of data. The end result
of this is to prove that the Qur’an is perfectly preserved down to the
last letter, confirming God’s promise that:

We have, without doubt, sent down the Message; and
We will assuredly guard it (from corruption).
Qur’an 15:9

NUMBER NINETEEN

Here are some verses from Chapter 74 of the Qur’an, where God is
talking about someone not believing in the divine nature of the Qur’an:

Then said he: ‘This is nothing but magic, derived
from of old;
‘This is nothing but the word of a mortal!’
Soon will I cast him into Hell-Fire!
And what will explain to thee what Hell-Fire is?
Naught doth it permit to endure, and naught doth it
leave alone! —
Darkening and changing the colour of man!
Over it are Nineteen.
And We have set none but angels as Guardians of the
Fire; and We have fixed their number only as a trial
for Unbelievers, — in order that the People of the
Book may arrive at certainty, and the Believers may
increase in Faith, — and that no doubts may be left
for the People of the Book and the Believers, and that
The Qur’an 31

those in whose hearts is a disease and the Unbeliev-
ers may say, ’What symbol doth Allah intend by this?’
Thus doth Allah leave to stray whom He pleaseth,
and guide whom He pleaseth: and none can know
the forces of thy Lord, except He and this is no other
than a warning to mankind.
Nay, verily: By the Moon,
And by the Night as it retreateth,
And by the Dawn as it shineth forth, —
This is but one of the mighty (portents),
A warning to mankind,—
Qur’an 74:24-36

Verse 74:31 quoted above gives five reasons for the miracle of the
Qur’an based on the number 19:

1. As a trial for disbelievers.
2. To convince the people of the book (a reference to Christians and
Jews) that the Qur’an is divine scripture.
3. To strengthen the faith of the faithful.
4. To remove all traces of doubt from the hearts of Christians, Jews,
as well as the believers; and
5. To expose those who harbor doubt in their hearts, and the disbe-
lievers, who will say, “What did God mean by this allegory?” or
“So What?”

QUR’ANIC INITIALS

Until recently, no one knew the reason for the mysterious initials at
the beginning of many chapters of the Qur’an, but now the puzzle has
finally been solved. When a Qur’anic chapter starts with those letters,
and you count the number of times those letters occur in that chapter,
it is always a multiple of 19.
32 The Future Is for Islam

There are 29 chapters in the Qur’an with prefixed initials. All the
initials are linked to the common denominator — 19.

• “Q” (Qaaf) is initialed in surahs 42 and 50. In both the surahs, “Q”
is repeated 57 times, or 19 × 3.
• “N” (Noon) is initialed in surah 68, and the total count of “Noon”
is 133 or 19 × 7.
• “S” (Saad) is initialed in surahs 7, 19, 38, and the total occurrence
in the three surahs is 152, or 19 × 8.
• “Y.S” (Ya Seen). These two letters are prefixed in surah 36 and
the total occurrence for both of them is 285, or 19 × 15.
• “H.M” (Ha Mim). These letters prefix surahs 40 through 46 and
their total occurrence in the seven “H.M”-initialed surahs is
2147, or 19 × 113.
• “A.S.Q” (‘Ayn Seen Qaf). These initials constitute verse 2 of
surah 42 and are repeated in the surah 209 or 19 × 11 times.
• “A.L.M” (Alef Laam Mim). These most frequently used letters in
the Arabic language are prefixed in six surahs — 2, 3, 29, 30, 31
and 32, and the total occurrence of the three letters in each of
the six surahs is 9899 (19 × 521), 5662 (19 × 298), 1672 (19 × 88),
1254 (19 × 66), 817 (19 × 43), and 570 (19 × 30), respectively.

All other Qur’anic initials, without exception, show similar patterns
of being multiples of 19.
Some other basic facts of the Mathematical Miracle of the Qur’an:

1. There are 114 chapters in the Qur’an, or 19 × 6.
2. The total number of verses in the Qur’an is 6346, or 19 × 334.
3. If you add the 30 different numbers that are mentioned in the
Qur’an’s text (i.e., one God, two brothers, etc.), the total is 162146,
or 19 × 8534.
4. The first statement in the Qur’an, “In the name of God, Most
Gracious, Most Merciful,” consists of 19 Arabic letters. Known as
the “Bismilah,” it prefaces every chapter, except chapter 9.
The Qur’an 33

5. Though missing from chapter 9, exactly 19 chapters later, the
Bismilah occurs twice. Chapter 27 has this statement at its begin-
ning and in verse 30. This makes the total number of times the
Bismilah occurs in the Qur’an 114, or 19 × 6. Up to now, no one
knew why there is no Bismilah in chapter 9.
6. Since there are 19 chapters between the missing Bismilah and the
extra one, the sum of those chapter numbers is a multiple of 19.
(The sum of any 19 consecutive numbers is a multiple of 19.) But the
total, 342, is also the exact number of words between the two occur-
rences of the Bismilah in Chapter 27. This number, 342, is 19 × 18.
7. Every word in the Bismilah occurs throughout the Qur’an a number
of times, and each time it is a multiple of 19.
8. The very first revelation that was given to the prophet of Islam,
Muhammad (God bless him), came as 19 words.
9. The total number of letters making up the 19 words of the first
revelation is 76, 19 × 4.
10. Though they were the first revelation, these verses are placed at the
beginning of Chapter 96. This chapter is atop the last 19 chapters.
11. Chapter 96 consists of 304 Arabic letters, or 19 × 16.
12. The last chapter revealed (Chapter 110) has 19 words, and its
first verse is 19 letters.
13. God’s name in Arabic, “Allah,” occurs in the Qur’an 2698 times,
or 19 × 142.
14. If you add the numbers of the verses where “Allah” occurs, the
total is 118123, or 19 × 6217.
15. The main message in the Qur’an is that there is only One God. The
number of times that the word “one” is used to refer to this concept
of One God is 19.
16. The word “Qur’an” occurs in 38 different chapters, or 19 × 2.
17. The total number of times “the Qur’an” is mentioned is 57, 19 × 3.
18. Within the 114 chapters of the Qur’an, 29 of them begin with the
Qur’anic initials discussed earlier. Intermixed between the first
initialed chapter (Chapter 2) and the last initialed chapter (Chapter
68) are 38 non-initialed chapters, or 19 × 2.
34 The Future Is for Islam

19. In that same group of chapters, from Chapter 2 to Chapter
68, there are 19 alternating sets of initialed and non-initialed
chapters.
20. The total number of verses making up this group of chapters
is 5263, 19 × 277.
21. Within this group of chapters, there are also 2641 occurrences
of the word “Allah,” or 19 × 139. Of course, that leaves 57, or
19 × 3, occurrences of that word outside of this group.
22. If you add the chapter and verse numbers of the 57 occur-
rences of “Allah” outside the initialed section, the total is
2432, or 19 × 128.

This is just a sample, and there are a great many more 19-based
facts, most of them more complex than the ones presented above.
Additional discoveries continue to be made as Dr. Khalifa’s work
is carried on by the many dedicated students of the Qur’an that he
left behind.
As far as God’s challenge to create comparable verses of the
Qur’an is concerned, the rules for the competition would include
adding verses to the Qur’an that don’t break the code that pervades
the whole book or to produce another book that has a similar math-
ematical structure, while telling stories, providing moral guidance,
and talking about natural phenomena that cannot be challenged
by science.
The above certainly proves beyond reasonable doubt that the
Qur’an is a miraculous book revealed by the creator of the universe.
Furthermore, it proves that every single letter in the Qur’an is exactly
in the correct order as God meant it to be and has not been added to,
deleted, or moved about in any way.
This is so, apart from two verses that, according to the formula of
the mathematical miracle, should not be there. These two verses did
not occur in some early versions of the Qur’an, but appeared in later
ones. These are verses 128 and 129 in chapter 9.
The Qur’an 35

Unfortunately, Dr. Khalifa went off on a bit of a tangent and started
making some controversial claims, even beyond stating that two verses
should not be in the Qur’an. He claimed to be a messenger sent by God.
Either because of the controversy or because someone was unhappy
with the good work he was doing, Dr. Khalifa was assassinated in
1990. The controversy does not change the facts of what he discovered,
and some of his dedicated followers continue his work, while much
more remains to be discovered. However, his detractors have tried to
undermine his discoveries by citing his contentious claims, and that may
be a reason that most Muslims remain uninformed about his research.

WHAT THE QUR’AN SAYS

Having argued that the Qur’an is a supernatural book given to humans
by the creator of the universe, we can move on to look at what it says.
What does the Qur’an say on matters that are of relevance to the
future of the Muslim world?

To each is a goal to which Allah turns him; then strive
together (as in a race) Towards all that is good.
Wheresoever ye are, Allah will bring you together.
For Allah Hath power over all things.
Qur’an 2:148

And hold fast, all together, by the rope which Allah
(stretches out for you), and be not divided among
yourselves; and remember with gratitude Allah’s
favour on you; for ye were enemies and He joined
your hearts in love, so that by His Grace, ye became
brethren; and ye were on the brink of the pit of Fire,
and He saved you from it. Thus doth Allah make His
Signs clear to you: That ye may be guided.
Qur’an 3:103
36 The Future Is for Islam

The above verses talk about God uniting the Muslims. Each Muslim
has a role to play in the overall scheme of things and should compete
in doing good works and fulfilling their role, and God will bring unity
among Muslims.
One of the greatest issues facing the Muslims is a lack of unity,
which occurred because of their not following God’s will, as a result
of which the Muslim world went into a catastrophic decline. However,
if Muslims come back to God, as they’re in the process of doing now,
God will restore their unity.
The Muslim community is a very diverse group spread over multi-
ple continents with great diversity in race, ethnicity, language, culture,
etc., but everyone knows how, even at the worst of times, they always
maintain an almost mystical sense of interconnectedness. This is
explained by the saying of Prophet Muhammad (God bless him) that
the Muslim community is like a single body in which, if any part feels
any pain, then the whole body feels the pain.

The Religion before Allah is Islam (submission to His
Will): Nor did the People of the Book dissent therefrom
except through envy of each other, after knowledge
had come to them. But if any deny the Signs of Allah,
Allah is swift in calling to account.
Qur’an 3:19

If anyone desires a religion other than Islam (sub-
mission to Allah), never will it be accepted of him;
and in the Hereafter He will be in the ranks of those
who have lost (All spiritual good).
Qur’an 3:85

In the above two verses, God states quite categorically that the
religion acceptable to him is Islam, and if anyone follows another
religion, then it will not be acceptable. This is not only because
The Qur’an 37

Muslims are the only ones who believe in one God, but also because
once God sends a new message, the assumption is that the old one is
beyond repair, and if someone insists on following the old contami-
nated, and thus discarded, message then he is in a state of rebellion
against God. This implies that God has rejected the concept of “mul-
tiple paths to God” — the idea that you can do pretty much anything
you want and believe whatever you wish and everything is acceptable
to God.

Allah has promised, to those among you who believe
and work righteous deeds, that He will, of a surety,
grant them in the land, inheritance (of power), as
He granted it to those before them; that He will estab-
lish in authority their religion — the one which He
has chosen for them; and that He will change (their
state), after the fear in which they (lived), to one of
security and peace: “They will worship Me (alone)
and not associate aught with Me.” If any do reject
Faith after this, they are rebellious and wicked.
Qur’an 24:55

Here, God has promised that if Muslims believe and also put their
religion into practice, then God will establish them and their religion
securely in the land. Previously, the state of security for the Muslims
lasted well over a thousand years, during which no one could seriously
challenge them, at least in the core Islamic lands. As they are again
living in a state of fear and insecurity at the present time, it follows that
if they come back to the correct way, then their power and security
will be reestablished.
The thing to notice here is that the promise is made only to those
who believe in God and practice Islam — in other words, those who
follow the Qur’an and Sunnah. The promise does not apply to those
who only believe in God but don’t follow up with good actions, or to
38 The Future Is for Islam

those who are weak of faith. It also does not apply to those who are
Muslims in name only because they were born as such.

It is He Who has sent His Messenger with Guidance
and the religion of Truth, to proclaim it over all
religion: and enough is Allah for a Witness.
Qur’an 48:28

We will, without doubt, help our apostles and those
who believe, (both) in this world’s life and on the Day
when the Witnesses will stand forth, —
Qur’an 40:51

God has very clearly promised here that Islam is going to be
universally acknowledged as the premier religion, and God has made
Himself as the witness to this promise. This is a very powerful promise,
and it has been realized on a localized basis in territories under Muslim
rule, but the Qur’anic verse hasn’t got any restrictive clause, which
means that at some time, it will apply to the whole world, if not the
whole universe. That’s an interesting idea. Does it mean that the whole
universe will follow Islam? If there are other planets with intelligent
beings, then maybe. However, elsewhere in the Qur’an it is stated that
this message is for man and jinn, so there are at least two types of
intelligent beings for whom this promise holds true.

They will not fight you (even) together, except in
fortified townships, or from behind walls. Strong
is their fighting (spirit) amongst themselves: thou
wouldst think they were united, but their hearts are
divided: that is because they are a people devoid
of wisdom.
Qur’an 59:14
The Qur’an 39

This is an amazing verse because you can witness the truth of what
is says right now, in the present. Check out the security wall the Israelis
are building around themselves to which they withdraw after attacking
the Palestinians, just like the crusader castles that are still in existence
from times long past. The Green Zone in Baghdad is another example
of the enemies of Islam fighting from behind fortified walls.
The Qur’an is not a book of prophecies, and there are very few
verses regarding actual worldly events. For this, we need to turn to the
sayings of the Messenger of God.
CHAPTER 3

The Prophecies of the
Messenger of God
Muhammad, the Messenger of God (God bless him), foretold events
pertaining to the Muslims that will occur until the end of time. But of
all the things that he must have said, only a small fraction is available
to us through the hadith (sayings of the prophet) that were meticu-
lously collected by great scholars such as Bukhari, Muslim, Abu Dawud,
and others.
Most Muslims believe in, and follow, the sayings of the Messenger
of God and do not have any doubt about the veracity of the hadith,
especially the ones collected and verified by the most distinguished of
scholars. However, as the hadith were collected several generations
after the time of the Messenger, they are not considered in the same
league as the Qur’an for authencity and lack of error.
Here, we have compiled sayings of the Messenger of God from mul-
tiple sources, including those hadith that are sound, those that are weak,
and even those that are examples of doubtful hadith. The doubtful
hadith that have been included are those that are popularly known and
were added for the sake of completion, and in order to refute them.
The sayings of the Messenger are listed in the order in which
events have already happened or are expected to happen.
The most striking thing is that if you read these sayings of the Mes-
senger, it seems as if they were being narrated by someone who is present

41
42 The Future Is for Islam

in the world today and who is looking at current events and making
predictions for the future. Yet, these sayings are almost 1,400 years old.
The extraordinary correlation of these prophecies with today’s
events points to the fact that the current era is one of the most impor-
tant times in Islamic history, and some truly amazing things are
happening already or are due to happen in the near future.
It is almost as if the Messenger of God were sending us the message
that Muslims going through this time of tribulations should keep up
their spirits as the events happening to them are destined to happen.
God is with them, and ultimate victory will be theirs.
The narratives we have included here start from the time of the
First World War in 1914 and end with the end of the world.
To look up the sources of the following hadith, please go to the
Hadith References at the back of the book.

THE MESSENGER OF GOD FORETOLD FUTURE EVENTS
1. Hudhaifa reported that Allah’s Messenger stood before us one
day, and he did not leave anything unsaid (that he had to say) at
that very spot which would happen (in the shape of turmoil) up to
the Last Hour. Those who had to remember them preserved them
in their minds, and those who could not remember them forgot
them. My friends knew them, and there are certain things that
slipped from my mind, but I recapitulate them when anyone makes
a mention of them, just as a person is lost from one’s mind but is
recalled to him on seeing his face.1

DOWNFALL OF MUSLIMS AND ITS CAUSES
2. Narrated Thawban: The Prophet said: The people will soon sum-
mon one another to attack you as people, when eating, invite others
to share their dish. Someone asked, “Will that be because of our
small numbers at that time?” He replied, “No, you will be numerous

1Muslim Book 041, Number 6909
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 43

at that time, but you will be scum and rubbish like that carried
down by a torrent, and Allah will take fear of you from the breasts
of your enemy and instill enervation into your hearts. Someone
asked, “What is enervation?” The Apostle of Allah replied, “Love
of the world and dislike of death.”2

3. Thawban reported that Allah’s Messenger said: Allah drew the
ends of the world near one another for my sake. And I have seen
its eastern and western ends. And the dominion of my Ummah
(Muslim community) would reach those ends which have been
drawn near me and I have been granted the red and the white
treasure and I begged my Lord for my Ummah that it should not be
destroyed because of famine, nor be dominated by an enemy who
is not amongst them to take their lives and destroy them root and
branch, and my Lord said, “Muhammad, whenever I make a deci-
sion, there is none to change it. Well, I grant you for your Ummah
that it would not be destroyed by famine and it would not be dom-
inated by an enemy who would not be amongst it and would take
their lives and destroy them root and branch, even if all the people
from the different parts of the world join hands together (for this
purpose), but it would be from amongst them, viz, your Ummah,
that some people would kill the others or imprison the others.3

It is clear from studying Islamic history that Muslims mostly lose
when they have internal rifts and some of them support their enemies
against each other. Here the “red and the white treasure” sounds like
a valuable physical commodity, but elsewhere it is referred to as the
“red and white death,” where the red death refers to death through war
and killing, and the white death refers to death through disease and
plague. For this to be called a treasure may imply that those who wish
to harm Muslims will suffer these punishments.

2Abu-Dawud Book 37, Number 4284
3Muslim Book 041, Number 6904
44 The Future Is for Islam

4. Narrated Abu Huraira: The Prophet said: The Jews were split up
into seventy-one; the Christians were split up into seventy-two
sects; and my community will be split up into seventy-three sects.4

This is the current situation, with the Muslims divided in a plethora
of nations, sects, ethnic groups, political parties, and every other
conceivable subgroup.

5. Auf bin Malik reported that the Prophet said: “The Jews split into
seventy-one sects; one will enter Paradise and seventy will enter
Hell. The Christians split into seventy-two sects; seventy-one will
enter Hell and one will enter Paradise. By Him in Whose hand is
my soul, my Ummah will split into seventy-three sects; one will
enter Paradise and seventy-two will enter Hell.” Someone asked,
“O Messenger of Allah, who will they be?” He replied, “The main
body of the Muslims.”5

The mainstream Muslims are the good people, and the sects and
splinter groups with their strange extremist ideas are the ones destined
for hell.
This saying of the Messenger of God tells us that the only righteous
Muslim is one who does not belong to any subdivision of Islam. He is
neither a Sunni nor a Shia, nor is he a Wahabi or a Hanafi, nor anything
else. He is simply a Muslim and follows the commandments of God
and leads a righteous life.

6. Narrated Hudhaifa bin Al-Yaman: The people used to ask Allah’s
Apostle about good, but I used to ask him about evil for fear that
it might overtake me. Once I said, “O Allah’s Apostle! We were in
ignorance and in evil and Allah has bestowed upon us the present
good; will there by any evil after this good?” He said, “Yes.” I asked,
“Will there be good after that evil?” He said, “Yes, but it would be

4Abu-Dawud Book 40, Number 4579
5Ibn Kathir
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 45

tainted with Dakhan (i.e., a little evil).” I asked, “What will its
Dakhan be?” He said, “There will be some people who will lead
(people) according to principles other than my tradition. You will
see their actions and disapprove of them.” I said, “Will there be any
evil after that good?” He said, “Yes, there will be some people who
will invite others to the doors of Hell, and whoever accepts their invi-
tation to it will be thrown in it (by them).” I said, “O Allah’s Apostle!
Describe those people to us.” He said, “They will belong to us and
speak our language.” I asked, “What do you order me to do if such
a thing should take place in my life?” He said, “Adhere to the group
of Muslims and their Chief.” I asked, “If there is neither a group
(of Muslims) nor a chief, what shall I do?” He said, “Keep away
from all those different sects, even if you had to bite (i.e., eat) the
root of a tree, till you meet Allah while you are still in that state.”6

7. Abdullah, son of Umar, said: The Prophet came to us and said,
“0 Muhajirun (emigrants from Mecca to Medina), you may be
afflicted by five things; God forbid that you should live to see
them. If fornication should become widespread, you should real-
ize that this has never happened without new diseases befalling
the people, which their forebears never suffered. If people should
begin to cheat in weighing out goods, you should realize that this
has never happened without drought and famine befalling the peo-
ple, and their rulers oppressing them. If people should withhold
Zakat (tithing and alms), you should realize that this has never
happened without the rain being stopped from falling; and were
it not for the animals’ sake, it would never rain again. If people
should break their covenant with Allah and His Messenger, you
should realize that this has never happened without Allah sending
an enemy against them to take some of their possessions by force.
If the leaders do not govern according to the Book of Allah, you

6Bukhari Book 56, Number 803
46 The Future Is for Islam

should realize that this has never happened without Allah making
them into groups and making them fight one another.”7

PHASES OF MUSLIM RULE

8. Hudhaifa, son of Al-Yaman, reported that the Messenger of Allah
said: “Prophethood (meaning himself) will remain with you for as
long as Allah wills it to remain, then Allah will raise it up whenever
he wills to raise it up. Afterwards, there will be a Caliphate that fol-
lows the guidance of Prophethood remaining with you for as long as
Allah wills it to remain. Then, he will raise it up whenever He wills
to raise it up. Afterwards, there will be a reign of oppressive rule (the
reign of Muslim kings who are partially just), and it will remain with
you for as long as Allah wills it to remain. Then, there will be a reign
of tyrannical rule, and it will remain for as long as Allah wills it to
remain. Then, Allah will raise it up whenever He wills to raise it up.
Then, there will be a Caliphate that follows the guidance of Prophet-
hood.” Then Hudhaifa said, “The Prophet stopped speaking.”8

The phases are as follows:

• The time of the Prophet;
• The time of the Righteous Caliphs that lasted about 30 years
from 632 until 661 AD;
• The rule of kings. This period lasted for over 1200 years until the
20th century and ended with the end of the Ottoman Sultanate.
• The rule of tyrants. This is the existing situation.
• The new Caliphate established by the Mahdi.

9. The Prophet declared: “This affair began with Prophethood and
as a mercy; then it will be mercy and Caliphate; afterwards it will

7Ibn Kathir, Ibn Majah
8As-Sililah As Sahihah, vol. 1, number 5. The same hadith without any changes is
also narrated by Hadhrat Nauman Ibn-e-Basheer in Musnad-e-Ahmad Ibn-e-Hanbal
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 47

change into a cruel monarchy, and finally into an iniquity and
tyranny.” He also prophesied: “Surely, the Caliphate after me will
last thirty years; afterwards, it will be a cruel monarchy.”9

WORLD WARS

10. A hadith reported by Imam Ali, Abu Huraira, and Ibn Abbas states:
The war of the end of time is the war of the world. There will be
a third war after two great wars in which many are killed. He
who will light the fires of the Second World War will be known
as the “Great Leader.”10
Thirteen hundred years after the Hijra, count a few decades.
At that time, the Greek King wants to wage a war against the entire
world. Meanwhile, Allah commands the war for that man.

9Abu Dawud, At’ıma, 11; Tirmidhi, At’ıma, 39; I. Hanbal, 5.441
10Al-Mahdi-ul Munthazar, Asmal Masalik Lieyyam Mahdiyy Maliki Li Kull-id Dunya
Biemrillah-il Malik (“The Best ways to know the time of the Mahdi, King of the
World, by Allah’s command”) by Qalda ibn Zayd.
The source mentioned for this narration is a rare hand-written book (manu-
script), dated some 300 years after the Hijra, which today is kept in Istanbul,
Turkey, in the Süleymaniye Library, under the section listed as “Islamic manu-
scripts 3664/Al Medina Al Munawara.” It contains an amazing collection of
narrations, compiled by its author, Qalda ibn Zayd.
It is said in another book, “Kitab Al-Fitan” by Abu ‘Abdullah Nu’aim bin
Hammad, that Abu Huraira had two areas of knowledge he gained from the Prophet;
one of them he imparted, while he hid the other. Abu Huraira commented on that
saying that if he had imparted the other area of knowledge, he would have been
slaughtered (and he pointed to his neck when saying so). The same hadith of Abu
Huraira’s “hidden knowledge” is also confirmed in Sahih Bukhari:
Narrated Abu Huraira: “I have memorized two kinds of knowledge from
Allah’s Apostle. I have propagated one of them to you and if I propagated the sec-
ond, then my throat would be cut (i.e., he would be killed).” (Bukhari, Book 3,
Number 121)
This prophetic narration is obviously from the area of knowledge Abu Huraira
“hid.” He is said to have disclosed this information on his death bed (he died in
59 AH/681 AD), and this is an esoteric narration that was compiled in Medina by
Qalda ibn Zayd in a manuscript dated to around 300 AH/922 AD. The ellipses (…)
represent those parts where the text has eroded.
48 The Future Is for Islam

A short while later, that is, in two decades, a man whose name
is associated with a cat name from the German lands appears as
a scourge on the Romans. He starts to bother people and wants
to hold control over the world. He wages war against the entire
world, both the warm and cold lands. After years filled with severe
war fires, he meets Allah’s punishment. Then, he is killed as the
Russians’ mystery.

As is quite evident from this hadith, there would be two major world
wars in the End Times. The world wars in the first half of the 20th cen-
tury were indeed two of the most momentous events in history. Again,
as revealed in the hadith, Hitler, who started the Second World War and
virtually declared war on the whole world, was known as the “Führer,”
meaning leader, guide, commander. Under National Socialism, this
word took on a new significance: the Führer was the “undisputed
leader,” or even the “deified leader.” The German people regarded
Hitler, who initiated World War II, as their undisputed and great leader.
In this part of the narration, the expression, “the Greek King wants
to wage a war against the entire world,” calls attention to a great war
that would spread all over the world. The Arabic word for the “decades”
is “ukud,” the plural form of the Arabic word “akd,” which implies the
meaning of “at least three.” In this case, when we add three decades
to the 1300 of the Hijra, we have 1330. The First World War started in
1332 of the Hijra, that is 1914, in the Gregorian calendar.
In early Islamic times, the Byzantine Empire was ruled from
Constantinople, which was part of ancient Greece. All European
Christians were referred to as Romans, and “Greek King” would also
mean a European Christian — probably Emperor Franz Joseph of the
Habsburg Dynasty whose country, Austria, initiated World War I by
declaring war on Serbia in 1914.
To say that “Allah commands war for that man” implies that God
may make use of the wars that men start to further His own purpose.
This idea is confirmed in the Qur’an, where it states that God sent His
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 49

“servants” — Nebuchadnezzar and his forces — against the disobedient
people of Jerusalem. So, even though Nebuchadnezzar wasn’t a believer,
he was nevertheless used by God for His purpose. The same may hold
true for Hitler, who broke the backs of the colonial powers and forced
them to give freedom to their colonies as a consequence of the Second
World War.
The man from the German lands is obviously Adolf Hitler. How-
ever, to refer to him as someone with a “cat name” is not as apt as
referring to him as someone with a “wolf name” because the name
Adolf is derived from the old German name Adalwuf, which means
“noble wolf.”

CONFLICTS IN THE MIDDLE EAST

11. Another portent of the Mahdi’s coming is the killing of a senior
member of the Hashemites.11

Jordan is known as the Hashemite Kingdom. After the Ottoman
Empire, it came under British control. Great Britain recognized
Jordanian independence in 1946, as part of the Treaty of London. The
monarchy was given to Abdullah, head of the principality of Jordan.
The British later killed King Abdullah in 1951. Thus, the incident
indicated in the hadith came to pass.

12. The inhabitants of Egypt and Sham will kill their ruler and his
commands…12

This hadith predicts that the rulers of Egypt and Syria will be killed
before the coming of the Mahdi. When we examine Egypt’s recent his-
tory, we see that a ruler was killed: Anwar al-Sadat, who ruled Egypt

11 Risalat al-Khuruj al-Mahdi, p. 12
12 Ibn Hajar al-Haythami, Al-Qawl al-Mukhtasar fi ‘Alamat al-Mahdi al-Muntazar, p. 49
50 The Future Is for Islam

from 1970-81, was killed by his opponents during a military review in
1981. Other Egyptian leaders who have been killed include Prime
Ministers Boutros-Ghali (1910) and Mahmoud Nukrashy Pasha (1948).
Many leaders have been killed in the region of Sham (left of Hijaz),
among them former Syrian prime ministers Salah al-Deen Beetar (1920),
Droubi Pasha (1921), and Muhsin al-Barazi (1949), King Abdullah of
Jordan (1951), and Lebanese Phalange leader Bashir Gemayel (1982).

13. The people of Sham will take prisoner the tribes of Egypt…13

Sham (Syria) is where Israel is located. During the 1967 Six-Day
War, the Israelis defeated the Egyptians and captured the Gaza Strip,
and the Sinai Peninsula. With the Camp David peace treaty, Egypt came
under the U.S./Israeli sphere of influence.

14. Count five or six or seven or eight decades after 1300 of Hijra. At
that time, a man “Nasser” rules Egypt. Arabs call him “succa-ul
Arab,” the “brave of the Arabs.” Allah despises him twice, once in
a war, and then in another one. That “Nasser” can never attain
victory…”14

The dates related in this particular hadith are between 1350 and
1380 Hijra. This is the time Gamal Abdul-Nasser came to power in
Egypt. In 1952, Abdul-Nasser came to power and led the movement
of Arab Nationalism. During the period of Nasser, two wars erupted
between Arabs and Israelis, and in both cases, Arabs were defeated.

15. …Upon this, Allah, the Lord of the House, makes a dark-colored
person, whose father is more enlightened than himself, the leader
of the Egyptian people and the Arab nation. But, he makes an
agreement with the thieves of the Masjid al-Aqsa…15

13Ibn Hajar al-Haythami, Al-Qawl al-Mukhtasar fi ‘Alamat al-Mahdi al-Muntazar, p. 49
14Asmal Masalik. See note 10.
15Asmal Masalik. See note 10.
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 51

Continuing with the hadith, it now calls attention to Anwar Sadat’s
coming to power. One of the most telling turning points of Anwar
Sadat’s time was the Arab-Israel peace talks, to which the hadith draws
our attention. As the hadith reveals, the lands of Masjid al-Aqsa would
not be under Muslim control, and the leader of Egypt would hold peace
talks with the country that exercises control over Masjid al-Aqsa. It is
possible that this hadith refers to the Arab-Israeli peace talks held at
Camp David in 1978 and 1979.

TWO ROMAN ARMIES

16. Narrated Auf bin Malik: I went to the Prophet during the expedi-
tion of Tabuk while he was sitting in a leather tent. He said, “Count
six signs that indicate the approach of the Hour:

1. My death (which occurred in 632 AD);
2. The conquest of Jerusalem (this occurred in 638 AD at the
hands of the second Caliph; Umar ibn al-Khattab);
3. A plague that will afflict you and kill you in great numbers as
the plague that afflicts sheep (This epidemic disease spread
immediately after the conquest of Jerusalem by Umar ibn al-
Khattab around 640 AD, at Anwas region in Syria-Damascus-
Palestine, which resulted in the deaths of 25,000 Muslims.);
4. The increase of wealth to such an extent that even if one is
given one hundred Dinars, he will not be satisfied (this is what
the situation is today in Arabia);
5. Then an affliction, which no Arab house will escape (this has
happened, is happening, and is intensifying as a result of the
declared “War on Terrorism”);
6. Then a truce between you and Bani Al-Asfar (the Byzantines),
who will betray you and attack you under eighty flags. Under
each flag will be twelve thousand soldiers.”16

16 Bukhari Book Number 53 Number 401
52 The Future Is for Islam

The last prediction may be in reference to the Gulf War, Great War,
or the current crusade of conquest in the Middle East. The number of
nations that were part of the coalition against “terrorism” after the
September 11 attacks was 80. However, if the “truce” is the seven-year
peace treaty between these nations and the Mahdi, then it obviously
is yet to happen.

17. Dhu Mukhammar said: The Prophet said: “You will make a peace
treaty with the Romans, and together you will invade an enemy
beyond Rome. You will be victorious and take much booty. Then
you will camp in a hilly pasture; one of the Roman men will
come and raise a cross and give victory to it, so one of the Muslims
will come and kill him. Then the Romans will break the treaty,
and there will be a battle. They will gather an army against
you and come against you with 80 flags, each flag followed by
12,000 men.”17

This is the U.S. (allied Romans) supported war in Afghanistan
against the Soviet Union (enemy Romans). The mountains refer to the
Hindu Kush Mountains.

18. Narrated with sound chains from Dhu Mikhbar al-Najashi: You
will make a firm truce with the Romans until you and they wage
a campaign against an enemy that is attacking them. You will be
granted victory and great spoils. Then you will alight in a plain
surrounded by hills. There, someone among the Romans shall say,
“The Cross has overcome!” Whereupon someone among the
Muslims shall say, “Nay, Allah has overcome!” and shall go and
break the cross. The Romans shall kill him, then the Muslims
shall take up their arms, and the two sides shall fall upon each
other. Allah shall grant martyrdom to that group of Muslims. After

17 Ahmad, Abu Dawud, Ibn Majah
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 53

that, the Romans shall say to their leader, “We shall relieve you
of the Arabs,” and they shall gather up for the great battle. They
shall come to you under 80 flags (nations), each flag (nation)
gathering 12,000 troops.18

This could be a reference to the Russian invasion of Afghanistan
in 1979, in which America (allied Roman force) formed an alliance
with the Muslims to fight the Russians (enemy Roman force). In 1989,
the Russians lost and retreated from Afghanistan. In 1990, the Soviet
Union fell, and America, along with its Muslim allies, gained victory
over them. Following that, the Roman forces invaded the Islamic world
in the Gulf War. What the cross is can only be based on speculation.
The area of “hilly pastures” is obviously Afghanistan, since the descrip-
tion fits well. The battle could be referring to the Gulf War. Also, each
of the 80 flags represents one nation, so there would be 80 different
nations involved in invading Muslim lands.

19. Na’im, son of Hammad, reported on his chain of narration on the
authority of Abdullah Ibn Masood, that the Messenger of Allah said:
The Romans will attack those Arabs who reside in their land, until
not a single Arab man or woman or child remains in their land
but that they shall be killed by the Romans.19

This hadith mentions Arabs residing in the Roman lands (North
America and Europe), not Muslims, and today Muslims are racially
stereotyped and profiled as being “Arabs.” This does not bode well
for the Muslims living in America and Europe. The Japanese were
interned in camps during World War II, and after 9/11, there was much
discussion in the American media and thinktanks about doing the
same to Muslims.

18 Ahmad, Abu Dawud, Ibn Majah
19 Kitab Al Fitan, Bab Al Aamaq wa fath al Constantiniya, p. 260
54 The Future Is for Islam

IRAN-IRAQ WAR

20. Abu Huraira reported Allah’s Messenger’s many hadith and one
of them was this: The last Hour will not come until the two
parties (of Muslims) confront each other and there is a large-
scale massacre amongst them and the claim of both of them is
the same.20

21. A nation/tribe will be coming forth from the Farsi direction, say-
ing, “You Arabs! You have been too zealous! If you don’t give them
their due rights, nobody will have alliance with you… It must be
given to them one day and to you the following day, and mutual
promises must be kept…” They will be going up Mutekh; Muslims
will be coming down to the plain… Hypocrites (non-believing
“Muslims”) will be standing over there on the bank of a black
river called Rakabeh on the other side. There will be a war between
them. Allah will deprive both armies of a victory…”21

Farsi means Persians or Iranians. Rakabeh is a region where oil
wells are concentrated. This hadith draws attention to a racial dispute
that would break out. Because of this dispute, the sides would come
down to the Iranian plains and then a war would get underway. As
noted by the hadith, the Iran-Iraq War lasted for eights years, and
despite thousands of casualties, no result was forthcoming for both
sides. Neither side could have a decisive victory.

THE GULF WAR

22. Then a cruel man appears in Iraq, which is located in the Damascus
region. This man, with a slight injury in his eye, is a Sufyaan. He

20 Muslim Book 041, Number 6902
21 Asmal Masalik. See note 10.
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 55

is Saddam. He is saddam against his opponents. All the world
gathers for him in small Kut, the region to which he came previously
because he was deceived.”22

In the final part of the hadith, attention is called to a “saddam”
person who would emerge from Iraq. The dictionary meaning of
“saddam” is “the one who strikes violently, assaults.” The hadith says
that this person would invade Kut; one of the names given to the region
that also includes Kuwait. Saddam Hussein was a dictator notorious
for the violence he exercised against his people during his reign. He
was deceived into invading Kuwait in 1990, and this invasion became
the pretext for Gulf War I.

23. Reported on a chain of transmission on the authority of Ka’b: The
sign of the Mahdi’s appearance will be war banners coming from
the west, lead by a man with a disability from “Kinda.”23

Kinda was a pre-Islamic kingdom in central Arabia that converted
to Judaism in the late 4th century.

24. And war in a country smaller than the end bone of the spinal cord,
the world will gather for its sake, as if it were the richest nation in the
world for which the world has gathered to feast around. Its leader
will surrender the banner to the leader of all evil, who will come
from the furthest Western shores, then the beginning of the end
as it wails to all the world to come to its aid. The leader will regain
his throne, and Iraq will be destroyed in the confrontation at the
end of time. The leader of the tiny nation will fight the Army of the
Mahdi, and the same tiny nation is again threatened with destruc-
tion because its leader is the cause of its corruption…the Mahdi

22 Asmal Masalik. See note 10.
23 Nuaym son of Hammad, Al-Fitan, p. 205
56 The Future Is for Islam

orders his execution and the small bone returns to the main
body again.24

The tiny nation mentioned in this hadith can be said to be Kuwait.

SANCTIONS ON IRAQ AND SYRIA
25. Abu Nadhrah says: “We were sitting in the company of Jabir, son
of Abdullah, when he said, ‘Soon the people of Iraq will neither
receive any food (grain) nor any money.’” We asked, “Why would
such a thing happen?” He replied, “Because of the non-Arabs.”
He then said, “Soon the people of (Syria) will neither receive any
money nor grain.” We asked as to why this would happen. He
replied, “Because of the Romans.”25

The Romans (Americans) did indeed prevent food from going into
Iraq, in the form of “sanctions,” which started after the Gulf War I. Also,
this hadith says that Syria would suffer the same fate. Syria most likely
means Palestine, as it was part of historical Syria.

ARAB-ISRAELI CONFLICT
26. Son of Hajr Al-’Asqalani related that Abu Idris Al-Khaulani heard
from Nahik son of Surim Al-Sakuni that the Messenger of Allah,
Muhammad (God bless him), said: “You will fight the unbelievers
until the remnant of you fights on the River Jordan, you to the east
of it and they to the west of it.” Al-Sakuni said that at that time he
did not know where the River Jordan was.26

What are the odds that the State of Israel would arise and have
as its eastern border the very dividing line of the River Jordan that

24Asmal Masalik. See note 10.
25Muslim, Book 41, Number 6961
26Ahmad
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 57

the Prophet said would be the demarcation line between the Muslim
armies and the Judeo-Christian armies! This is a prophecy fulfilled
indeed!

IRAQ WAR

27. Baghdad is destroyed by fire in the End Times…27

28. The people of Kufa will be divided into three parts. One part will
join the Tyrant’s army. These are the most wicked people Allah
created. Another group will wage war against them, and these peo-
ple are the honorable servants of Allah. Another part will join the
pillagers, and they are sinners.28

Iraq has indeed been divided into three parts as part of the divide-
and-conquer strategy. As far back as the 1970s, the Bernard Lewis map
of the Middle East had proposed that Iraq be split into three parts.

29. Doomsday will not come until Iraq is attacked and innocent people
in Iraq will seek shelter in (Syria). (Syria) will be reconstructed
and Iraq will be reconstructed.29

Nowadays, as a result of the American military occupation of Iraq,
over a million Iraqis are living as refugees in Syria.

IRAQ, SYRIA, EGYPT, AND THE ARABIAN PENINSULA

30. Our Prophet said: There will be such troubles and calamities that
nobody will be able to find a place of shelter. These woes will
move around Syria, fall upon Iraq, and tie the hands and feet of

27Risalat al-Khuruj al-Mahdi, vol. 3, p. 177
28An-Najmu’s Sakib Fi Beyanı Anna’l Mahdi Min Evlad Ali B. Abu Thalib
29Muntakhab Kanzul Ummal, vol. 5 p. 254
58 The Future Is for Islam

the Arabian Peninsula. The Community of Islam will fight against
troubles in the steppes. Nobody will feel any sympathy for them
or even say, “Alas!”As they try to remedy their woes on the one
hand, these will emerge again on the other.30

31. Narrated Abu Huraira: Allah’s Apostle said: Iraq will withhold its
dirham and qafiz; Syria will withhold its mudd and dinar and
Egypt will withhold its irdab and dinar and you will recoil to that
position from where you started and you will recoil to that posi-
tion from where you started and you will recoil to the position
from where you started, the bones and the flesh of Abu Huraira
will bear testimony to it.31

The triple repetition of “you will recoil…” is to emphasize that this
event will surely occur.
Compare the map of the Zionist empire. It includes Iraq, Egypt,
and Syria, as well as parts of Saudi Arabia, all mentioned in prophetic
narrations as countries that would get into difficulties.
Egypt can already be considered to be cut off from the Muslim
community. After the Camp David agreement with Israel, Egypt was
ostracized by the Arab world.

32. There will be ruins all around the world. Ultimately, Egypt will
also be ruined, but until Basra is destructed, Egypt will remain
secure. Basra will be in ruins because of Iraq’s destruction.
Meanwhile, the downfall of Egypt will come with the drying of
the Nile…32

33. The tribulation in Sham will calm down on the one hand and
flare up again on another. This corruption will not end until an

30Muntakhab Kanzul Ummal, vol. 5, p. 38-39
31Muslim Book 41, Number 4923
32Mukhtasar Tazkirah Qurtubi, p. 530
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 59

angel from the sky calls, ‘The Mahdi is your leader. The Mahdi is
your caliph.”33

Sham — Syria — has historically consisted of the area that makes
up the present-day states of Syria, Lebanon, Jordan, and Israel.

WAR OF THE EUPHRATES

34. The halting of the Euphrates is one of the portents of the Mahdi. 34

The above hadith indicates that the Euphrates incident occurs
before the Mahdi, near the time of his emergence. Many respected
books of hadith mention both of these events. The Muslim scholar
Imam Al-Suyuti refers to this hadith as “the stopping of water.” In fact,
the Keban Dam has stopped the flow of this river’s water. Thus, this
part of the Euphrates prediction has already come to pass.

35. Abu Huraira said: The Prophet said: “The Hour will not come
before the Euphrates uncovers a mountain of gold, for which
people will fight. Ninety-nine out of one hundred will die, but
everyone among them will say that perhaps he will be the one who
will survive (and thus possess this gold).”35

36. Narrated Ubayy ibn Ka’b: I heard Allah’s Apostle say: The Euphrates
will soon uncover a mountain of gold, and when the people will
hear of it, they will flock towards it, but the people who will pos-
sess that treasure will say: If we allowed these persons to take
out of it, they would take away the whole of it. So, they will fight,
and ninety-nine out of one hundred will be killed.36

33Risalat al-Khuruj al-Mahdi, p. 63
34Al-Muttaql al-Hindi, Al-Burhan fi Alamat al-Mahdi Akhir al-Zaman, p. 39
35Muslim Book 41, Number 6918

36Muslim Book 41, Number 6922
60 The Future Is for Islam

This can be construed to be the invasion of Iraq to capture its oil
resources, although the meaning may be literal, and perhaps there
really are gold deposits there.

FIGHT FOR THE CALIPHATE

37. Reported by Hadhrat Ali: So do not rebuke the people of Syria,
but rebuke the evil people among them because amongst them are
Al Abdal (pious saints). A flood is about to be sent down upon the
people of Syria, which will disperse their groups in such a way that
if foxes attacked them, they would be beaten. At that time, a man
from the Family of my House will come under three banners; with
12-15,000 men and their password is, “Die, die.” Then, there will
come seven banners, and under each will be one man seeking the
kingdom. Allah will kill all of them and restore unity and favors upon
the hearts of Muslims, and those who were far will come close.37

The fight between one group with three banners and another
group with seven banners seems to refer to a civil war between Muslim
antagonists, none of whom will win, and it is only when both groups
are destroyed that Muslim unity will be restored.

THE TYRANT

The Arabic term Sufyaani refers to a Muslim ruler who is a tyrant.
Abu Sufyaan was a determined and bitter enemy of the Messenger of
God who accepted Islam at a late date. His son Muawiyah went on to
become the caliph after the four rightly guided caliphs and founded
the Umayyad Dynasty in Damascus. Because of political conflict dur-
ing the time of Muawiyah and his son Yazid, the Islamic world was split
into the Shia and Sunni factions.

37 Found in references of Ahmad, Abu Dawud, Ibn Majah and At-Tabarani
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 61

In this book, we will use the word Sufyaani interchangeably with
the term “Tyrant.”

38. “The Mahdi will not come until The Sufyaani is established.”38

39. Reported by Abu Huraira: “A man named the Sufyaani will come
from the center of Damascus. The majority of his followers will
be from the tribe of Kalb. He will kill until he rips women open and
kills children. So, the tribe of Kays will rise up in retaliation,
and he will slaughter all of them! Then, a man from the Family
of my House will come in Al Hirrah and the news will reach
the Sufyaani. Then he will send his army, but it will suffer defeat.
The Sufyaani will march with his followers to him until they reach
a desert, and the ground will swallow them up. None will be saved,
except the one bearing the news.”39

INVASIONS OF IRAQ AND AFGHANISTAN

40. Imam Ali said: “The horses of the Tyrant will go to Kufa (Iraq),
and he will send his army against the dwellers of Khurasan. (At
that time) the people of Khurasan will demand the Mahdi. He
that meets with the Hashimi with the Black Banners at his front
is Shuayb, the son of Salih, who will engage the Tyrant at the
Gate of Istakhr (Shiraz in Iran) — between them, there will be a
tremendously fierce battle and the Black Banners will win, but the
horses of the Tyrant will escape. It is at that time that the people
will wish for the Mahdi, because they will need him.”40

This saying of the Messenger refers to both Iraq and Afghanistan
being invaded at the same time. This matches the current circumstances.

38Al Walid, son of Muslim
39Son of Hibban, At-Tirmizi, Abuya’li, At-Tabarani, Al Bazaar, Abu Nuaym and Al Hakim
40Unconfirmed source.
62 The Future Is for Islam

It also mentions a failed attack on Iran (Istakhr), and that this will be
the time when people start wishing for the Mahdi.
Khurasan is an ancient name for an area that includes northeastern
Iran, Afghanistan, and parts of Central Asia. There is a province
nowadays in Iran called Khurasan that borders on Afghanistan.
If Khurasan refers to Iran, then it means that after the invasion of
Iraq, there will be an attack on Iran, which, as of this writing, is being
talked about in the media.

41. Imam Ali said: “The Tyrant will overcome Syria, then between
them, there will be a battle in Kurkisa until the birds of the air are
filled and the savage animals of the earth are filled from their per-
ishing. Then, an opening will occur at their rear, and a group will
come from them until they enter the land of Khurasan. The horses
of the Tyrant will come demanding the people of Khurasan, and
they will slay the followers of the Family of Muhammad in Kufa;
then the people of Khurasan will come seeking the Mahdi.”41

It is interesting to note that, according to this narration, the Tyrant
would come to Afghanistan demanding that some people be handed
over to him. The Americans went to Afghanistan asking for Osama
Bin Laden and his followers.
During the time of the Messenger of God, the borders of Syria and
Iraq would have been very different from what they are now, so it may
be safe to assume that the references to Syria could, in fact, point to
the present-day Iraq.

42. “There will be a city called Zawra between the Tigris and the
Euphrates. There will be a great battle there. Women will be taken
prisoner, and men will have their throats cut like sheep.”42

41 Unconfirmed source.
42 Muntakhab Kanzul Ummal, vol. 5, p. 38
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 63

Zawra is an ancient name for Baghdad.

43. “Between the Tigris and the Euphrates, a city will be built where
the children of Abbas will reign. It is called Zawra (Baghdad)…”
“O leader of the believers, why is it called Zawra?” “It is called
Zawra because the war surrounds it, expanding to the borders.”43

During the Abbasid Dynasty, the seat of the caliphate was shifted
from Damascus in Syria to Baghdad in Iraq. Baghdad was purpose-built
by the Abbasids as the capital city.

INVASION OF SAUDI ARABIA

44. Narrated Abdullah, son of Umar: The Prophet said: “The Muslims
will soon be besieged up to Medina, so that their most distant
frontier outpost will be Salah.”44

Salah is a town about 200 miles north of the city of Medina. This
will be how close the anti-Islamic armies will come to the heart of the
Muslim world.
This also suggests that Saudi Arabia will be invaded — a possibility
that is being very openly and casually discussed by some neoconser-
vative thinktanks in the West.

SIGNS OF THE MAHDI

45. Narrated Na’im, son of Hammad: Allah Almighty will send the
Mahdi after despair has reached the point that people will say,
“There is no Mahdi.”45

43Mukhtasar Tazkirah al-Qurtubi, p. 426, Number 776
44Abu Dawud Book 35, Number 4237A
45Jesus Will Return by Harun Yahya, p. 53
64 The Future Is for Islam

46. Ammar, the son of Yasir, said: “When the Tyrant reaches Kufa
and kills the supporters of the family of Muhammad (God bless
him), the Mahdi will come and the bearer of his Banner will be
Shuayb, the son of Salih.”46

Kufa is a city in Iraq. The war in Iraq will be a prelude to the
coming of the Mahdi.

47. A star with a luminous tail will rise from the east before the
Mahdi emerges.47

48. The rise of that star will occur after the eclipse of the sun and
the moon.48

49. A comet appears when kings go on the pilgrimage to Mecca for
travel, the wealthy for commerce, the poor for rest, and the hafiz
(reciter of the Qur’an) to show off.49

50. “When this comet first appeared, the people of Prophet Noah per-
ished, Prophet Abraham was cast into fire, Pharaoh and his people
who fought against Prophet Moses perished, and John (Yahya)
passed away. When you see that comet, take refuge in God from
the evil of tribulation.”50

51. In its section on the signs of the Mahdi’s emergence, the book Iqd
al-Durar states: “There will be the emergence of a big flare, which
is seen in the east, in the sky for three nights; the sighting of an
extraordinary redness, not as red as the usual color of the dawn,
and it is spread over the horizon.”51

46Unconfirmed source.
47Muhammad ibn ‘Abd al-Rasul Barzanji, Al-Isha’ah li Ashrat as-Sa’ah, p. 200
48Al-Muttaqi al-Hindi, Al-Burhan fi ‘Alamat al-Mahdi Akhir az-Zaman, p. 32

49Muhammad ibn ‘Abd al-Rasul Barzanji, Al-Isha’ah li Ashrat as-Sa’ah, p.123

50Al-Muttaqi al-Hindi, Al-Burhan fi ‘Alamat al-Mahdi Akhir az-Zaman, p. 32

51Al-Muttaqi al-Hindi, Al-Burhan fi ‘Alamat al-Mahdi Akhir az-Zaman, p. 32
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 65

The flares could be from huge fires ignited by bombing of the oil
fields. The oil-producing region of Dhahran in Saudi Arabia is directly
east of Medina, where the Messenger used to live.

52. Amr, son of Shamer, quoted Jabir, who quoted Muhammad, son
of Ali, to have said: “For our Mahdi, there are two signs. Since the
birth of the Universe, these events have never taken place. Those
two signs are that there will be a lunar eclipse on the first night
of Ramadan and a solar eclipse in the middle of Ramadan.”52

This narration is not attributed to the Messenger of God, but attrib-
uted to Muhammad, son of Ali. No other person has substantiated this
alleged statement of Muhammad, son of Ali. Muslim scholars have
always rejected this and other narrations of Amr and Jabir, as both
have been known to transmit unreliable and forged narrations. We have
included the statement here, as it is a commonly quoted hadith.

53. Reported by a companion, who informed Mujahid: “Surely, the
Mahdi will not come until the purified soul has been killed.
When this occurs, those in the heaven and those on earth will be
angry. So, people will come in a procession to the Mahdi; like
the procession of a bride to her husband on their wedding
night, and he will fill the earth with fairness and justice, and
the earth will produce its plants and the heaven will pour its
rain, and my nation will enjoy his government and favors never
before enjoyed.”53

54. When an innocent child of the community of Muhammad is killed,
an angel from the sky will cry: “God is with him (the Mahdi) and
with those who are with him.”54

52Dar-e-Qatni, Vol. 1, p. 188
53Found in reference to son of Abu Shaybah
54Muhammad bin Ali Sabban, Ishaf ar-Raghibin, p. 154
66 The Future Is for Islam

The Mahdi will come when innocent Muslim children are being
killed. This is happening now and is referred to as “collateral damage.”
This is clearly angering those on earth, and it would certainly anger
those in heaven.

55. The Mahdi will only appear at a time when people are experienc-
ing great fear and are afflicted by disturbances, civil war, and
other disasters.55

Most of the Muslim world is being roiled by the above problems.

BATTLES IN MINA
Although in the past, some incidents of violence have occurred during
and after Haj in Mecca at the Ka’ba and in Mina, these may not be the
ones that are implied here as the hadith appears to be saying that there
will be battles in Mecca during or just after Haj and the Mahdi will
appear while this is still going on.

56. The year in which he (the Mahdi) will emerge, people will perform
Haj together and gather without an imam. The Hajis will be looted,
and there will be a battle at Mina, in which many will be slain and
blood will flow until it runs over the Jamra al-’Aqaba.56

Jamra: a stone pillar representing Satan that is stoned during the
pilgrimage. In this location, there will be a conflict that will result in
many deaths. This area of Mecca has in recent years suffered many
deaths from stampedes because of the large crowds. However, what
is being talked about in the hadith is warfare.

57. “People pay pilgrimage without an imam leading them. Big wars
break out when they come down to Mina, and they are entwined

55 Narrated by Abu Ja’far Muhammad ibn ‘Ali
56 Narrated by ‘Amr ibn Shu’ayb, al-Hakim and Nu’aym ibn Hammad
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 67

just the way dogs entwine and tribes will attack each other. It is
to such an extent that legs are buried in lakes of blood.”57

58. “There come the cries of war in Shawwall (tenth Islamic month)
with the outbreak of a war and massacre and carnage in Dhu al-
Hijja (twelfth Islamic month) and again the plundering of pilgrims
in Dhu al-Hijja, and the crossing of streets is not even possible
because of bloodshed, and religious prohibitions are violated. Big
sins are committed near Beyt-ül Muazzam (Ka’ba).”58

An incident occurred in the month of Dhu al-Hijja (twelfth Islamic
month) in the 1407 (1987) pilgrimage season, which actually took place
near the Ka’ba. More than 400 people, mostly Iranian pilgrims, were
killed and 649 wounded in Mecca when security forces clashed with
Iranians over an anti-U.S. demonstration.

59. There will be tumult in Shawwal (tenth Islamic month), talks of
war in Dhu al-Qi’dah (eleventh Islamic month), and the outbreak
of war in Dhu al-Hijja (twelfth Islamic month).59

60. Reported by Abdullah son of Amr: “In the month of Dhu-Qi’dah
(eleventh Islamic month), the tribes will start to fight, and pil-
grims will be robbed. There will be a fierce battle at Mina until
their companion escapes and he will be pledged allegiance
between Al Rukn and Al Makam although he dislikes it. The alle-
giance will be pledged by the same number of fighters at Badr,
and the inhabitants of the Heaven and Earth will be pleased
with him.”60

57Kitab-ül Burhan Fi Alameti-il Mehdiyy-il Ahir Zaman, p. 35
58Kitab-ül Burhan Fi Alameti-il Mehdiyy-il Ahir Zaman, p. 37
59Muhammad ibn ‘Abd al-Rasul Barzanji, Al-Isha’ah li-Ashrat as-Sa’ah, p. 166

60Al Hakim, Nuaym son of Hammad’s book ‘Al Fitan’
68 The Future Is for Islam

The Battle of Badr was the first armed conflict that the Muslims
fought, and there were 313 people in the Muslim army, apart from
the Prophet.

61. There will be a voice in Ramadan (ninth Islamic month), and a
voice in Shawwal (tenth Islamic month). In Dhu al-Qi’dah (eleventh
Islamic month), the tribes will fight one another. In Dhu al-Hijja
(twelfth Islamic month), pilgrims will be despoiled. In Muharram
(first Islamic month), there will be a shout from the sky: “Take
heed. Such a person is of the auspicious ones of the people of
God. Listen to and obey him.”61

This saying seems to connect the events at Mina during the Dhu
al-Hijja (twelfth Islamic month) with the coming of the Mahdi the
following month in Muharram (first Islamic month). So, the Mahdi
appears after a Haj during which there will be much violence.

THE MAHDI

62. Ibni Munavi said that Danyal (Daniel) reported in his book that
“There are 3 Tyrants and 3 Mahdis. When the first Tyrant appears
and his name and fame become widespread, the first Mahdi will
confront him, the second Mahdi will confront the second Tyrant,
and the third Mahdi will confront the third Tyrant, and Allah, the
Exalted, will send him (the third Mahdi) to save the ones who have
suffered mischief, and the believers. The Sunnah will be revived
through him, and oppression, injustice, and cruelty will come to
an end through him. The people will be highly prized and become
victorious over their opponents at his time. A beautiful life will
be lived, and the earth and the heavens will increase their blessing.62

Ramuz al-Ahadith, vol. 2, p. 518, number 5
61

This hadith exists in a handwritten copy of the book titled Al-Burhan fi Alamat
62

al-Mahdi Akhir al-Zaman held in the Suleymaniye Library, Istanbul, Turkey.
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 69

63. Son of Masood said: When commerce and roads are blocked and
trials increase, seven knowledgeable people will come from dif-
ferent directions without previous appointment. Each will receive
the allegiance of over three hundred men until they meet in Mecca.
The seven will meet and ask one another; “What brought you
here?” They will reply, “We are in search of the man upon whose
hand the trials will be calmed, and for whom Constantinople
will be opened. We know him by his name, his father’s name, his
mother’s name, and his army.” So, the seven will agree upon this
and search for him, then find him in Mecca. They will ask him,
“Are you so and so, son of so and so?” He will reply, “No, I am a
man from the supporters.” He will escape from them, so they will
describe him to people in their midst that are both righteous and
knowledgeable, and it will be said to them: “The one whom you
seek was in your company, and he went to Medina.” So, they will
search for him in Medina, but at that time, he will be in Mecca.
They will search for him in Mecca and say to him: “You are so and
so, son of so and so, and your mother is so and so, daughter of so
and so, and in you are the signs of such and such, and such and
such. You escaped from us once, so stretch out your hands, and
we will pledge our allegiance to you.” But he will say, “I am not
your companion.” Then he will escape from them, and they would
search for him in Medina while he would have returned to Mecca,
then they will find him in Mecca beside Al Rukn and say to him:
“Our sins will be upon you and our blood upon your neck if you
do not stretch out your hand so that we may pledge our allegiance!
The army of the Tyrant is coming demanding from us a man from
Jurm.” So, he will sit between Al Rukn and Al Makam and stretch
out his hand, and allegiance will be pledged to him. Allah will sow
love of him in the chests of the people, and he will lead a nation
of those who are lions during the day and worshippers at night.63

63 Found in reference to Ali, son of Abu Talib
70 The Future Is for Islam

There is an area around Mecca that is called Umm al Jurm, where
the tribe of Jurm lived. Jurm could also refer to Jurm District in
Badakhshan Province, Afghanistan, where the people of the Jurm
tribe of Arabia may have settled. The people who will forcibly pledge
allegiance to the Mahdi could be the “Afghans,” as those Arabs who
fought in Afghanistan are called.

64. “People will gather around the Mahdi in 1400.”64

65. “Count two or three decades after the year/decade of Hijri 1400.
At that time, the Mahdi emerges…”65

The second decade of 1400 hijri is 1411–1420, which spans
from 1990–2000. The third decade of 1400 hijri is 1421–1430, which
spans from 2000–2009. If we are counting after the decade of 1400
instead of the year 1400, then that would mean the second decade
is 1421-1430, and the third decade is 1431-1440, which spans from
2009-2019.

66. Son of Asakir quoted Yunus, son of Maysara, son of Halbas,
as saying that the Prophet had stated: “This matter (namely the
Caliphate) will be after me in Medina, then in Syria, then in the
Jazeera, then in Iraq, then in Medina, then in Jerusalem. If it is in
Jerusalem, its home country is there, and if any people expel it,
it will not return there forever.”66

The caliphate’s first location was in Medina during the time of
the Rightly Guided Caliphs. Then it moved to Damascus, where the
Umayyad Dynasty was based. Later, during the time of the Abbasids,

64Risalat al-Khuruj al-Mahdi, p. 108
65Asmal Masalik. See note 10.
66Ibn Asakir, Tahdhib Tarikh Dimashq al-Kabir, Volume 1, p. 42 (Dar al-Masiyrah,

Beirut, 1979)
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 71

the seat of government was moved to the area of Iraq referred to as the
“Jazeera,” and once Baghdad was built, the capital was moved there.
The Abbasid Caliphate was abolished in 1258, when the Mongols
sacked Baghdad. After that period, various dynasties have laid claim to
the title of the caliphate, but none have been universally acknowledged
by Muslims.
When the new caliphate returns with the appearance of the Mahdi,
it is going to be based in Medina. At some point during his rule, the
Mahdi is predicted to migrate to Jerusalem and would thus fulfill
the prophecy for the final location of the Caliphate.

67. Narrated by Hudhaifa, The Prophet said: “Woe to this nation from
the dictatorship of kings! Why do they kill and make pious people
fear except those who obey them, and the pure believer soothes
them with his tongue but resists them with his heart? If Allah
wishes to revive Islam in might, He will break the back of every
stubborn tyrant — He is able to do anything and can reform the
nation after its corruption. O Hudhaifa, if there remains but one
day left in the world, Allah will prolong that day until a man from
the Family of my House will govern and fierce battles will be in his
hands, and Islam will spread. Allah does not change His Promise,
and He is quick to recompense.”67

68. Reported by Abu Sa’id al-Khudri: “A man from my nation will come
who speaks with my Sunnah, and Allah, the Mighty, the Glorified,
will send showers of rain from the heavens so that the earth will
produce its blessing. Through him, the earth will be filled with
fairness and justice, just as it had been filled by oppression and
injustice. He will govern this nation for seven years, and go to
Jerusalem.”68

Abu Nuaym, At-Tabarani, and Abu Amru Ad Dani
67

Abu Dawud, Al Hakim, At-Tirmizi, Ahmad, son of Hibban, Muslim, Al Tabarani,
68

Al Barudi and Abu Nuaym
72 The Future Is for Islam

69. Ali said that The Prophet said, ‘The Mahdi is one of us, from among
the people of my household. In one night, Allah will inspire him
and prepare him to carry out his task successfully.69

70. Ali said that the Prophet said: “The birth place of the Mahdi will
be in Medina. He is from the family of the House of the Prophet,
and his migration is to the House of Jerusalem. His beard is thick,
his eyes naturally mascaraed, his teeth are radiant, and upon his
face is a mole, and upon his shoulder is the Sign of the Prophet.
And he will come out under the Banner of the Prophet made from
a marked woolen black square that will not have been unfolded
since the Messenger, and it will not be unfolded until the Mahdi
comes. Allah will support him with three thousand angels who
will beat the faces and buttocks of those that oppose him. He will
be sent between the age of thirty and forty.”70

71. Abu Is-haq told that Ali, son of Abu Talib, looked at his son Hassan
and said: “This son of mine is a sayyid (chief) as named by the
Prophet, and from his loins will come forth a man who will be
called by the name of your Prophet and resemble him in conduct,
but not in appearance. He then mentioned the story about his
filling the earth with justice.”71

72. Hadhrat Abdullah, son of Masood, reports from the Prophet, who
said: “The world will not come to pass until a man from among
my family, whose name will be my name, rules over the Arabs.”72

73. Hadhrat Ali narrates that the Messenger of Allah said: “Even if only
a day remains for doomsday to come, yet Allah will surely send a

69Ahmad and son of Majah
70Nu’aym ibn Hammad, Kitab al-Fitan, Number 73
71Sunan Abu Dawud, Book 36, Number 4276A

72Tirmidhi Sahih, Vol. 9, P. 74; Abu Dawud, Sahih, Vol. 5, p. 207; also narrated by

Ali, son of Abu Talib, Abu Sa’id, Umm Salma, Abu Huraira
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 73

man from my family who will fill this world with such justice and
fairness, just as it initially was filled with oppression.”73

74. Umme Salmah, the Prophet’s wife, narrates that she heard the
Prophet say: “The promised Mahdi will be among my progeny,
among the descendants of Fatima.”74

75. The Messenger of Allah announced: “The Mahdi will be of my
family, of the descendants of Fatima (the Prophet’s daughter).”75

76. Narrated Abu Sa’id al-Khudri: The Prophet said, “The Mahdi
will be of my stock, and will have a broad forehead and an
aquiline nose. He will fill the earth will equity and justice, as
it was filled with oppression and tyranny, and he will rule for
seven years.”76

77. Narrated by Hudhaifa, The Prophet said: “The Mahdi is a man
from my children. His face is like a glittering star, his skin is the
color of an Arab, and his body is like that of Israel. He will fill
the earth with justice just as it will have been filled by injus-
tice, and the dwellers of Heaven and Earth will be pleased with
his Caliphate.”77

78. “There have been four great kings on the Earth: Two were believers
and two were unbelievers. The believers were Dhu’l-Qarnayn
(thought to be Alexander the Great) and Solomon, and the unbe-
lievers were Nimrod and Nebuchadnezzar. There will be a fifth king
to rule the world, who will be from the people of my House.”78

73Sunan Abu Dawud, Book 36, Number 4270
74Sunan Abu Dawud, Book 36, Number 4271
75Sunan Ibn Majah, Vol. 2, Tradition Number 4086

76Sunan Abu Dawud, Book 36, Number 4272

77Abu Nuaym, At-Tabarani, and Abu Amru Ad Dani

78Ibn al-Jawzi, Mektubat-i Rabbani, 2/1163
74 The Future Is for Islam

79. “The Mahdi will rule the world like the Prophet Dhu’l-Qarnayn
and the Prophet Solomon.”79

The great scholar of Islam, Imam Al-Suyuti, is considered by many
to have been one of the reformers of Islam that the Prophet Muhammad
(God bless him) said God would send every one hundred years to renew
the religion. He lived more than 400 years ago at a time of the 1,000-year
millennial of the Hijra, when, for subjective reasons, many common
Muslims thought the Imam Mahdi was to come to usher in the Kingdom
of God. The Imam wrote a book refuting any significance to the year
1000 A.H. (Hijri on the Islamic calendar). He also wrote that, according
to his knowledge and all his understanding of the Hadith and the Qur’an,
the year of the Imam Mahdi will be some time in the 15th Islamic cen-
tury. We are now in the early part of the 15th Islamic century. What is
also significant is that the Mahdi is expected to appear in the second
or third decade of this Islamic century (where we currently are). It
should also be noted, however, that according to the Qur’an, no one
can predict when exactly the Day of Judgment itself will occur.

80. “The Mahdi will own the entire world.”80

81. “The Mahdi will invade all the places between East and West.”81

The above two hadith demonstrate that the Mahdi’s rule will span
the entire world, and previous hadith show that his rule will be like that
of the Prophet and King Solomon.

SINKING OF THE ARMY IN THE DESERT
82. Aisha reported that Allah’s Messenger was startled in the state of
sleep. We said: “Allah’s Messenger, you have done something in

79Ibn Hajar al-Haythami, Al-Qawl al-Mukhtasar fi ‘Alamat al-Mahdi al-Muntazar, p. 29
80Al-Muttaqi al-Hindi, Al-Burhan fi ‘Alamat al-Mahdi Akhir al-Zaman, p. 10
81Ibn Hajar al-Haythami, Al-Qawl al-Mukhtasar fi ‘Alamat al-Mahdi al-Muntazar, p. 56
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 75

the state of your sleep which you never did before?” Thereupon
he said: “Strange it is that some people of my Ummah (community)
would attack the House (Ka’ba) (to kill) a person who would
belong to the tribe of the Quraish, and he would try to seek pro-
tection in the House. And when they would reach the plain ground,
they would be sunk.” We said: “Allah’s Messenger, all sorts of
people throng the path.” Thereupon he said: “Yes, there would be
amongst them people who would come with definite designs and
those who would come under duress, and there would be travel-
ers also, but they would all be destroyed through one (stroke)
of destruction, though they would be raised in different states
(on the Day of Resurrection). Allah would, however, raise them
according to their intention.82

According to this narration, when the Mahdi appears, the army
that comes to kill him but sinks in the desert will be Muslim, or it could
be a foreign-led army, with Muslims making up the rank and file.

83. Umm Salamah reported that the Prophet said: “Disagreement
will occur at the death of a ruler, and a man from the people of
Medina will flee to Mecca. Some of the people of Mecca will come
to him, bring him out against his will, and swear allegiance to him
between the corner (of the Ka’ba) and the Station of Abraham. An
army will then be sent against him from Syria, but will be swallowed
up in the desert between Mecca and Medina. When the people see
that, the Al-Abdal (eminent saints) of Syria and the best people
of Iraq will come to him and swear allegiance to him.83
Then, a man from Quraish whose mother is from Kalb will
appear and send against them an army, which will be overcome
by them, and that is the Battle of Kalb. Disappointed will be the
one who does not receive the booty of Kalb. He will divide the

82 Muslim Book 041, Number 6890
83 Sunan Abu Dawud, Book 36, Number 4273
76 The Future Is for Islam

property, and will govern the people by the Sunnah of the Prophet.
He will remain seven years, then die, and the Muslims will pray
over him.”

This hadith appears to suggest that the ruler of Syria at the
time and the Tyrant are two different people. This hadith is consid-
ered to be “weak,” so the actual differentiation between the ruler
of Syria and the Tyrant may not be accurate. However, it mentions
that, prior to the Madhi, a disagreement will occur after the death
of a ruler. This is significant, as we have seen in other hadith that
people would be fighting over the (possibly Saudi) kingdom before
the Mahdi comes, so this part of the hadith is relevant, especially in
relation to current events. Therefore, the weakness of this hadith
may not mean it is “fabricated” as much as that it was simply not
narrated correctly.

84. An army comes to fight. Once they enter the desert, the one in the
front and the back disappear, and the ones in the middle cannot
save themselves.84

85. Tubay said: “A man will seek refuge in Mecca and will be killed,
then after that, a long period of time will pass, then another man
(the Mahdi) will seek refuge in Mecca, but if you meet him, do not
fight him, for if you do, you will be part of the army that will be
sunk and destroyed.”85

The first incident occurred in the Grand Mosque of Mecca in
November 1979, when hundreds of Saudi dissidents led by Juhaiman
al Utaiba seized control of the Ka’ba, and they were killed after heavy
fighting.

Tirmidhi, Sunan Ibn Majah, Sunan Abu Dawud
84

Nu’aym ibn Hammad, Kitab Al Fitan, “Sinking and Destruction of the Army of
85

the Sufyaani”, p. 202
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 77

BLACK BANNERS FROM KHURASAN

“The army from Khurasan” that will come to help the Mahdi has devel-
oped a legendary status in Islamic prophecy circles. Khurasan is most
likely to be Iran, but can also be Afghanistan or, as an outside chance,
even Pakistan, as ancient Khurasan may have included parts of north-
western Pakistan. When the black banners — the army — from
Khurasan are referred to, it does not necessarily mean that they will
constitute the whole fighting force of the Mahdi, but that they will be
among its constituents. Their coming to support the Mahdi will be one
of the signs that the Mahdi is here.
The historical region of Khurasan extended along the north from
the Amu Darya (Oxus River) westward to the Caspian Sea and, along
the south, from the fringes of the central Iranian deserts eastward to
central Afghanistan. Arab geographers even spoke of its extending to
the boundaries of India.
The people from Khurasan could be Iranians, Afghans, or even
Arabs, as a large number of Arabs went to Afghanistan to fight the
Soviet invasion, and they are known as the “Afghans.” In addition,
almost half a million Pakistanis fought in the Afghanistan war at var-
ious times and would support the Mahdi. In short, there will be far
more people rushing to support the Mahdi than he would be in need of.

86. Abdullah, son of al-Harith, son of Juz’ al-Zubaydi, said: The Prophet
said: “A people will come out of the East who will pave the way
for the Mahdi.”86

87. “Pity poor Taliqan (a region in Afghanistan) that at that place are
treasures of Allah, but these are not of gold and silver. There are
people who have recognized Allah, as they should have. They are
the supporters of the Mahdi in the End Times.”87

86 Ibn Majah
87 Al-Muttaqi al-Hindi, Al-Burhan fi Alamat al-Mahdi Akhir al-zaman, p. 59
78 The Future Is for Islam

88. On the authority of Thawban, the Messenger of Allah said: “Before
your treasure, three will kill each other — all of them are sons of
a different caliph, but none will be the recipient. Then the Black
Banners will appear from the East, and they will kill you in a way
that has never before been done by a nation.” Thawban, a com-
panion, said: “Then he said something that I do not remember by
heart.” Then he continued to say that the Prophet, praise and peace
be upon him, said: “If you see him, give him your allegiance, even
if you have to crawl over ice, because surely he is the Caliph of
Allah, the Mahdi. If you see the black (meaning war) flags coming
from Khurasan, join that army, even if you have to crawl over ice,
for this is the army of the Caliph, the Mahdi, and no one can stop
that army until it reaches Jerusalem.”88

89. Related by Abu Huraira: The Prophet said: “(Armies carrying)
black flags will come from Khurasan. No power will be able to stop
them, and they will finally reach Jerusalem, where they will erect
their flags.”89

90. Narrated Ali, son of Abu Talib: The Prophet said: “A man called
al-Harith ibn Harrath will come forth from Transoxiana. His army
will be led by a man called Mansur, who will establish or consolidate
things for Muhammad’s family as Quraish consolidated them for
the Apostle of Allah. Every believer must help him, (or he said:
respond to his sermons).90

Transoxiana refers to an area that includes Uzbekistan, Tajikistan,
and parts of Kyrgyzstan and Kazakhstan and is roughly equivalent to
what is referred to as Khurasan, including Afghanistan and parts of

88Son of Majah, Al Busiri, Al Hakim, Ahmad Nuaym, Ad-Daylami, Hasan, son of
Sufyaan, and Abu Nuaym
89Tirmidhi

90Abu Dawud Book 36, Number 4277
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 79

Iran. The person referred to as al-Harith would be located in this area
and would be sermonizing to the Muslims, and they are asked to listen
and act on his advice.
The Tamimi Shuayb, son of Salih, the bearer of the Mahdi’s flag,
is variously referred to as coming from Khurasan or Ar-Ray. Because
Ar-Ray is Tehran in Iran, then Shuayb, son of Salih, could be described
as an Arab who travels from Afghanistan via Iran and Iraq to Mecca.
Or he could be an Iranian leader. Similarly, al-Harith will be part of
this group, along with Mansur leading the army.

91. Abu Abdullah Na’im, son of Hammad, on a chain of transmission
on the authority of Al Zuhari, who said: “The black flags will come
from the East, led by mighty men, with long hair and beards; their
surnames are taken from the names of their hometowns (i.e.,
Khosti or from Khost, etc.), and their first names are from a Kunya
(title or surname).
If the people of the black flag divide, then the people of the
yellow banner will attack; they will gather in the canal of Egypt,
and the people of the East and the West will fight for seven (days
or months or years)…91

92. Narrated Abdullah ibn Hawalah al-Azdi: The Apostle of Allah sent
us on foot to get spoil, but we returned without getting any. When
he saw the signs of distress on our faces, he stood and said: “O
Allah, do not put them under my care, for I would be too weak to
care for them; do not put them in care of themselves, for they
would be incapable of that; and do not put them in the care of
men, for they would choose the best things for themselves.” He
then placed his hand on my head and said: “Ibn Hawalah, when
you see the Caliphate has settled in the holy land (i.e., Palestine),
earthquakes, sorrows, and serious matters will have drawn near,

91 Asmal Masalik. See note 10.
80 The Future Is for Islam

and on that day, the Last Hour will be nearer to mankind than this
hand of mine is to your head.92

According to this saying of the Messenger of God, the caliphate
established by the Mahdi will be based in Jerusalem.

93. Muhammad, son of Al Hanaffia, said: “The Black Banners will
come out for the children of Al Abbas. The other black banners
will come from Khurasan. Their turbans will be black and their
clothes white. At their front will be a man named Shuayb, the
son of Salih, from Tamim. They will defeat the companions of the
Tyrant until he comes to the House of Jerusalem, where he will
establish his power for the Mahdi, and he will be supplied with
three hundred (men) from Syria after his arrival, and the matter
will be settled for the Mahdi in seventy-two months (six years).”93

94. Said son of Al Musayyab reported: “The Black Banners will come
from the East from the children of Al Abbas. Then there will remain
whatsoever Allah wishes. Then, small Black Banners will come
to fight a man from the children of Abu Sufyaan from the East.
They will give their allegiance to the Mahdi.”94

The “children of Al Abbas” are the Iraqis, descendants of Abbas
ibn Abd al-Muttalib, who was the uncle of the Messenger of God and
after whom the Abbasid dynasty of Baghdad was named. The group
with the large black banners will be Iraqis and the people with the
small black banners will be from Afghanistan. Both Iraq and Afghanistan
are currently under U.S. occupation. This occupation has created resist-
ance movements that will benefit the most from the appearance of
the Mahdi, hence these resistance movements are likely to be among the
first to support him.

92Sunan Abu-Dawud, Jihad (Kitab Al-Jihad), Book 14, Number 2529
93http://www.muhammadanreality.com/ImamMahdiSignsfortheSavoir.htm
94Reported by Said ibn Al Musayyab in the reference of Nuaym ibn Hammad
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 81

95. Al Hasan Al Basri said: “A man of medium stature will come from
Ar-Ray (Tehran, Iran). He will be dark and from the children of
Tamim — a Wasaj, named Shuayb, son of Salih, with four thou-
sand men. Their clothes will be white and their banners black, and
in front of Shuayb is the Mahdi. He meets no one that he does not
defeat and scatter.”95

As the hadith says, Ar-Ray refers to Tehran, Iran. Ray was an
ancient town that was located near present-day Tehran. It was a great
center of learning that produced many illustrious figures during the
golden age of Islam. The town was severely damaged during the Mongol
invasions and was subsequently supplanted by Tehran. The person
coming from Tehran is likely to be an Iranian leader who may be a
descendant of the Tamim tribe.
The “children of Tamim” refers to the Bani Tamim tribe who
are one of the famous Arab tribes. The Bani Tamim are located pri-
marily in Najd (central Saudi Arabia), central and southern Iraq (Basra
and Diyala), and the Iranian province of Khuzistan. A prominent
member of the Bani Tamim was Muhammad ibn Abd al-Wahhab al-
Tamimi, the founder of the Wahhabi school of thought that is followed
in Saudi Arabia.
“Wasaj” probably refers to a sub-tribe.

96. The Messenger of Allah was among a group of migrants and sup-
porters. Ali, son of Abu Talib, was on his left side and Abbas on
his right side, when Abbas and a man from the supporters started
to debate with one another. The supporter spoke harshly to Abbas,
then the Prophet took the hand of Abbas and the hand of Ali and
said: “From the loins of this (indicating Abbas) will come a youth
who will fill the earth with transgression and injustice and from
the loins of this (indicating Ali) a man who will fill the earth with
fairness and justice. If you see this, pay attention to the Tamimi

95 http://www.muhammadanreality.com/ImamMahdiSignsfortheSavoir.htm
82 The Future Is for Islam

youth who will come from the direction of the east — he is the
owner of the Banner of Al Mahdi.”96

97. Abdullah, the son of Shuraykh, said: “With the Mahdi is the marked
Banner of the Messenger of Allah.”97

98. Ammar, the son of Yasir, said: “The bearer of the Banner of the
Mahdi is Shuayb, the son of Salih.”98

99. “When the Ethiopians come after the Arabs, they will be defeated
and thrown into the lowest part of the earth. While these circum-
stances exist, the Tyrant will come with three hundred and sixty
riders until he reaches Damascus. After a month, he will be fol-
lowed by thirty thousand from Kalb, so he will send an army to
Iraq and kill a hundred thousand in Az-Zawra (Baghdad). Then
they will go to Kufa (Iraq) and pillage. When this occurs, a banner
will come from the east led by a man from Tamim called Shuayb,
the son of Salih, who will restore what is in their hands from the
captured people of Kufa, and he will kill them. Then, another army
from the Tyrant will go to Medina and pillage it for three days and
thereafter proceed towards Mecca until they find themselves in
a desert. Then, Allah will send Gabriel and say to him, ‘Chastise
them!’ So, he will beat them with his leg once and Allah will cause
them to be swallowed up. None will remain except two men who
will return to the Tyrant to inform him of the swallowing-up of his
army, but this will not scare him. Several men from the Quraish
will escape to Istanbul and the Tyrant will send to the leader of
the Romans who will return them to him and he will slit their
throats together with their followers. At that time, a voice will

96Reported by Abdullah, the son of Omar ibn Al Khattab and found in the references
of At-Tabarani, Abu Nuaym, Al Kidji and Al Khatib
97http://www.muhammadanreality.com/ImamMahdiSignsfortheSavoir.htm

98http://www.muhammadanreality.com/ImamMahdiSignsfortheSavoir.htm
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 83

come from Heaven saying: ‘O people, surely Allah prevents
dictatorship, tyrants, and their followers for you and gives lead-
ership to the best of the nation of Muhammad. So join him in
Mecca — he is the Mahdi!”
Then, Hudhaifa asked: “O Messenger of Allah, how shall we
know him?”
He replied: “He is a man from my children; he looks like the
men from the children of Israel, upon him are two white cloaks
with frayed edges. His face is like a colorful, glittering star; upon
his right cheek there is a black mole and he is forty years old. Al
Abdal and those looking like them will come to him from Syria.
An-Nujaba will come to him from the dwellers of Egypt and groups
of dwellers from the East, and those looking like them until they
all gather together in Mecca, and so they will pledge their alle-
giance to him between Al Rukn and Al Makam. Then, he will direct
himself towards Syria, with Gabriel at his front and Michael at
his middle, and the dwellers of Heaven and Earth will be joyful
because of him. Water will be plentiful in his country, and the river
will be spread and treasures found. When he reaches Syria, he will
slay the Tyrant under the tree, the branches of which grow in the
direction of Lake Tiberias, and he will kill Kalb. So, the loser of that
Day of Kalb is he who does not gain even a rein (strap fastened
to horse, here meaning war booty).”
Hudhaifa asked: “O Messenger of Allah, how is it that we are
permitted to kill them when they believe in the Oneness?”
The Messenger of Allah replied: “O Hudhaifa, they are at
that time apostates; they claim that wine is permitted and do
not pray.”99

The children of Kalb or Bani Kalb are a Syrian tribe. The Nahr al-
Kalb is a river located in Lebanon. The Tyrant and his followers, the

99 Found in the references of Abu Nuaym, At-Tabarani, and Abu Amru Ad Dani
84 The Future Is for Islam

Bani Kalb, are those local collaborators of outside powers who are
helping to crush the Iraqi resistance.
An army consisting of the same people who are killing and pillag-
ing in Iraq is expected to attack Medina and then proceed to Mecca
to try to catch the Mahdi, but will sink into the earth just like the
elephants of Abraha were annihilated by God before they could reach
Mecca during the year that the Messenger of God was born.
Az-Zawra is Baghdad. Kufa is a city in Iraq, about 170 km south
of Baghdad.
There is a war going on in Darfur, Sudan, and the West, along with
the Ethiopians, is supporting the rebels against the Muslim Arab North.

GREAT WAR (BATTLE OF KALB)

This war, also called the Battle of Kalb, is different from the final con-
flict (Armageddon), as this battle will be fought soon after the Mahdi
appears and will be meant to fend off an assault on the Muslims by
the Romans. The Muslims will win, and then the Mahdi will spend the
next few years consolidating the new caliphate. Armageddon will
occur near the end of the Mahdi’s term after the Antichrist has appeared
and God has sent Jesus to destroy the Antichrist.
According to a previously noted saying: “…Then a man from
Quraish, whose mother is from Kalb, will appear and send against
them an army, which will be overcome by them, and that is the Battle
of Kalb. Disappointed will be the one who does not receive the booty
of Kalb. He will divide the property, and will govern the people by the
Sunnah of the Prophet. He will remain seven years, then die, and the
Muslims will pray over him.” (Abu Dawud)

100. Reported by Abu Huraira: The Prophet said: “The Romans will
surround a leader from my pure-musked children (i.e., the Mahdi).
His name will be the same as mine. They will fight each other at
a place called Al-A’maq (near Aleppo in Syria) and one third, or
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 85

thereabouts, of the Muslims will be killed. They will fight again
on another day, and again one third or thereabouts of the Muslims
will be killed. On the third day, they will fight again, and the
Romans will be defeated. And they will remain there until they
open Constantinople. It is whilst they are distributing the spoils
of war that a messenger will come, informing them that the false
messiah is in their hometown with their children.”100

The above can be seen as evidence supporting the fact that during
the Mahdi’s reign, the Romans will be defeated and Istanbul will be
re-conquered, the Antichrist will appear, and Jesus will descend. This
further supports the fact that the Antichrist emerges after the Mahdi
and not before.

101. Narrated Abu Huraira: Allah’s Apostle said: The Last Hour will
not come until the Romans land at al-A’maq or in Dabiq (two
cities near Aleppo in Syria). An army consisting of the best
(soldiers) of the people on the earth at that time will come from
Medina (to oppose them). When they arrange themselves in
ranks, the Romans will say, “Do not stand between us and those
(Muslims) who took prisoners from among us. Let us fight them.”
The Muslims will say, “Nay, by Allah, we shall never turn aside
from you and from our brethren so that you may fight them.”
They will then fight and a third (part) of the army, whom
Allah will never forgive, will run away. A third (part of the army),
which will be constituted of excellent martyrs in Allah’s eyes,
will be killed. The third, who will never be put on trial, will win,
and they will be the conquerors of Constantinople.
As they are busy in distributing the spoils of war (amongst
themselves) after hanging their swords by the olive trees, Satan

Son of Hibban, At-Tirmizi, Abuya’li, At-Tabarani, Al Bazaar, Abu Nuaym and
100

Al Hakim
86 The Future Is for Islam

will cry: The Antichrist has taken your place among your fami-
lies. They will then come out, but it will be of no avail. When
they reach Syria, he will come out while they are still preparing
themselves for battle, drawing up the ranks.
Certainly, the time of prayer will come and then Jesus, son
of Maryam, descends and will lead them in prayer. When the
enemy of Allah sees Jesus, he will disappear, just as salt dis-
solves in water, and if he (Jesus) were not to confront them (the
Antichrist and his forces) at all, even then he would dissolve
completely. Allah would kill them by his hand, and he (Jesus)
would show them their blood on his lance.101

102. Yusair, son of Jabir, reported: Once there blew a red storm in
Kufa, and there came a person who had nothing to say but (these
words): “Abdullah, son of Mas’ud, the Last Hour has come.” He
(Abdullah, son of Mas’ud) was sitting reclining against some-
thing, and he said: “The Last Hour will not come until the people
no longer divide inheritance and rejoice over booty. Then He
said, pointing towards Syria, with a gesture of his hand: “The
enemy will muster strength against the Muslims, and the Muslims
will muster strength against them (Syrians).” I (Yusair) said: “You
mean Rome?” He said: “Yes, and there will be a terrible fight. The
Muslims will prepare a detachment (for fighting unto death),
which will not return unless victorious. They will fight until dark-
ness intervenes. Both sides will return without being victorious,
and both will be wiped out. The Muslims will again prepare a
detachment for fighting unto death, so that they may not return
unless victorious. When it is the fourth day, a new detachment
from the remnant of the Muslims will be prepared, and Allah
will decree that the enemy will be routed. They will fight such a
fight, the like of which has not been seen, so fierce that even if

101 Muslim Book 41, Number 6924
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 87

a bird were to pass their flanks, it would fall down dead before
reaching the other end. (There will be such a large scale mas-
sacre) that, when counting will be done, (only) one out of a
hundred men related to one another would be found alive. So
what can be the joy at the spoils of such war, and what inheri-
tance can be divided? They will be in this very state when they
will hear of a calamity more horrible than this. A cry will reach
them: The Antichrist has taken your place among your offspring.
They will therefore throw away what is in their hands and go
forward, sending ten horsemen as a scouting party.” Allah’s
Apostle said: “I know their names, the names of their forefathers
and the color of their horses. They will be the best horsemen on
the surface of the earth on that day, or among the best horsemen
on the surface of the earth on that day.”102

This narrative implies that the Antichrist will appear after the
Battle of Kalb; therefore this battle is not the final one during which
Jesus will appear. After this battle, there will be a gap of a few years
and then Turkey will be liberated from anti-Islamic forces, followed
soon after by the arrival of Antichrist and finally Jesus.

103. Narrated Mu’adh, son of Jabal: The Prophet said: “The Great
War, the conquest of Constantinople, and the coming forth of
the Antichrist (False Messiah) will take place within a period
of seven months.”103

The above hadith is considered fabricated due to the hadith that
appears below. This is because of the discrepancy between the length
of time being seven months or seven years.

102 Muslim Book 41, Number 6927
103 Sunan Abu Dawud: Book 37, Number 4282
88 The Future Is for Islam

104. Narrated Abdullah, son of Busr: The Prophet said: “The time
between the Great War and the conquest of the city will be six
years, and the Antichrist (False Messiah) will come forth in the
seventh.”104

The “city” mentioned in this hadith is not specifically identified
as referring to either Rome or Constantinople. If it is neither city, then
it is possible that both narrations above are compatible with each other.
It is possible that the city referred to in the above-mentioned hadith
may be Jerusalem. In that case, the “Great War” mentioned here could
be the “Day of Wrath” referred to in the prophecy of Daniel (biblical
source). It puts the time between Jerusalem’s “distress” and “relief”
as 45 years. Its distress would be its occupation in 1387/1967, and
its relief would therefore be in 1432/2011, according to this source.
Therefore, Jesus would descend in 1432/2011.

105. Narrated son of Hawalah: The Prophet said: “It will turn out that
you will consist of armed troops; one in Syria, one in the Yemen,
and one in Iraq. Son of Hawalah said: “Choose for me, Messenger
of Allah, if I reach that time.” He replied: “Go to Syria, for it is
Allah’s chosen land, to which his best servants will be gathered,
but if you are unwilling, go to your Yemen, and draw water from
your tanks, for Allah has on my account taken special charge of
Syria and its people.”105

106. A section of my community will continue to fight at the gates of
Damascus and around it and at the gates of Jerusalem and around
it. The desertion of people who abandon them does not affect
them. They (will continue to) hold the truth till the Judgment
Day occurs.106

104Sunan Abu Dawud: Book 37, Number 4283
105Sunan Abu-Dawud, Book 14, Number 2477
106al-Hafiz al-Haithami
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 89

107. Narrated Imran, son of Husain: The Prophet said: “A section of
my community will continue to fight for the right and overcome
their opponents till the last of them fights with the Antichrist.”107

The Palestinians are fulfilling this prophecy by continuing their
resistance despite heavy odds.

SEVEN-YEAR PEACE AGREEMENT

108. Hadhrat Abu Umamah says that the Messenger of Allah said:
“There will be four peace agreements between you and the
Romans. The fourth agreement will be mediated through a person
who will be from the progeny of Hadhrat Haroon (Aaron) and will
be upheld for seven years.” The people asked: “O Messenger of
Allah, who will be the Imam (leader) of the people at the time?” The
Messenger of Allah said: “He will be from my progeny and will be
forty years of age. His face will shine like a star, and he will have
a black spot on his left cheek. He will don two “Qutwaani” cloaks
and will appear exactly as a person from the Children of Israel. He
will rule for 20 years and will conquer the cities of the Idolaters.”108

In the above hadith, it says that the Mahdi will rule for 20 years,
instead of the traditional seven years. The hadith mentioning the
seven-year rule are far more numerous and more authentic than this
one, so, if the 20-year rule cannot be reconciled with the seven-year
rule, then the seven-year rule should be the accepted term.
It is interesting to note that the Mahdi is predicted to resemble
the “children of Israel,” that is, he will look Jewish. In addition, he will
be wearing a ‘Qutwaani” cloak that is supposed to look like the Jewish
Tallit prayer shawl.

107 Sunan Abu-Dawud, Book 14, Number 2478
108 Tabrani, Ref: Kanz-ul-Aamal, p. 268, Hadith Number 3868
90 The Future Is for Islam

109. There will be a peace agreement in Bayt al-Maqdis (Jerusalem).109

THE HIDDEN TREASURES OF ANTIOCH

110. Ka’b al-Ahbar says: “He will be called ‘Mahdi’ because he will
guide to something hidden and will bring out the Torah and
Gospel from a town called Antioch.”110

“Mahdi” means “the guided one.”

111. I said, “O Messenger of Allah, I have never seen a Roman city
like the city of Antioch, and I have never seen more rain than
it has.” Whereupon the Messenger of Allah said: “Yes, that is
because the Torah, Staff of Moses, Tablets, and the Table of
Solomon, the son of David, are in its caves. There is not a single
cloud that comes from any direction to it that does not pour its
blessing in that valley. And the days and night will not pass until
a man from my musked children lives in it. His name is like my
name and his father’s name is like my father’s name; his manners
are like my manners. He will fill the world with fairness and
justice, just as it had been filled by harm and transgressions.”111

Antioch’s ruins are located in present-day Antakya, Turkey, near
the Syrian border. It was the original cradle of gentile (non-Jewish)
Christianity, the location where Christianity parted ways from Judaism
and where Romans started to convert to Jesus’ message. The word
“Christian” was first used there.

112. The Messenger of Allah said: “He is called the Mahdi because he
will guide people to a mountain in Syria, from which he will bring

109Risalat al-Khuruj al-Mahdi, vol. 3, p. 184
110Abu Nu’aym
111Reported by Tamin Ad-Dari, in the reference of Ibn Hibban Ad-Du’fa
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 91

out the volumes of the Torah to refute the Jews. At the hands of
the Mahdi, the Ark of the Covenant will be brought forth at Lake
Tiberias and taken and placed in Jerusalem.”112

Lake Tiberias is located on the Syrian-Israeli border.

113. Ad-Dani said: “He is called the Mahdi because he will be guided
to a mountain in Syria, from which he will bring forth the volumes
of the Torah with which to argue against the Jews, and at his
hand, a group of them will become Muslim.113

114. The reason he will be known as the Mahdi is that he will go to one
of the mountains in Sham. From there, he will unearth the (true)
books of the Torah and bring forth evidence against the Jews.114

According to commentaries on these hadith, the fire of Zionism
spurred on by some Jews will come to an end at the time of the Mahdi,
and Islamic tolerance and Qur’anic moral values will spread among
them. Islamic scholars regard the place described as “near Lake
Tiberias” in the hadith as a figure of speech. Tiberias is near Syria, and
Syria, in accounts of the End Times in the hadith, means somewhere
far distant, far from Mecca and Medina. This figure of speech applies
to Tiberias. Indeed, some commentators and researchers have taken
this to indicate that the Ark may be in Jerusalem, Mecca, Tiberias,
Antioch, or even in Istanbul.

CONQUEST OF CONSTANTINOPLE (ISTANBUL)

115. Reported by Abu Huraira: The Prophet said: “If there only remains
but one day left in the world, Allah will prolong it until a man

112Al-Suyuti, al-Hawi li’l Fatawa
113Abu Amru Ad Dani
114Al-Suyuti, al-Hawi li’l Fatawa, II, 81
92 The Future Is for Islam

from my house governs. He will open Constantinople (Istanbul)
and the Mountain of Al-Daylam (Northern Iran).”115

116. Nafi’, the son of ‘Utbah, said, “You will attack Arabia and Allah
will enable you to conquer it; then you will attack Persia and
He will make you to conquer it. Then you will attack Rome
and Allah will enable you to conquer it; then you will attack the
Antichrist and Allah will enable you to conquer him.”116

Rome means Byzantine territories, which included the greater
Syrian area and all the way up to Istanbul and beyond; territories that
Muslims, in fact, did go on to occupy.

117. Narrated Mu’adh son of Jabal: “The Prophet said: The flourishing
state of Jerusalem will be when Yathrib is in ruins, the ruined
state of Yathrib will be when the Great War comes, the outbreak
of the Great War will be at the conquest of Constantinople, and
the conquest of Constantinople when the Antichrist comes
forth.” He (the Prophet) struck his thigh or his shoulder (a
gesture of exclamation) with his hand and said: “This is as true
as you are here or as you are sitting (meaning Mu’adh son
of Jabal).”117

The above hadith suggests the following sequence of events:

1) The appearance of the Antichrist
2) The reconquest of Constantinople
3) The Great War
4) The destruction of Medina
5) The flourishing of the state of Jerusalem

115Ibn Hibban, At-Tirmizi, Abuya’li, At-Tabarani, Al Bazaar, Abu Nuaym and Al Hakim
116Muslim Book 41, Number 6930
117Sunan Abu-Dawud, Battles (Kitab Al-Malahim), Book 37, Number 4281
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 93

118. “The flourishing of Jerusalem will mark the desertion of Yathrib
(Medina). The desertion of Yathrib will mark the start of Al-
Malhamah (the Great War that will start between the Romans and
the Muslim forces before Muslims conquer Constantinople for
the second time). The start of Al-Malhamah will mark the con-
quering of Constantinople. The conquering of Constantinople will
mark the appearance of Dajjal.”118

Here, the sequence of events is:

1) The flourishing of the state of Jerusalem
2) The destruction of Medina
3) The Great War
4) The reconquest of Constantinople
5) The appearance of the Antichrist

This sequence is the exact opposite of the last one and fits better
with other hadith. Again, we see here that in the sequence of events,
the Great War is not the one in which Jesus kills the Antichrist and
his supporters, but takes place before the liberation of Turkey and the
appearance of the Antichrist. The Great War referred to here is
the Battle of Kalb that occurs soon after the appearance of the Mahdi,
when the Romans attack him.

119. When the Great War occurs, a group from the masters will come
from Damascus. They are the most honorable horses (horse is the
symbol of honor) among Arabs, and they have the best weapons
among them (Arabs). Allah will support The Religion (Islam)
with them.119

118 Sahih Al-Jami’ as-Saghir, Number 4096
119 Son of Majah, Hakem, Ibn-asaker
94 The Future Is for Islam

120. Abu Huraira reported Allah’s Apostle saying: “You have heard
about a city, the one side of which is in the land and the other
is in the sea (Istanbul).” They said: “Allah’s Messenger, yes.”
Thereupon he said: “The Last Hour will not come unless seventy
thousand persons from Bani, Israel, will attack it. When they
will land there, they will neither fight with weapons nor shower
arrows, but will only say: ‘There is no god but Allah and Allah is
the Greatest’ then one side of it will fall.” Thaur (one of the nar-
rators) said: I think that he (the Prophet) said: “The part by the
side of the ocean. Then they would say for the second time: ‘There
is no god but Allah and Allah is the Greatest’ that the second
side would also fall, and they would say: ‘There is no god but
Allah and Allah is the Greatest’ that the gates would be opened
for them and they would enter therein and they would be collect-
ing spoils of war and distributing them amongst themselves that
a noise would be heard and it would be said: ‘Verily, Antichrist
has come.’ And thus they would leave everything there and would
turn to him.”120

Some believe that these narrations actually refer to the city of
Rome and that before the Antichrist’s appearance, the city of Rome in
Italy would be conquered. However, it can also be said (and this is
probably more correct) that Istanbul would be conquered for a second
time because the Romans would have gained control of it from the
Muslims. So, in fact, there would be a second conquest of Istanbul and
the liberation of Turkey from anti-Muslim forces.
The “Bani Israel” — children of Israel — are descendants of the
original Jewish tribes who were exiled to Khurasan after the destruc-
tion of the Kingdom of Israel in 722 BC. The Pathans of Afghanistan
claim to be “Bani Israel,” though not Jewish.

120 Muslim Book 41, Number 6979
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 95

CONQUEST OF INDIA

121. Thawban narrated that the Messenger of Allah said: “Two groups
of my Ummah (community) Allah has protected from the hell-
fire — a group that will conquer India and a group that will be
with Jesus, son of Mary.”121

122. Na’im, son of Hammad in al-Fitan, reports that Abu Huraira said
that the Messenger of Allah mentioned India and said: “A group
of you will conquer India. Allah will open (India) for them until
they come with its kings chained — Allah having forgiven their
sins — when they return (from India), they will find the son of
Mary in Syria.”122

123. While Abu Huraira said: “The Messenger of Allah promised us
the conquest of India. If I was to come across that event I will
spend my soul and wealth. If I am killed, then I am among the best
of martyrs. And if I return, then I am Abu Huraira, the freed.”123

It may be argued by some that the Muslims already conquered
India over a thousand years ago, so this prophecy has already been
fulfilled, but in these sayings of the Messenger of God, there is a clear
link between the conquest of India and the arrival of Jesus.
Today, the problems between India and Pakistan have not been
resolved, and India continues to occupy Muslim territory in Kashmir,
treats its Muslims citizens unfairly, and is also increasing its relations
with those countries who are extremely hostile to Islam, including Israel.
So, it would not be beyond the realm of possibility that after the Mahdi
appears, India will be part of the coalition lined up against Islam, with
the result that there will be a war between India and Pakistan.

121Ahmad, Nisa’i, Kitab ul-jihad; at-Tabarani
122Kitab Al Fitan
123Ahmad, an-Nisa’i, and al-Hakim
96 The Future Is for Islam

Another interpretation of this hadith is that instead of India being
reconquered, it is actually Pakistan that is liberated from an anti-
Islamic ruling class. The reason for this theorey is that present-day
Pakistan, east of the Indus river, is made up of territory that was con-
sidered part of India since ancient times. The name India is derived
from the river Indus that is as much an integral part of Pakistan as the
river Nile is an integral part of Egypt. Pakistan has a ruling class,
especially the military, which is as anti-Islamic as the Turkish military.
The Pakistan army has the dubious record of killing far more Muslims
than the Indian army. Therefore, just as the conquest of Rome really
means the liberation of Turkey from inimical forces, the conquest of
India may mean the liberation of Pakistan.

THE DAJJAL (FALSE MESSIAH/”ANTICHRIST”)

The Masih Ad-Dajjal (Deceiver, False Messiah) that is referred to by the
Messenger of God is most certainly the same person as the Antichrist;
therefore we will use the word Antichrist interchangeably with Dajjal.

Are they waiting to see if the Angels come to them,
or thy Lord (Himself), or certain of the Signs of thy
Lord! The day that certain of the Signs of the Lord
come, no good will it do to a soul to believe then,
if it believed not before nor earned righteousness
through its Faith. Say: “Wait ye: we too are waiting.”
Qur’an 6:158

124. Narrated Ibn Umar: Once Allah’s Apostle stood amongst the
people, glorified and praised Allah as He deserved, and then
mentioned the Antichrist saying: “l warn you against him (the
Antichrist), and there was no prophet but warned his nation
against him. No doubt, Noah warned his nation against him, but
I tell you about him something of which no prophet told his
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 97

nation before me. You should know that he is one-eyed, and Allah
is not one-eyed.”124

125. Narrated Abdullah: The Prophet mentioned the Antichrist in front
of the people saying: “Allah is not one-eyed, while the Antichrist
is blind in the right eye and that eye looks like a bulging-out
grape. While sleeping near the Ka’ba last night, I saw in my dream
a man of brown color, the best one can see amongst brown color,
and his hair was long that it fell between his shoulders. His hair
was lank and water was dribbling from his head and he was
placing his hands on the shoulders of two men while circumam-
bulating the Ka’ba. I asked, ‘Who is this?’ They replied, ‘This is
Jesus, son of Mary.’ Behind him, I saw a man who had very curly
hair and was blind in the right eye, resembling Ibn Qatan (an
infidel) in appearance. He was placing his hands on the shoul-
ders of a person while performing tawaf around the Ka’ba. I
asked, ‘Who is this?’ They replied, ‘The Masih, Ad-Dajjal (False
Messiah, Antichrist).’”125

126. It was reported from Abu Huraira that the Prophet said: “There
are three things, which, if they appear, ‘No good will it do to a
soul to believe them then, if it believed not before nor earned
righteousness through its faith.’ They are: the rising of the sun
from the west, the Antichrist, and the Beast from the Earth.”126

Although the Antichrist is not mentioned specifically in the
Qur’an, the above hadith clearly interprets verse 6:158 as a reference
to the Antichrist’s appearance as one of the signs that will appear
when faith will not be accepted of anyone who did not have it before.

124Bukhari Book 55, Number 553
125Bukhari Book 55, Number 649
126Ahmad, Musnad, 2/455 — Muslim, Kitab al-Iman 1/96 — Tirmidhi, Abwab al-Tafsir

(Hadeeth 5097), 8/449,450
98 The Future Is for Islam

For that reason, I have decided to add that verse from the Qur’an in
reference to the Antichrist, as well as in reference to the sun’s rise from
the west.

127. Narrated Umm Sharik: I heard Allah’s Apostle say that the Anti-
christ would be followed by seventy thousand Jews of Isfahan
(Iranian Jews) wearing Persian shawls.127

DETAILS REGARDING THE ANTICHRIST

128. Abu Qatada reported: We used to go to Imran, son of Husain,
passing in front of Hisham bin Amir. He, one day, said: “You pass
by me (in order) to go to some persons, but (amongst the living
persons) none remained in the company of Allah’s Messenger
more than I, and none knows more hadith than I. I heard Allah’s
Messenger as saying that there would be no creation (creating
more trouble) than the Dajjal, right from the creation of Adam
to the Last Hour.128

129. The wife of the Messenger of Allah, Hafsah, daughter of Umar,
said that the Messenger of Allah said: “He (the Antichrist) will
appear driven by a fit of rage.” He also said, “He (the Antichrist)
will first appear to people, driven in a fit of rage.”129

130. Jabir, son of Abdullah, said: The Prophet said: “The Antichrist
will appear at the end of time, when religion is taken lightly.
He will have 40 days in which to travel throughout the earth. One
of these days will be like a year, another will be like a month,
and another will be like a week, and the rest will be like normal
days. He will be riding a (white) donkey (an airplane); the width

127Muslim Book 41, Number 7034
128Muslim Book 41, Number 7037
129Muslim
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 99

between its ears (possibly wings) will be 40 cubits (60 feet). He
will say to the people, ‘I am your lord.’ He is one-eyed, but your
Lord is not one-eyed. On his forehead will be written the word
Kafir (unbeliever), and every believer, literate or illiterate, will
be able to read it. He will go everywhere, except Mecca and
Medina, which Allah has forbidden to him; angels stand at their
gates. He will have a mountain of bread, and the people will face
hardship, except for those who follow him. He will have two
rivers, and I know what is in them. He will call one Paradise and
one Hell. Whoever enters the one he calls Paradise will find
that it is Hell, and whoever enters the one he calls Hell will find that
it is Paradise. Allah will send with him devils that will speak to
the people. He will bring a great tribulation; he will issue a com-
mand to the sky, and it will seem to the people as if it is raining.
Then he will appear to kill someone and bring him back to life.
After that, he will no longer have this power. The people will
say, ‘Can anybody do something like this, except the Lord?’ The
Muslims will flee to Jabal al-Dukhan (mount of smoke) in Syria,
and the Antichrist will come and besiege them. The siege will
intensify, and they will suffer great hardship. Then Jesus, son of
Mary, will descend, and will call out to the people at dawn: ‘O
people, what prevented you from coming out to fight this evil
liar?’ They will say, ‘He is a jinn.’ (They will mistake Jesus for a
jinn.) Then they will go out and find Jesus, son of Mary. The time
for prayer will come, and the Muslims will call on Jesus to lead
the prayer, but he will say, ‘Let your Imam lead the prayer.’ Their
Imam (the Mahdi) will lead them in praying (the morning
prayer), and then they will go out to fight the Antichrist. When
the liar sees Jesus, he will dissolve like salt in water. Jesus will
go to him and kill him, and he will not let anyone who followed
him live.”130

130 Ahmad
100 The Future Is for Islam

In the above narration, we are informed of a “white donkey”
that’s made of iron, and where the width between its ears is 40 cubits.
Undoubtedly, one can say this is a white airplane made of iron and
which has a wingspan of 60 feet.

131. Abu Huraira narrated that the Messenger of Allah said: “The False
Messiah will appear from the east heading towards Medina until
he reaches (the area) behind (the mount of) ‘Uhud. Afterwards,
the Angels will (force him to) turn his face towards al-Sham
(Syria, Israel), and there he will perish.”131

132. Abu Huraira narrated that the Messenger of Allah said: “On every
pass near Medina, there are Angels (guarding it). Plagues and
the Antichrist will not enter Medina.”132

133. Anas, son of Malik, said that the Messenger of Allah said: “There
is not a city but will be overwhelmed by the Antichrist, except
Mecca and Medina. Every pass that leads to them will be sur-
rounded and guarded by Angels. He (Antichrist) will make camp
close to the Sabkhah (salty marsh). Then, Medina will experience
three earth tremors, after which every disbeliever and hypocrite
will leave Medina to join the Antichrist.”133

Many so-called Muslims, who are in reality hypocrites, will join
the Antichrist.

134. Abu Sa’id al-Khudri reported Allah’s Messenger as saying: The
Dajjal will come forth, and a person from amongst the believers
will go towards him, and the armed men of the Dajjal will meet

131Ahmad and Sahih Muslim, Book 7, Number 3187
132Malik, Ahmad, Bukhari, Muslim; see Mukhtasar Sahih Muslim, Number 781
133Bukhari and al-Nasa, Ibid. Number 2055
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 101

him and they will say to him, “Where do you intend to go? “ He
will say, “I intend to go to this one who is coming forth.” They will
say to him, “Don’t you believe in our Lord?” He will say, “There
is nothing hidden about our Lord.” They will say, “Kill him.” Then
some amongst them will say, “Has your master (Dajjal) not for-
bidden you to kill anyone without (his consent)?” And so they
will take him to the Dajjal, and when the believer will see him, he
will say, “O people, he is the Dajjal about whom Allah’s Messenger
has informed (us).” The Dajjal will then order to have his head
broken and utter (these words), “Catch hold of him and break
his head.” He would be struck even on his back and on his stom-
ach. Then the Dajjal would ask him, “Don’t you believe in me?”
He will say, “You are a false messiah.” He will then order him to
be torn (into pieces) with a saw from the parting of his hair up
to his legs. After that, the Dajjal will walk between the two pieces.
He will then say to him, “Stand!” and he will stand erect. He will
then say to him, “Don’t you believe in me?” And the person
will say, “It has only added to my insight concerning you (that
you are really the Dajjal).” He will then say, “O people, he would
not behave with anyone amongst people (in such a manner)
after me” (the Antichrist will not be able to perform this trick
anymore). The Dajjal would try to catch hold of him so that he
should kill him (again). The space between his neck and collar
bone would be turned into copper and he would find no means
to kill him. So he would catch hold of him by his hand and feet
and throw him (into the air) and the people would think as if he
had been thrown in the Hell-Fire whereas he would be thrown
in Paradise. Thereupon Allah’s Messenger said: “He will be the
most eminent amongst persons in regard to martyrdom in the
eye of the Lord of the world.”134

134 Muslim Book 41, Number 7019
102 The Future Is for Islam

The Antichrist’s cutting a person in half and then bringing him
back to life sounds like an impossible thing — until you realize that
there’s a magician in America with his own TV series who does exactly
that. His name is Criss Angel, and he cuts a person (usually himself)
into two with an electric saw in front of everyone and then makes
members of the audience walk in between the two pieces. Then he
restores the person back to one piece. The spectacle is so convincing
that no one can figure out how he does it. If you read this prophecy
and then watch this trick being performed, you can’t help but wonder.

135. Narrated Umm Sharik: I heard Allah’s Apostle say: “The peo-
ple will run away from the Antichrist, seeking shelter in the
mountains.” She (Umm Sharik) said, “Where would the Arabs
then be on the day?” He said, “They would be small in number.”135

136. It was reported that Ibn Umar said: The Prophet said: “The
Antichrist will come to this pond in Marriqanaat — a valley in
Medina — and most of those who go out to him will be women,
until a man will come to his mother-in-law, his mother, his
daughter, his sister, and his aunt, and will tie them up strongly
for fear that they will go out to him.”136

137. Abu Umamah al-Bahili said: The Prophet delivered a speech to
us, most of which dealt with the Antichrist and warned us against
him. He said, “No tribulation on earth since the creation of Adam
will be worse than the tribulation of the Antichrist. Allah has never
sent a Prophet who did not warn his Ummah against the Antichrist.
I am the last of the Prophets, and you are the last Ummah.
The Antichrist is emerging among you, and it is inevitable. If he
appears while I am still among you, I will contend with him on

135 Muslim Book 41, Number 7035
136 Narrated by Ahmad, Number 5099
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 103

behalf of every Muslim. But if he appears after I am gone, then
every person must contend with him on his own behalf, and Allah
will take care of every Muslim on my behalf. He will appear on the
way between Syria and Iraq, and will spread disaster right and left.
O servants of Allah, adhere to the path of Truth. I shall describe
him for you in a way that no Prophet has ever done before.
“He will start by saying that he is a Prophet, but there will
be no Prophet after me. Then he will say, ‘I am your Lord,’ but
you will never see your Lord until you die. The Antichrist is
one-eyed, but your Lord, glorified be He, is not one-eyed. On
his forehead will be written the word Kafir (unbeliever), which
every Muslim, literate or illiterate, will be able to read. Among
the tribulations he will bring will be the Paradise and Hell he will
offer; but that which he calls Hell will be Paradise, and that which
he calls Paradise will be Hell. Whoever enters his Hell, let him
seek refuge with Allah and recite the opening verses of Surah al-
Kahf (Qur’an, chapter 18), and it will become cool and peaceful
for him, as the fire became cool and peaceful for Abraham.
“He will say to a Bedouin, ‘What do you think if I bring your
father and mother back to life for you? Will you bear witness
that I am your lord?’ The Bedouin will say yes, so two devils will
assume the appearance of his father and mother, and will say, ‘O
my son, follow him, for he is your lord.’
“He will be given power over one person, whom he will kill
and cut in two with a saw. Then he will say, ‘Look at this slave of
mine, now I will resurrect him, but he will still claim that he has
a Lord other than me.’ Allah will resurrect him, and this evil man
(the Antichrist) will say to him, ‘Who is your Lord?’ The man will
answer, ‘My Lord is Allah, and you are the enemy of Allah. You
are the Antichrist. By Allah, I have never been surer of this than
I am today.’”
Abu Sa’id said: The Prophet said: “That man will have the
highest status among my Ummah in Paradise.” Abu Sa’id said:
104 The Future Is for Islam

“By Allah, we never thought that that man would be any other
than Umar ibn al-Khattab, until he passed away.”
Al-Muhdribi said: Then we referred to the Hadith of Abu
Rafi’i, which said, “Part of his tribulation will be the fact that he
will pass through an area whose people will deny him, and none
of their livestock will remain alive. Then he will pass through a
second area whose people will believe in him; he will order the
sky to rain and the earth to bring forth crops, and their flocks
will return from grazing fatter than they have ever been, with
their flanks stretched, their udders full. He will pass through
every place on earth, except Mecca and Medina, which he will
never enter, for there are angels guarding every gate of them with
unsheathed swords, until he reaches al-Zarib al-Ahmar and camps
at the edge of the salt-marsh. Medina will be shaken by three
tremors, after which every hypocrite will leave it, and it will
be cleansed of evil, as iron is cleansed of dross. That day will be
called Yawm al-Khalas (The Day of Purification).”
Umm Sharik bint Abi’l-’Akr said: “O Messenger of Allah,
where will the Arabs be at that time?” He said: “At that time they
will be few; most of them will be in Bayt al-Maqdis (Jerusalem),
and their Imam will be a righteous man. Whilst their Imam is
going forward to lead the people in praying Salat al-Subh (the
morning prayer), Jesus, son of Mary, will descend. The Imam will
step back, to let Jesus lead the people in prayer, but Jesus will
place his hand between the man’s shoulders and say, ‘Go forward
and lead the prayer, for the call for prayer was made for you.’ So
the Imam will lead the people in prayer, and afterwards Jesus
will say, ‘Open the gate.’ The gate will be opened, and behind it
will be the Antichrist and a thousand Jews, each of them bearing
a sword and shield. When the Antichrist sees Jesus, he will begin
to dissolve like salt in water, and will run away. Jesus will say,
‘You will remain alive until I strike you with my sword.’ He will
catch up with him at the eastern gate of Ludd (near Tel Aviv,
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 105

Israel) and will kill him. The army of the Antichrist will be defeated
with the help of Allah. There will be no place for them to hide; they
will not be able to hide behind any stone, wall, animal or tree —
except the boxthorn — without it saying, ‘O Muslim servant of
Allah! Here is a Jew, come and kill him!’” The Prophet said: “The
time of the Antichrist will be forty years; one year like half a year,
one year like a month, and one month like a week. The rest of his
days will pass so quickly that if one of you were at one of the gates
of Medina, he would not reach the other gate before evening fell.”
Someone asked, “O Messenger of Allah, how will we pray
in those shorter days?” He said, “Work out the times of prayer in
the same way that you do in these longer days, and then pray.”
The Prophet said: “Jesus, son of Mary, will be a just administrator
and leader of my Ummah. He will break the cross, kill the pigs,
and abolish the Jizyah (tax on non-Muslims). He will not collect
charity, so he will not collect sheep and camels. Mutual enmity
and hatred will disappear.
“Every harmful animal will be made harmless, so that a small
boy will be able to put his hand into a snake’s mouth without being
harmed, a small girl will be able to make a lion run away from her,
and a wolf will go among sheep as if he were a sheepdog. The earth
will be filled with peace as a container is filled with water. People
will be in complete agreement, and only Allah will be worshipped.
Wars will cease, and the authority of Quraish will be taken away.
The earth will be like a silver basin, and will produce fruit so abun-
dantly that a group of people will gather to eat a bunch of grapes
or one pomegranate and will be satisfied. A bull will be worth so
much money, but a horse will be worth only a few dirhams.”
Someone asked, “O Messenger of Allah, why will a horse
be so cheap?” He said, “Because it will never be ridden in war.”
He was asked, “Why will the bull be so expensive?” He said,
“Because it will plough the earth. For three years before the Anti-
christ emerges, the people will suffer severe hunger. In the first
106 The Future Is for Islam

year, Allah will order the sky to withhold a third of its rain, and
the earth to withhold two-thirds of its fruits. In the third year, He
will order the sky to withhold all of its rain, and the earth to
withhold all of its fruits, so that nothing green will grow. Every
cloven-hoofed creature will die, except for whatever Allah wills.”
Someone asked, “How will the people live at that time?” He said,
“By saying La ilaha illa Allah, Allahu Akbar, Subhan Allah, and
Al-Hamdu-li’llah (praising God). This will be like food for them.”137

The implication of “breaking the Cross” and “killing of the swine”
is that Christianity will become defunct as a religion. The whole edi-
fice of the Christian religion is based on the belief that God crucified
His only son on the Cross and caused him to suffer this “accursed”
death so that he might thus expiate for the sins of man.
However, when Jesus proclaims on his appearance, “I am not the
Son of God; I did not die on the Cross, nor did I expiate for the sins
of anyone,” the whole basis of Christian belief will be demolished.
All the Prophets have declared the swine unlawful, but the
Christians have made them lawful. This distinctive characteristic of
Christianity will vanish when Jesus will say: “I never declared the swine
lawful for my followers, nor did I proclaim them free from the restraints
of Divine Law.” Eating pork was allowed many years after the time
of Jesus in order to make Christianity more appealing to the pagan
Romans, and no one can claim that Jesus permitted it.
The reason for Jesus’ destroying the cross will be that he never
died on it, so it is an invalid symbol for the religion of Jesus. The
Qur’an states that Jesus did not die on the cross, although it appeared
so to the people. The Gospel of Barnabas says that it was really Judah
who died on the cross, as he was made to appear like Jesus, and it was
he who suffered the torture and crucifixion that Jesus is supposed to
have suffered.

137 Ibn Majah, Kitib al-Fitan, (Hadith 4077), 2: 1363
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 107

Lod (Arabic al-Ludd, Greco-Latin Lydda) is a city in the Center
District of Israel with a population of 66,000. Nearby Lod is Ben
Gurion International Airport, which serves Tel Aviv. So, the Antichrist
will be trying to escape on an airplane when Jesus will catch up with
him and kill him.

138. Narrated Al-Mughira bin Shu’ba: Nobody asked the Prophet as
many questions as I asked regarding the Antichrist. The Prophet
said to me, “What worries you about him?” I said, “Because the
people say that he will have a mountain of bread and a river of
water with him (i.e., he will have abundance of food and water).”
The Prophet said, “No, he is too mean to be allowed such a thing
by Allah” (but it is only to test mankind whether they believe in
Allah or in the Antichrist).138

JESUS, SON OF MARY

And there is none of the People of the Book but must
believe in him before his death; And on the Day of
Judgment he will be a witness against them;
Qur’an 4: 159

61. And (Jesus) shall be a Sign (for the coming of) the
Hour (of Judgment): therefore have no doubt about
the (Hour), but follow ye Me: this is a Straight Way.
Qur’an 43: 61

139. Some members of my community will be reunited with Jesus, son
of Mary, and will witness his war against the Antichrist.139

138 Bukhari Book 88, Number 238
139 Al-Hakim, Al-Mustadrak, hadith number 8634, 4:587
108 The Future Is for Islam

The white minaret of the Umayyad Mosque in Damascus, where Jesus will
descend. It is called the “Minaret of Jesus.”

140. Jesus, son of Maryam, will descend, rule for 40 years with the
book of Allah and my Sunnah, and die.140

141. “In the meantime, when the Antichrist will be busy doing this
and this, Allah will send down the Messiah, son of Maryam, and
he will descend in the eastern part of Damascus, near the white
minaret (tower), dressed in the two yellow garments, with his
hands resting on the arms of two angels. When he will bend down
his head, water drops will appear trickling down; and when he
will raise it, it will appear as though pearl-like drops are rolling
down. Any disbeliever whom the air of his breath reaches — and
it will reach up to the last limit of his sight — will fall dead. Then
the son of Maryam will go in pursuit of the Antichrist, and will
overtake him at the gate of Lod, and will kill him.”141

Al-Muttaqi al-Hindi, Al-Burhan fi Alamat al-Mahdi Akhir al-Zaman
140

Muslim, Dhikr Dajjal; Abu Dawud, Kitab ul-Malahim, Bab Khuruj Dajjal; Tirmidhi,
141

Abwab-ul-Fitan, Bab Fi Fitna al-Dajjal; Ibn Majah, Kitab ul-Fitna, Bab Fitna al-Dajjal
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 109

142. “The Antichrist will appear in my community, and will live for
forty (I do not know whether he said 40 days, or 40 months, or
40 years). Then Allah will send Jesus, son of Mary. He will closely
resemble Urwah, son of Masud (a companion). He will pursue
the Antichrist and kill him. Then, for seven years, the people will
live in such a state that no ill-will and enmity will exist between
any two of them.”142

143. “How will you be when the son of Mary (Jesus) descends amongst
you, and he will judge people by the law of the Qur’an and not
by the law of Gospel?”143

144. It is narrated on the authority of Abu Huraira that he heard the
Messenger of Allah as saying: “What would you do when the son
of Mary would descend and lead you?”144

145. “Since the world came into existence, at the beginning of every
century, an important event occurred. At the beginning of one
century, the Antichrist will emerge and Jesus, the son of Mary,
will descend and kill him.”145

146. “Jesus, son of Mary, shall descend; then he will kill the swine
and destroy the Cross; and a congregation will be held for him
for the Prayer; and he will distribute so much wealth that people
will be satiated with it; and he will abolish the tribute; and he will
encamp at Rauha, and from there will go to perform Haj or
Umrah, or both.”146

Rauha is located 36 miles from Medina on the road to Mecca.

142Muslim Book 41, Number 7023
143Bukhari Book 55, Number 658
144Muslim Book 1, Number 291

145Ibn Abi Hatem

146Ahmad, Silsila Marwiyat Abi Huraira; Muslim, Kitab-ul-Haj
110 The Future Is for Islam

147. By Him in Whose Hand is my life; son of Mary (Jesus) would
certainly pronounce Talbiyah (intention) for Haj or for Umrah
(minor Haj), or for both in the valley of Rauha.147

148. Allah’s Apostle said, “By Him in Whose Hands my soul is, son of
Mary will shortly descend amongst you people (Muslims) as a
just ruler and will break the Cross and kill the pigs and abolish
the Jizya (a tax taken from the non-Muslims who are in the pro-
tection of the Muslim government). Then there will be abundance
of money and nobody will accept charitable gifts.”148

In all the sayings of the Messenger of God confirming the coming
of Jesus, this one must be the most powerful. Here, the Messenger of
God swears in the name of God, the most powerful oath that a Muslim
can utter, that Jesus will come as the ruler of the Muslims.
The two most respected hadith scholars, Bukhari and Muslim,
confirm the authenticity of this hadith. For any believing Muslim, this
should be proof enough and cause for the removal of any lingering
doubt about the second coming of Jesus. This hadith and the statement
in the Qur’an that “Jesus will be a sign for the coming of the last hour”
leave no room for any skepticism.

149. “There is no prophet between me and him (i.e., the Messiah, Jesus,
son of Mary), and he shall descend. So, recognize him when you
see him. He is a man of medium height, of ruddy and fair com-
plexion; he will be dressed in two yellow garments; the hair of
his head will appear as though water was going to trickle down
from it, whereas it will not be wet. He will fight people in the
cause of Islam, will break the Cross and kill the swine and will
abolish jizyah (tax on non-Muslims); and Allah will put an end to
all communities in his time except Islam; and he will slay the

147 Muslim Book 7, Number 2877
148 Muslim Book 1, Number 287; Bukhari Book 34, Number 425
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 111

Antichrist; and he will stay in the world for forty years; then will
die, and the Muslims will offer the funeral Prayer for him.”149

Keep a note that he will bring an “end to all communities in his
time except Islam.” There is a good chance that the tremendous
upheavals that will occur will shake the very foundations of people’s
belief. The appearance of Jesus will cause any Christian who accepts
that this is really Jesus to convert to Islam. If most Christians do that,
then the population of Muslims will double immediately. If that happens,
it is conceivable that a lot of people that belong to other religions will
also join the bandwagon.

150. Prayer behind the Mahdi: “What will be your reaction when the
son of Mary (Jesus) descends and your Imam is from among
yourselves?”150

151. “What would be your situation if the son of Mary (Jesus) descends
upon you and your Imam is from among you?”151

152. “Jesus, son of Mary, will descend. The leader of the Muslims will
say to him, ‘Come, lead us in the prayer,’ but he will say, ‘No; you
yourselves are leaders over one another.” This he will say in view
of the honor that Allah has bestowed on this community.”152

This refers to the moment Jesus will first appear. The Muslims
would be about to begin the morning prayer led by the Imam Mahdi.
Jesus will ask them to continue, and he will join the prayer as a
participant, although his rank would be higher than that of the Mahdi.
Muslims will consider this as a great honor.

149Abu Dawud Book 37, Number 4310; Ahmad; Abu Dawud
150Muslim Book 1, Number 291
151Muslim Book 1, Number 290

152Muslim Book 1, Number 293; Ahmad
112 The Future Is for Islam

153. Narrated by Hudhaifa, The Prophet said: “The Mahdi is a man
from my children; his color is that of the Arab, and his body is
like that of Israel. On his right cheek, there is a mole that glitters
like a star. The Mahdi will glance to the side as Jesus, the son of
Mary, descends with water dripping from his hair. So the Mahdi
will say to him: ‘Come forward and lead the people in prayer.’
But he will answer: ‘The Call to Prayer has been made for you to
lead.’ So he will pray behind a man from my children.”153

ARMAGEDDON AND THE END OF THE ANTICHRIST

154. “He (the Mahdi) will fight the whole world, and both the ones
who have gone astray (Christians) and the ones who have earned
Allah’s anger (Jews) will join against him with the hypocrites
in the land of Isra and Miraj at Mount Megiddo, and there will
come out against him the Queen of the world and deception, an
adulteress called America, who will incite the world to deviation
and infidelity…and the Jews of the world at that time will have the
upper hand and will rule Jerusalem, the holy city. And all nations
will come to fight by sea and air, except those in the land of
extreme cold and the land of extreme heat. And the Mahdi will
see that all the world does plot against him, but he will see that
Allah’s plan is stronger than all, and he will see that the World
belongs to Allah and to Him it will return, and that the World
is but a tree that Allah wills him to rule from its roots to its
branches… and Allah will throw down on them (unbelievers)
with a disastrous punishment and burn their land and seas and
skies and the sky will rain down a harmful shower; the people of
the Earth will curse the infidels, and Allah shall will the defeat
of the unbelievers.”154

153 Abu Nuaym; Tabarani; Abu Amru Ad Dani
154 Asmal Masalik. See note 10.
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 113

In this prophecy, it says that the battle between the Mahdi and
the Romans takes place on the plain of Megiddo, which implies that
it may be the same as the battle of Armageddon mentioned in biblical
prophecy.
Megiddo is a kibbutz in Israel. It is located on the route going
south from Haifa to Samaria. Traveling from Syria to the Tel Aviv
airport (Al Ludd), one would pass by Megiddo.

155. The Prophet said: “The place of assembly of the Muslims at the
time of the Great War (Armageddon) will be in al-Ghutah near a
city called Damascus, one of the best cities in Syria.”155

156. Exactly at the time when the Imam (leader) of the Muslims will
have stepped forward to lead them in the Morning Prayer, Jesus,
son of Mary, shall descend upon them. The Imam will step back,
so that Jesus may step forward (to lead the prayer), but Jesus,
placing his hand between his two shoulders, will say, “No, you
should lead, for the congregation has assembled to follow you.”
So, the Imam will lead the Prayer. After the salutation, Jesus will
say, “Open the gate”; so the gate will be opened. Outside there
will be the Antichrist along with 70,000 of the armed Jews. As
soon as he will look at Jesus, he will start melting like the salt
in water, and will flee. Jesus will say, “I shall strike you a blow
which will not let you live.” And he will overtake him at the east-
ern gate of Lod, and Allah will cause the Jews to be defeated…
And the earth will be as filled with the Muslims as a vessel is
filled with water. The entire world shall recite and follow one
and the same Kalimah (word), and none shall be worshipped
except Allah.”156

155 Abu Dawud, Book 37, Number 4285
156 Ibn Majah, Kitab-ul-Fitan
114 The Future Is for Islam

The Antichrist will be supported by an army of Jews and will be
killed at Lod, which is near the Tel Aviv airport. This tells us that Israel
will be the location from which the Antichrist will operate, and the
Israeli army will be the army of the Antichrist.

157. The Holy Prophet (while relating the story of the Antichrist) said:
“At that time, suddenly, Jesus, son of Mary, shall appear among
the Muslims. Then the people will stand up for the prayer, and
he will be asked, ‘Step forward, O Spirit of Allah (and lead us in
the prayer)’; but he will say, ‘No. Your own leader should step
forward and lead the prayer.’ Then, after offering the morning
prayer, the Muslims shall go forth to fight the Antichrist.” He
said, “When the liar will see Jesus, he will start dissolving like
salt in water. Then Jesus will advance towards him and will slay
him; and it will so happen that the trees and the stones will cry
out: ‘O Spirit of Allah, here is a Jew (and/or disbeliever) hiding
behind me.’ None will be left from among the followers of the
Antichrist, whom he (Jesus) will not kill.”157

What we can now conclude about Jesus’ return to earth is that:

• He will descend during the morning just before Fajr Prayer
(the morning prayer);
• He will bring an end to all communities except Islam (thus
beginning a new age).

What I’m about to say is pure conjecture, but, couldn’t it be
possible that Jesus’ return to earth is synonymous with the new age
that, according to the Mayans, would begin around this same time
frame? Although we can’t be one hundred percent certain about exact
dates with regard to future events, we can be more certain about

157 Ahmad; Tabarani; Hakim
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 115

these events in relation to each other. So, here is what we know
so far:
The Mahdi emerges in the month of Dhu al-Hijjah or Muharram
(twelfth or first month of Islamic calendar). His rule is therefore
established the following year, which is the same year of the initiation
of the “Great War.” Then, six years later, is the Muslim conquest of
Constantinople. In the seventh year, the Antichrist appears, and remains
for 40 days (one year, two months, and 14 days, see hadith 130), and
on the 40th day, Jesus descends and kills him. This would, by normal
standards, be on the ninth year of the Mahdi’s term, but still the seventh,
if counting the 40 days as 40 days instead of 439 days.

158. Then, in the morning, Jesus, son of Mary, will join the Muslims,
and Allah will cause the Antichrist and his hosts to be routed,
until the walls and the roots of the trees will call out: “O believer,
here is a disbeliever hidden behind me; come and kill him.”158

159. Then Jesus will descend, and Allah will cause the Antichrist to
be killed near the mountain pass of Afiq.159

Afiq, known as Fiq in modern times, is a city in Syria situated on
the border between Syria and Israel. There is a lake called Tiberias
(Sea of Galilee) a few miles toward the west of the city. This lake is the
source of the river Jordan. Towards the southwest of this lake, there
is a path between the mountains, which descends two thousand feet
to the point in the lake of Tiberias where the river rises. This moun-
tainous path is called the slope of Afiq. Afiq and Megiddo are on the
way from Syria to Lod near Tel Aviv.
As Jesus will appear in Damascus, Syria, and he will kill the flee-
ing Antichrist near Tel Aviv, it means that Jesus and his followers will

158 Ahmad, Hakim
159 Ahmad
116 The Future Is for Islam

be chasing the Antichrist all the way from Damascus to Tel Aviv, and
on the way they will pass through the mountain pass of Afiq.

160. Abu Huraira said: The Prophet said: “The Last Hour will not come
unless the Muslims will fight against the Jews and the Muslims will
kill them until the Jews will hide themselves behind a stone or a
tree, and a stone or a tree will say: Muslim, or the servant of Allah,
there is a Jew behind me; come and kill him; but the tree Gharqad
(boxthorn) will not say that, for it is the tree of the Jews.”160

Anyone who considers this as too “anti-Semitic” should know that
Jews lived in Jerusalem for over 13 centuries under Muslim rule with-
out a problem until Israel was created. The only time Jews were killed
in the Holy Land during Muslim rule was during the Crusades, when
European Christians came and killed both Muslims and Jews. Anti-
Semitism is a uniquely European problem.
This saying of the Messenger of God refers to a period when the
Jews and Muslims will be at war at the time of the Antichrist, who
will be supported by the Israeli army, while the Muslims will be fight-
ing on the side of Jesus. The killing of Jews that takes place is that
of the Israeli soldiers during the course of a war. Civilians, men,
women, and children will most probably not be harmed because
Jesus, who will be leading the Muslim army, will apply Islamic rules
of war, in contrast to the Judeo-European rules of war, according
to which large-scale killing women and children is considered quite
acceptable.

MARRIAGE, CHILDREN, AND DEATH OF JESUS

161. Allah’s Apostle said: After his descent on earth, Jesus will marry.
He will have children, and he will remain on earth 19 years after
marriage. He will pass away, and Muslims will perform his (funeral

160 Muslim Book 041, Number 6985
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 117

prayers) and bury him next to the Messenger of Allah (Muhammad,
God bless him, referring to himself).161

162. Allah’s Prophet said: The Messiah will die after completing the
duration he was destined to pass in the world and that Muslims
would offer his funeral prayers and bury him next to the grave
of the holy Prophet and his companions Abu Bakr and Umar.162

Jesus (God bless him) will then be buried right alongside
Muhammad, the Messenger of God (God bless him), in Medina in a
space that is permanently reserved for him to this day.

GOG AND MAGOG

“Until the Gog and Magog (people) Are let through
(their barrier), And they swiftly swarm From every
hill. Then will the True Promise Draw nigh (of ful-
fillment): Then behold! the eyes Of the Unbelievers
will Fixedly stare in horror: ‘Ah! Woe to us! we were
indeed Heedless of this; nay; we Truly did wrong!’
Qur’an 21:96-97

Who the Gog and Magog are is a subject of speculation. Gog and Magog
are generally believed to be the wild tribes of Central and Northeast-
ern Asia, including the Tartars, Mongols, Huns, and Scythians. Some
believe them to be Russians, while others think that they may be extra-
terrestrials. We’ll find out who they are when they invade the holy land
while Jesus is present there.

163. Narrated Zainab bint Jahsh: The Prophet got up from his sleep with
a flushed red face and said: “None has the right to be worshipped

161 Tirmidhi
162 Mishkat, p. 480
118 The Future Is for Islam

but Allah. Woe to the Arabs, from the Great evil that is nearly
approaching them. Today a gap has been made in the wall of Gog
and Magog like this.” (Sufyaan illustrated this by forming the
number 90 or 100 with his fingers.) It was asked, “Shall we be
destroyed though there are righteous people among us?” The
Prophet said, “Yes, if evil increased.”163

164. On the authority of Jabir: Gog and Magog would walk until they
would reach the mountain of al-Khamar, and it is a mountain of
Jerusalem, and they would say: “We have killed those who are
upon the earth. Let us now kill those who are in the sky and they
would throw their arrows towards the sky and the arrows would
return to them besmeared with blood.”164

165. Narrated An-Nawwas, son of Sam’an: Allah’s Apostle mentioned
of the Antichrist one day in the morning. He sometimes described
him as insignificant and sometimes described (his turmoil) as
very significant (and we felt) as if he were in the cluster of the
date-palm trees. When we went to him (to the Holy Prophet) in
the evening and he read (the signs of fear) on our faces, he said:
“What is the matter with you?” We said: “Allah’s Apostle, you men-
tioned the Antichrist this morning (sometimes describing him)
as insignificant and sometimes very important, until we began
to think he was present in some (nearby) part of the cluster of
the date-palm trees.” So he said: “I harbor fear in regard to you
in so many other things besides the Antichrist. If he comes forth
while I am among you, I shall contend with him on your behalf,
but if he comes forth while I am not among you, a man must
contend on his own behalf, and Allah will take care of every
Muslim on my behalf (and safeguard him against his evil). He

163 Bukhari Book 88, Number 181
164 Muslim Book 41, Number 7016
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 119

(the Antichrist) will be a young man with twisted, cropped hair,
and a blind eye. I compare him with Abdul Uzzak son of Qatan.
He who among you will survive to see him should recite over
him the opening verses of Surah al-Kahf (Chapter 18 of the
Qur’an). He will appear on the way between Syria and Iraq and
will spread mischief right and left. O servant of Allah! Adhere
(to the path of Truth).”
We said: “Allah’s Apostle, how long will he stay on earth?” He
said: “For forty days, one day like a year, one day like a month,
one day like a week, and the rest of the days will be like your days.”
We said: “Allah’s Apostle, will one day’s prayer suffice for the
prayers of the day equal to one year?” Thereupon he said: “No, but
you must make an estimate of the time (and then observe prayer).”
We said: “Allah’s Apostle, how quickly will he walk upon the
earth?” Thereupon he said: “Like cloud driven by the wind. He
will come to the people and invite them (to a wrong religion);
they will affirm their faith in him and respond to him. He will then
give a command to the sky: there will be rainfall upon the earth,
and it will grow crops. Then, in the evening, their pasturing ani-
mals will come to them with their humps very high, their udders
full of milk, and their flanks distended. He will then come to
another people and invite them. But they will reject him, so he
will go away from them; they will have a drought and nothing will
be left with them in the form of wealth.
“He will then walk through the desert and say to it: ‘Bring
forth your treasures.’ The treasures will come out and gather
before him like a swarm of bees. He will then call someone in
the flush of youth, strike him with a sword and cut him into two
pieces, and then place these pieces at a distance equivalent to
that between an archer and his target.
“He will then call (that young man), and he will come for-
ward laughing with his face gleaming (with happiness). It will be
at this very time that Allah will send Christ, son of Mary. He will
120 The Future Is for Islam

descend at the white minaret on the eastern side of Damascus,
wearing two garments lightly dyed with saffron, and placing his
hands on the wings of two Angels. When he lowers his head, there
will fall beads of perspiration from his head, and when he raises
it up, beads like pearls will scatter from it. Every non-believer
who smells the odor of his body will die and his breath will reach
as far as he is able to see. He will then search for him (Antichrist)
until he catches hold of him at the gate of Lod and kills him. Then
a people whom Allah had protected will come to Jesus, son of
Mary, and he will wipe their faces and inform them of their ranks
in Paradise. It will be under such conditions that Allah will reveal
to Jesus these words: ‘I have brought forth from among My ser-
vants such people against whom none will be able to fight; you
take these people safely to Tur (Mount Sinai), and then Allah
will send Gog and Magog, and they will swarm down from every
slope. The first of them will pass the lake of Tiberias and drink
out of it. And when the last of them passes, he will say: ‘There
was once water there.’
“Jesus and his companions will then be besieged here (at
Tur, and they will be so hard pressed) that the head of the ox
will be dearer to them than one hundred dinars. Allah’s Apostle,
Jesus, and his companions will supplicate Allah, Who will send
to them insects (which will attack their necks), and in the morn-
ing they will perish as one single person. Allah’s Apostle, Jesus,
and his companions, then come down to earth and they will not
find on Earth as much space as a single span that is not filled
with putrefaction and stench. Allah’s Apostle (Muhammad, God
bless him) said, Jesus (God bless him), and his companions will
then beseech Allah, who will send birds whose necks would be
like those of Bactrian camels, and they will carry them away and
throw them where Allah wills.
“Then Allah will send rain, which no house of mud-bricks
or (tent of) camelhair will keep out and it will wash the earth
until it resembles a mirror. Then the earth will be told to bring
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 121

forth its fruit and restore its blessing and, as a result thereof,
there will grow (such a big) pomegranate that a group of people
will be able to eat it and seek shelter under its skin, a dairy cow
will give so much milk that a whole party will be able to drink it.
The milking camel will give such (a large quantity of) milk that the
whole tribe will be able to drink from it, and the milking-sheep
will give so much milk that the whole family will be able to drink
from it. At that time, Allah will send a pleasant wind, which will
soothe (people) even under their armpits. He will take the life of
every Muslim and only the wicked will survive who will commit
adultery like asses and the Last Hour would come to them.”165

Tur means “mount” in Arabic and most likely refers to Mount
Sinai, where Jesus and his followers will go in order to escape Gog
and Magog. It could, however, be another mountain.

166. The Messenger of Allah said: “For seven years, Muslims will build
fires with Gog and Magog’s bows and arrows.”166

167. Narrated Abu Sa’id al-Khudri: The Prophet said: “The people will
continue performing the Haj and Umrah to the Ka’ba, even after
the appearance of Gog and Magog.”167

THE GOLDEN AGE

168. During this (period), my Ummah (community) will lead a kind
of comfortable and carefree life that they have never known
before. (The land) will bring forth its yield and will not hold
anything back.168

165Muslim Book 41, Number 7015
166Muslim; Tirmidhi; Silsilah al-Sahihah, Number 1924; Al-Jami Al-Saghir,
Number 3673
167Bukhari Book 26, Number 663

168Ibn Majah
122 The Future Is for Islam

169. Then my Ummah, be its members good or wicked, will be
blessed with a blessing the like of which they have never heard
before. Allah sends them an abundance of rain, the land will
produce a great abundance of crops, and possessions will be
commonplace.169

170. Allah will give so much power to the Mahdi. He will remove
cruelty from the world overnight, religion will be established, and
Islam will be revived. The Mahdi will restore its lost value to it,
and it will come to life after its apparent demise. Ignorant people,
misers and cowards alike, will be very knowledgeable, generous,
and brave. They will practice religion as in the time of Prophet
Muhammad (God bless him).170

171. Like the cup fills with water, so will earth fill with peace. There
will be no enmity left between any people. All hostility, fighting,
and envy will disappear.171

172. The warriors will abandon their weight (weapons and kits).172

THE QAHTAANI
173. The Prophet said, “The Hour will not come until a man from
Qahtan (Yemen) appears and rules the people.”173

174. Narrated Abu Huraira: Allah’s Apostle said: “The Hour will not
be established till a man from Qahtan appears, driving the people
with his stick.”174

169Al-Muttaqi al-Hindi, Al-Burhan, p. 16
170Muhyiddin Ibn Arabi, Al-Futuhat al-Makkia, p. 66; Allamah Muhaqqiq Ash-Sharif
Muhammad ibn ‘Abd al-Rasul, Al-Isaatu li Asrat’is-saat, p. 186
171Muslim

172Sunan Ibn Majah, vol. 10, p. 334

173Muslim Book 41, Number 6954

174Bukhari Book 88, Number 233
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 123

175. Reported by Jabir, son of Majid As Sadafi: The Prophet said:
“After me there will be caliphs, and after the caliphs, princes,
and after princes, kings, and after kings, tyrants. Then, a man
from the Family of my House will come and fill the earth with
justice, just as it had been filled with transgression. Then, the
Prince after him is the Qahtaani and by He who sent me with
the Truth, he is not lesser than him.”175

The above narration clearly establishes that the Qahtaani appears
and rules after the Mahdi, and thus after Jesus, son of Maryam. This
should remove any doubts about when the Qahtaani would appear
and rule in relation to the other events.

176. Imam Ahmad reports from the hadith of Dhi Mikhbar, the son of the
brother of an-Najaashi, that the Prophet said: “This matter used to
be amongst the red-skinned people, but Allah removed it from them
and placed it amongst the Quraish, but it shall return to them.”176

177. Abu Huraira reported Allah’s Messenger as saying: The day and
the night would not come to an end before a man called al-Jahjah
would occupy the throne.177

The Qahtaan are a tribe from Yemen. It is they who are probably
referred to as a red-skinned people. The caliphate will go to them after
the time of the Mahdi and Jesus.

THE SMOKE
There is no deity save Him: It is He Who gives life
and gives death — the Lord and Cherisher to you and
your earliest ancestors.

175At-Tabarani (in his large dictionary), Ibn Mandah, Abu Nuaym and Ibn Asakir
176Ahmad
177Muslim Book 41, Number 6955
124 The Future Is for Islam

Yet they play about in doubt.
Then watch thou for the Day that the sky will bring
forth a kind of smoke (or mist) plainly visible,
Enveloping the people: this will be a Penalty Grievous.
(They will say:) ‘Our Lord! remove the Penalty from
us, for we do really believe!’
How shall the Message be (effectual) for them, seeing
that a Messenger explaining things clearly has
(already) come to them,—
Yet they turn away from him and say: ’Tutored (by
others), a man possessed!’
We shall indeed remove the Penalty for a while, (but)
truly ye will revert (to your ways).
Qur’an 44:8-15

178. Hudhaifa, son of Usaid, reported: Allah’s Apostle was in an
apartment, and we were downstairs, when he peeped in and
said to us: “What are you discussing about?” We said: “(We are
discussing about the Last) Hour.” Thereupon he said: “The Last
Hour would not come until the ten signs appear: landsliding
in the east, and landsliding in the west, and landsliding in the
peninsula of Arabia, the smoke, the Antichrist, the beast of
the earth, Gog and Magog, the rising of the sun from the west,
and the fire which would emit from the lower part of ‘Adan.
Shu’ba said that ‘Abd al-’Aziz b. Rufai’ reported on the authority
of Abu Tufail, who reported on the authority of Abu Sariha a
hadith like this that Allah’s Apostle did not make a mention of
(the tenth sign) but he said that out out of the ten (signs) one was
the descent of Jesus Christ, son of Mary, and in another version
it is the blowing of the violent gale which would drive the people
to the ocean.178

178 Muslim Book 41, Number 6932
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 125

179. Abu Huraira reported Allah’s Messenger as having said: Hasten
to do good deeds before six things happen: the rising of the sun
from the west, the smoke, the Antichrist, the beast and (the death)
of one of you or the general turmoil.179

180. Abu Huraira reported Allah’s Messenger as saying: “Hasten in
performing these good deeds (before these) six things (happen):
(the appearance) of the Antichrist, the smoke, the beast of the
earth, the rising of the sun from the west, the general turmoil
(tribulation, leading to large-scale massacre), and death of masses
and individuals.180

There are several narrations, especially in Sahih Bukhari,
where one of the companions of the Messenger of God says that
the smoke has already appeared during an event where a tribe that
refused to believe suffered from a famine and saw smoke in front
of their eyes from hunger. This was not a saying of the Messenger of
God, but rather an interpretation of one of his companions. How-
ever, the Qur’an says that this will be a kind of smoke that will be
clearly visible and not an optical illusion. We can assume that it will
be a very severe event, likely to envelop the whole world. Scientists
predict such an outcome from a comet impact or the eruption of a
super-volcano.
Some believe that the smoke will last for 40 days and then there
will be a “night of three nights” (i.e., the earth stops rotating on its axis)
before the rising of the sun from the west. An authentic source for this
belief cannot be located, although if it is true, then it will make sense
as the calamity that causes the smoke could tip the earth’s axis, which
would first stop spinning and then restart in the opposite direction.
The sayings are:

179 Muslim Book 41, Number 7039
180 Muslim Book 41, Number 7040
126 The Future Is for Islam

“Fog or smoke will cover the skies for forty days. The non-
believers will fall unconscious while Muslims will fall ill (develop colds).
The skies will then clear up.”
“A night three nights long will follow the fog. It will occur in the
month of Zil-Haj after Eidul-Adha (end of Haj celebration), and cause
much restlessness among the people.”
“After the night of three nights, the following morning the sun
will rise in the west. People’s repentance will not be accepted after
this incident.”

SUN RISING IN THE WEST

Are they waiting to see if the angels come to them,
or thy Lord (Himself), or certain of the Signs of thy
Lord! The day that certain of the Signs of thy Lord
come, no good will it do to a soul to believe then if it
believed not before nor earned righteousness through
its Faith. Say: ‘Wait ye: we too are waiting.’
Qur’an 6:158

181. Abu Huraira said: The Prophet said: “The Hour will not come
until the sun rises from the west. When the people see it, whoever
is living on earth will believe, but that will be the time when, ‘No
good will it do to a soul to believe in them then, if it believed
not before.’”181

182. Abu Huraira reported Allah’s Messenger as saying: “He who seeks
repentance (from the Lord) before the rising of the sun from
the west (before the Day of Resurrection), Allah turns to him
with Mercy.”182

181 Bukhari Book 60, Number 159
182 Muslim Book 35, Number 6525
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 127

183. “The hijra (Islamic calendar) will not stop until the end of
repentance, and repentance will not stop until the sun rises in
the west.”183

184. Abdullah, son of Amr, said, “I memorized a saying from the
Prophet, which I have not forgotten since. I heard the Prophet
say, ‘The first of the signs (of the Hour) to appear will be the
rising of the sun from the west and the appearance of the Beast
before the people in the forenoon. Whichever of these two events
happens first, the other will follow immediately.’”184

This is to say, these will be the first of the extraordinary signs
to appear.

THE BEAST

And when the Word is fulfilled against them (the
unjust), We shall produce from the earth a Beast to
(face) them: it will speak to them because mankind
had no faith in Our Signs.
Qur’an 27:82

The Beast is also a figure of biblical prophecy, and is also given the
title “Antichrist” in some passages of the Bible; however, the characteris-
tics between the two seem to be very different, as the Biblical Beast, the
“Antichrist,” is very much like the “Dajjal” mentioned in the prophetic
hadith. The similarity between the two is that they both lay claim to
divinity at some point. At the same time, the other Biblical figure, the
“False Prophet,” is also very much like the Antichrist, as they both
travel through the earth, performing miracles to mislead the people.

183Al-Musnad”, Vol.4/99; Abu Dawud, Kitab al-Jihad, Vol.3/7, Hadith 2479; ad-Darami,
Kitab as-Siyyar, Vol.2/239
184Muslim Book 41, Number 7025
128 The Future Is for Islam

185. Baridah said: “The Prophet took me to a place in the desert,
near Mecca. It was a dry piece of land surrounded by sand. The
prophet said, ‘The Beast will emerge from this place.’ It was a
very small area.”185

Here, the Messenger of God specified an exact location near
Mecca for the emergence of the Beast. In addition, he calls the figure
“the Beast” and not “Dajjal.” Therefore, the Beast is a different creature
and not the Antichrist.
In an unknown saying, the Beast would emerge seven days after
the sun initially starts rising in the west and setting in the east.

186. It was reported from Abu Huraira that the Prophet said: “The
Beast of the Earth will emerge and will have with it the rod of
Moses and the ring of Solomon.”186
It was also reported that he said: “(The Beast) will destroy
the noses of the unbelievers with the ring, so that people seated
around one table will begin to address one another with the words
“O Believer!” or “O Unbeliever!”

It should be noted that in the very brief description of the Beast
in the prophetic narrations above, the actual fate of the Beast is not
mentioned, and there seems to be a similarity between the beast in
the Bible and in the Qur’an — they both mark people on their fore-
heads. The Antichrist, according to some narrations, has a mark on
his own forehead, which says “Kaffir” (Disbeliever).

BREEZE FROM THE SOUTH (THE RAPTURE)

187. “Smoke will appear all over the earth which will cause believers to
catch something similar to a slight cold, whereas the unbelievers

185 Ibn Majah, Kitab al-Fitan
186 Ahmad 2 — 295; Similar hadith narrated by Ibn Majah in Kitab al-Fitan
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 129

will be hit harder by it. Finally, a cold wind will come and kill all
believers, leaving only unbelievers on the earth, who will then
witness the last hour. The angel Israfil will blow a trumpet, and
the resurrection of all human beings will begin.”187

188. It was reported from Abdullah, son of Amr, that the Prophet said:
“The Hour will not come until Allah takes away the best people
on earth; only the worst of people will be left; they will not know
any good or forbid any evil.”188

189. Abdullah, son of Amr, said: “The Hour shall come only when the
worst type of people are left on the earth. They will be worse
than the people of pre-Islamic days. They will receive whatever
they ask of Allah.”
Uqbah said: “He knows better; so far as I am concerned, I
heard the Messenger of Allah say: ‘A group of people from my
Ummah (community) will continue to fight in obedience to the
Command of Allah, remaining dominant over their enemies. Those
who oppose them shall not do them any harm. They will remain
in this condition until the Hour overtakes them.’”
(At this) Abdullah said: “Yes. Then Allah will raise a wind,
which will be fragrant like musk and whose touch will be like
the touch of silk; (but) it will cause the death of all (faithful) per-
sons, not leaving behind a single person with an iota of faith in his
heart. Then only the worst of men will remain to be overwhelmed
by the Hour.”189

190. Abdullah, son of Amr said: The Prophet said: “The Antichrist will
appear in my Ummah, and will remain for forty — I cannot say
whether he meant forty days, forty months, or forty years — then

187http://www.usc.edu/dept/MSA/fundamentals/pillars/signsofthelasthour.html
188Ahmad
189Muslim Book 20, Number 4721
130 The Future Is for Islam

Allah will send Jesus, son of Mary, who will resemble Urwah, son
of Masud. He will chase the Antichrist and kill him. Then the
people will live for seven years, during which there will be no
enmity between any two persons. Then Allah will send a cold
wind from the direction of Syria, which will take the soul of
everyone who has the slightest speck of good or faith in his
heart. Even if one of you were to enter the heart of a mountain,
the wind would reach him there and take his soul. Only the
most wicked people will be left; they will be as careless as birds,
with the characteristics of beasts, and will have no concern for
right and wrong. Satan will come to them in the form of man
and will say, ‘Don’t you respond?’ They will say, ‘What do you
order us to do?’ He will order them to worship idols, and in spite
of that, they will have sustenance in abundance, and lead
comfortable lives.’”190

Christian prophecy predicts a similar event, referred to as “the
Rapture.” Its anticipated effect is almost identical to that of the “cold
wind from Syria,” except that Christians believe the rapture to occur
upon the believers to save them from the tribulation of the Antichrist
before the return of Jesus, while Muslims believe the rapture will occur
upon the believers to save them from the destruction of the world on
the Day of Judgment after the return of Jesus.

191. Hafiz Ibn-i-Hajar has alluded to a tradition from the Prophet,
saying: “The Doomsday shall not come until things come to such
a pass that a woman shall pass through a crowd of men and one
of the men will rise and lift her undergarment and engage in cop-
ulation with her. Seeing such a happening, one of the men will
say: ‘It would have been better if you had engaged in intercourse
with her in privacy behind a wall.’” “Then,” said the Prophet, “such

190 Muslim Book 41, Number 7023
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 131

a man will be as virtuous among those people as Abu Bakr and
Umar are the most righteous among you.”191

LOSS OF RELIGIOUS KNOWLEDGE

192. Hudhaifa said: The Prophet said: “Islam will become worn out
like clothes are, until there will be no one who knows what fast-
ing, prayer, charity, and rituals are. The Qur’an will disappear in
one night, and no Ayah (verse) will be left on earth (in the hearts
of the people). Some groups of old people will be left who will
say, ‘We heard our fathers saying La ilaha illa Allah (there is no
god but Allah), so we repeat it.’” Silah asked Hudhaifa, “What will
saying La ilaha illa Allah do for them when they do not know
what prayer, fasting, ritual, and charity are?” Hudhaifa ignored
him; then Silah repeated his question three times, and each time
Hudhaifa ignored him. Finally he answered, “O Silah, it will save
them from Hell,” and said it three times.192

193. Narrated Abdullah: The Prophet said: “Near the establishment
of the Hour, there will be the days of Al-Harj, and the religious
knowledge will be taken away (vanish, i.e., by the death of reli-
gious scholars) and general ignorance will spread.” Abu Musa
said, “Al-Harj, in the Ethiopian language, means killing.” Ibn
Mas’ud added: “I heard Allah’s Apostle say (it will be) from among
the most wicked people who will be living at the time when the
Hour will be established.”193

194. Narrated Abu Sa’id al-Khudri: The Prophet said: “The people will
continue performing the Haj and Umrah to the Ka’ba, even after
the appearance of Gog and Magog.” Shu’ba added: “The Hour

191Tabrani in Fath-ul-Bari
192Ibn Kathir, Ibn Majah
193Bukhari Book 88, Number 187
132 The Future Is for Islam

(Day of Judgment) will not be established till the Haj (to the Ka’ba)
is abandoned.”194

195. “What will become of you when you do not enjoin the right and
forbid the wrong?” he asked. Those around him asked in amaze-
ment: “Will that truly happen?” “Yes, and even worse!” he replied,
and went on to ask: “What will become of you when you enjoin the
wrong and forbid the good?” Those around him were astonished:
“O Prophet! Will that also happen?” “Yes, and even worse!” he
replied, and continued: “What will become of you when you regard
good as evil and evil as good?” The people around him asked: “O
Prophet! Will that also come to pass?” “Yes, it will,” he replied.195

ARABIA TURNS TO IDOLATRY

196. Abu Huraira reported Allah’s Messenger as saying: The Last Hour
would not come until the women of the tribe of Daus would be
seen going round Dhi al-Khalasa (for worship), and Dhi al-Khalasa
is a place in Tabala, where there was a temple in which the people
of the tribe of Daus used to worship the idol.196

197. Narrated Abu Huraira: Allah’s Apostle said: “The Hour will not
be established till the buttocks of the women of the tribe of
Daus move while going round Dhi al-Khalasa.” Dhi al-Khalasa
was the idol of the Daus tribe, which they used to worship in the
pre-Islamic period of ignorance.197

198. Aisha reported: I heard Allah’s Messenger as saying: “The (sys-
tem) of night and day would not end until the people have taken
to the worship of Lat and Uzza.” I said: “Allah’s Messenger, I think

194Bukhari Book 26, Number 663
195Ibn Abi Ya’la, Musnad; al-Tabarani, al-Awsat
196Muslim Book 41, Number 6944

197Bukhari Book 88, Number 232
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 133

when Allah revealed this verse, ‘It is He Who hath sent his Mes-
senger with Guidance and the Religion of Truth, to proclaim it over
all religion, even though the Pagans may detest (it)’ (Qur’an 9:33),
it implies that (this promise) is going to be fulfilled.” Thereupon
he (Allah’s Apostle) said: “It would happen as Allah would like.
Then Allah would send the sweet fragrant air by which everyone
who has even a mustard grain of faith in Him would die and
those only would survive who would have no goodness in them.
And they would revert to the religion of their forefathers.”198

ABANDONMENT OF MEDINA

199. “People will leave Medina in good condition; no one will inhabit
it except for wild beasts and birds. Then, two shepherds from
the tribe of Muzainah will come hoping to enter Medina with
their goats, but upon finding it full of wild beasts, they will turn
away. When they arrive at Thaniat Al Wada, they will fall on their
faces (die).”199

DESTRUCTION OF THE KA’BA

200. Abdullah, son of Amr, said: I heard the Prophet say: “Dhu’l-
Suwayqatayn from Abyssinia will destroy the Ka’ba and steal its
treasure and Kiswah (cloth covering). It is as if I could see him
now: he is bald-headed and has a distortion in his wrists. He will
strike the Ka’ba with his spade and pick-axe.”200

201. Son of Abbas narrated that the Prophet said: “It is as if I can see
him now: he is black and his legs are widely spaced. He will
destroy the Ka’ba stone by stone.”201

198Muslim Book 41, Number 6945
199Muslim Book 7, Number 3203
200Ahmad 2/220

201Ahmad 1/227
134 The Future Is for Islam

202. It is reported from Abdullah, son of Umar, that the Prophet said:
“Leave the Abyssinians alone so long as they do not disturb you,
for no one will recover the treasure of the Ka’ba except Dhu’l-
Suwayqatayn from Abyssinia.”202

203. Narrated Abu Huraira: Allah’s Apostle said: “Dhu’l-Suwayqatayn
(the thin-legged man) from Ethiopia will demolish the Ka’ba.”203

204. Umar ibn al-Khattab, reported that he heard the Prophet say:
“The people of Mecca will leave, and only a few people will pass
through it. Then it will be resettled and rebuilt; then the people
will leave it again, and no one will ever return.”204

THREE LANDSLIDES AND THE FIRE IN YEMEN

205. Narrated Hudhaifa, son of Usaid Ghifari: Allah’s Messenger came
to us all of a sudden as we were (busy in a discussion). He said:
“What are you discussing?” (The Companions) said: “We are
discussing the Last Hour.”
Thereupon he said: “It will not come until you see ten signs
before, and (in this connection) he made a mention of the smoke,
Antichrist, the beast, the rising of the sun from the west, the
descent of Jesus, son of Mary, the Gog and Magog, and landslides
in three places, one in the east, one in the west, and one in Arabia,
at the end of which fire would burn forth from the Yemen, and
would drive people to the place of their assembly.”205

The fire in Yemen could be the result of a large volcanic eruption
or a comet strike.

202Abu Dawud, Kitab al-Malahim Hadith 4287
203Bukhari Book 26, Number 666
204http://www.islamworld.net/hour/Nine.txt

205Muslim Book 41, Number 6931
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 135

206. Narrated Abu Huraira: Allah’s Apostle said: “The Hour will
not be established till a fire will come out of the land of Hijaz,
and it will throw light on the necks of the camels at Busra
(in Iraq).”206

207. Narrated Abu Huraira: The Apostle of Allah said: “The best day
on which the sun has risen is Friday; on it Adam was created, on
it he was expelled (from Paradise), on it his contrition was
accepted, on it he died, and on it the Last Hour will take place.
On Friday, every beast is on the lookout from dawn to sunrise in
fear of the Last Hour, but not jinn and men, and it contains a
time at which no Muslim prays and asks anything from Allah, but
He will give it to him.” Ka’b said: “That is one day every year.” So
I said: “It is on every Friday.”207

END OF THE WORLD

And the Day that the Trumpet will be sounded —
then will be smitten with terror those who are in
the heavens, and those who are on earth, except
such as Allah will please (to exempt): and all shall
come to His (Presence) as beings conscious of their
lowliness.
Qur’an 27:87

The Day that We roll up the heavens like a scroll rolled
up for books (completed) — even as We produced the
first creation, so shall We produce a new one: a
promise We have undertaken: truly shall We fulfil it.
Qur’an 21:104

206 Muslim Book 41, Number 6935
207 Abu Dawud
136 The Future Is for Islam

208. “The Hour will not come upon anyone who says, ‘Allah, Allah’;
it will only come upon the most evil of men.”208

At the time of the last hour, there will be no one who believes
in God.

209. It was reported from Abu Huraira that the Prophet said: “The
hour will not come until there has been rain which will destroy
all dwellings except tents.”209

210. Abu Huraira reported Allah’s Messenger as saying: “The earth
would consume every son of Adam except his spinal chord
from which his body would be reconstituted (on the Day of
Resurrection).”210

211. Abu Huraira reported so many hadith from Allah’s Apostle, and
amongst them was that Allah’s Messenger said: “There is a bone
in the human being that the earth would never consume and it
is from this that new bodies would be reconstituted (on the Day
of Resurrection).” They said: “Allah’s Messenger, which bone is
that?” Thereupon he said: “It is the spinal bone.”211

212. Abu Huraira reported Allah’s Messenger as saying: “Between
the two blowings of the trumpet, (there would be an interval of
forty).” They said: “Abu Huraira, do you mean forty days?” He
said: “I cannot say anything.” They said: “Do you mean forty
months?” He said: “I cannot say anything.” They said: “Do you
mean forty years?” He said: “I cannot say anything.” Then he said:
“Then Allah would cause the water to descend from the sky, and

208Ibn Kathir
209Ahmad, 2/262
210Muslim Book 41, Number 7056

211Muslim Book 41, Number 7057
The Prophecies of the Messenger of God 137

they (people) will sprout like vegetables. The only thing in a
man which would not decay would be one bone (spinal chord)
from which the whole frame would be reconstituted on the Day
of Resurrection.”212

213. Allah, the Exalted and Glorious, would fold the Heavens on the
Day of Judgment and then He would place them on His right hand
and say: “I am the Lord; where are the haughty and where are
the proud today?” He would fold the Earth, placing it on the left
hand and say: “I am the Lord; where are the haughty and where
are the proud today?”213

214. It was narrated that Sahl, son of Sa’d, said: I heard the Prophet
say: “The people will be gathered on the Day of Resurrection on
reddish white land like a pure loaf of bread (made from pure
fine flour).” Sahl or someone else said: “It will have no landmarks
for anyone (to make use of).”214

215. Aisha reported that she beard Allah’s Messenger as saying:
“The people would be assembled on the Day of Resurrection
barefooted, naked, and uncircumcised.” I said: “Allah’s Mes-
senger, will the male and the female be together on the Day
and would they be looking at one another?” Upon this Allah’s
Messenger said: “Aisha, the matter would be too serious for them
to look at one another.”215

212Muslim Book 41, Number 7055
213Muslim Book 39, Number 6704
214Muslim Book 39, Number 6708

215Muslim Book 40, Number 6844
CHAPTER 4

Interpretation
of Events
This chapter compiles the sayings of the Messenger of God and endeav-
ors to arrange them in the chronological sequence in which events
are likely to occur. Because we are mostly working with the same
material as in the last chapter, almost everything here is a repetition.
The main difference is that instead of dividing the text between the say-
ings of the Prophet and the explanations, we are presenting the same
information in one continuous narrative.
Since this chapter offers my own personal interpretation of the
prophecies, the hadith being quoted and the opinions regarding their
meaning all appear together, and the fine line between what is in the
hadith and what is my opinion has intentionally been blurred.
Please note that whenever the Messenger of God mentioned a
person or a group, he would usually refer to the tribe that they came
from, as was the custom in Arabia at that time. Everyone belonged to
one tribe or the other, and when reference was made to someone, the
tribe to which they belonged was also mentioned.
Since that time, over 1,400 years and nearly 50 generations have
passed, and people have moved around from the original location of
their tribe. For the purpose of identifying these people or groups in
the present context, we must assume that whenever the tribe of a per-
son or group is mentioned, it is the tribe from which they originally

139
140 The Future Is for Islam

descended and not necessarily the current location of where they live.
For example, the tribe of Bani Kalb was originally from Syria, but may
now be living in Iraq.
The term “Children of Israel” could refer to Jews no matter where
they are, but could also refer to Muslims who are descended from
those Jews who converted to Islam and are still living in Palestine and
the surrounding areas.
The Pathan people of Afghanistan and Pakistan claim to consist
of several of the ten lost tribes of Israel and could correctly be referred
to as Children of Isaac or Children of Israel. Aramaic inscriptions
have been found in Afghanistan, and many customs among the Pathans
predate Islam and are more akin to the laws of Moses.
Names of locations have also changed over time. For example,
what was called Ar-Ray in the seventh century would refer to Tehran
in Iran now. Ray was an ancient town that was located near present-
day Tehran. It was a great Islamic center of learning during the golden
age of Islam. The town was severely damaged during the Mongol inva-
sions and supplanted by Tehran. Therefore, when Ar-Ray is mentioned
in the sayings of the Messenger of God, we can assume that it refers
to today’s Tehran.
Syria is one country that is mentioned frequently in relation to
prophecies that pertain to current times. However, when the Messenger
of God refers to Sham (Syria), it is obviously the area known as Syria
during his time, and this area would now include present-day Syria as
well as Israel, Lebanon, Jordan, Palestine, and parts of Turkey and Iraq.
So, when he refers to “Antioch in Syria,” he obviously means present-
day Antioch in Turkey. When he says that Syria will take the tribes of
Egypt prisoner, he is likely to mean that the Israelis will take Egypt-
ian prisoners. When he says that the people of Syria will get no food
because of the Romans, he means that the Palestinians will get no
food because of the Americans. Syria could mean any of Israel, Lebanon,
Jordan, etc., depending on the context in which it is referred to.
We will start the narrative from the time of the First World War,
as the prophecies that can clearly be matched with present-day
Interpretation of Events 141

conflicts appear to start at the beginning of the 20th century. And this
is indeed a very valid starting point as, after all, the root cause of
the present clash between the West and Islam is the creation and
perpetuation of the state of Israel, the seeds of which were laid when,
as an aftermath of the First World War, the Muslim Ottoman Empire
was disbanded and Britain pledged Palestine to the Zionists in the
infamous Balfour Declaration.
I have arranged the prophecies in chronological order. The start-
ing point of events mentioned in this chapter lies in the past, and we
subsequently move on to events that have not occurred yet and
consequently will be occurring in the future. Therefore, it is logical
that at some stage in the narrative, we should arrive at a point in time
that represents the present days. When this occurs, I will mention it.
So, until you see the marker, you may assume that the events being
discussed have already occurred, and events after the marker have
yet to occur and represent the future prophecies.

WORLD WARS I AND II

It was prophesied that a great war near the end of time (the Third
World War) would be preceded by two other great wars during which
many people would be killed.
The first of the three major wars would start a few decades after
the year 1300 AH (1883 AD), when God would incite a Greek king (a
Christian European) to make war on the world. This was the First
World War.
A short while later, that is, two decades after the first war, a man
whose name would be associated with a cat name* from the German
lands would start to bother people and would want to seize control

*The man from the German lands is obviously Adolf Hitler. However, to refer to
him as someone with a “cat name” is not as apt as referring to him as some-
one with a “wolf name,” because the name Adolf is derived from the old German
name Adalwuf, which means “noble wolf.” This mistake may have occurred
because of an error in the transmission of the hadith.
142 The Future Is for Islam

over the whole world. He would light the fires of the Second World
War and would be known as the “Great Leader.” He would wage war
against the entire world, both the warm (southern) and cold (north-
ern) lands. After years filled with severe war fires, he would meet
God’s punishment.

CONFLICTS IN THE MIDDLE EAST

It was prophesied that some Muslims would be fighting the unbeliev-
ers until the remnant of them would fight along the River Jordan —
Muslims to the east of it and the unbelievers to the west of it. Today,
it so happens that the border between Jordan and Israel lies along the
River Jordan, and this is the fault line along which the conflict between
the Muslims and the Zionists is being fought.
It was predicted that the inhabitants of Egypt and Syria would
kill their rulers. Then there would be the killing of a senior member
of the Hashemite. Many rulers of Egypt have been killed in the last
century, the last one being Anwar Sadat in 1981. Jordan is known as
the Hashemite Kingdom, and King Abdullah was killed in 1951.
Between five to eight decades after the year 1300 AH (1883 AD),
a man, “Nasser,” would rule Egypt. Arabs would call him “succa-ul
Arab,” meaning “the brave of the Arabs.” God would punish him twice,
once in one war, and then in another one and Nasser would never
attain victory.
Around this time the flow of the river Euphrates would be halted,
an event that could be said to have occurred when the Keban Dam
was built on the river.
God would make a dark-colored person (Anwar Sadat), whose
father would be more enlightened than he would be, the leader of the
Egyptian people and the Arab nation. But he would make an agreement
with the thieves of the Masjid al-Aqsa (the Israelis).
The Muslims would make a firm truce with the Romans (America),
and they would both wage a campaign against an enemy that is attacking
Interpretation of Events 143

them (Russia). The Soviets invaded Afghanistan and there was sub-
sequent collaboration between Muslims and America to evict them.
During this time, a nation/tribe would come forth from the direction
of Iran. Muslim armies would be coming down to the Iranian plains.
Hypocrites (Muslims of weak or no faith, probably the Iraqi army)
would be standing on the bank of a black river called Rakabeh on the
other side in an area where oil wells are concentrated. There would
be a war between them. God would deprive both armies of victory.
This was, of course, the Iran-Iraq war that lasted from 1980 to 1988 and
ended inconclusively.
Meanwhile, the Muslims, as well as their Roman ally (America),
would be granted victory and great spoils, and they would alight in a
plain surrounded by hills (Afghanistan).
Then a cruel man would appear in Iraq. This man, with a slight
injury in his eye, would be a tyrant and would be violently aggressive
against his opponents. The Byzantines and the Franks (the West) would
gather their forces together against this man, whose name would be
Saddam, to fight over a wasteland. This wasteland region would be small
Kut (which includes Kuwait), the region to which he had come previ-
ously because he was deceived. This deception actually occurred when,
before Iraq’s invasion, Saddam was told by the Americans that they
didn’t care what he did against Kuwait.
A country smaller than the end bone of the spinal cord (Kuwait)
would wail for the world to come to its aid. Its leader would surrender
the banner to the leader of all evil, who would come from the furthest
western shores. The leader would regain his throne, and Iraq would
be destroyed in the confrontation. The leader of this nation would also
fight the army of the Mahdi and would be ordered by the Mahdi to be
executed and then the country would return to the main body of Islam.
Iraq would be sanctioned thereafter, causing its people to receive
neither food nor money because of the non-Arabs, and the Romans
(Americans) would start installing their bases up to Khaiber, near
Medina.
144 The Future Is for Islam

WORLD WAR III

When Saddam emerges, the war between him and America will be the
beginning of World War III. Iraq will be destroyed and withhold its
currency (be occupied or cut off from the Muslim community).
Then a Tyrant who descends from Abu Sufyaan, and whose mother
is from the tribe of Kalb, will come from Damascus. This implies that
the corroborators helping the U.S. in Iraq are descendants of people
from the greater Syria region.
This Tyrant will probably be a post-Saddam ruler of Iraq who will
be installed by the foreign-occupation forces.
The Tyrant and his forces will move on to Kufa (Iraq) and pillage
it, killing the descendants of the Prophet and attacking to the point
where they will kill children and rip open women. There will then be
a great battle, killing 100,000 in the city of Az-Zawra (Baghdad), located
between the Tigris and the Euphrates. Basra will be ruined. In retali-
ation, the tribe of Qays will rise up against the Tyrant, but they will be
defeated by him, and he will slaughter them in Kurkisa.
Kurkisa is present-day Kirkuk in Iraq, and the Qays is an Iraqi tribe
living in the Kirkuk region.
The people of Iraq will then be divided into three parts. One part
will join the Tyrant’s army. These will be the most wicked people God
created. Another group will wage war against them, and these people
are the honorable servants of God. Another part will join the pillagers
(those who fight and kill), and they are sinners, while the innocent
people in Iraq will seek shelter in Syria. The Mahdi will come while
this is occurring, and he will restore what had been stolen from the
people of Iraq, and the country will be rebuilt.
As predicted, Iraq has been divided into three parts by the occu-
pation forces — Shia, Sunni and Kurd and made to fight each other as
part of a policy of divide and rule.
Also, as was prophesied, the American invasion of Iraq has led to
over a million Iraqis to seek refuge in Jordan and Syria. There are also
Interpretation of Events 145

hundreds of thousands in other countries, and they continue to flee
in large numbers.
The flow of the Euphrates River would be stopped, revealing a
treasure of gold (possibly oil), and when the people will hear of it,
they will flock towards it, but the people who would possess that
treasure would say: “If we allow these persons to take from it, they
would take away the whole of it.” So, they will fight, and 99 out of
100 of them will die in the process. The aftermath of the Euphrates’
War would give rise to anarchy. The disbelievers would be united
under one leader against the Muslims, while the Muslims would be
completely divided.
A man from the descendants of the Messenger of God will come
under three banners with 12-15,000 men who are willing to fight to
their deaths. Then, there will appear another group with seven banners,
underneath each of which will be a man seeking the kingdom. There
will be a civil war between these groups, and God will kill all of them,
thereby restoring unity and favors upon the hearts of Muslims, and
the rift between Muslims will be healed.
At the same time as the Tyrant will be killing people in Iraq, he
will send his army against the dwellers of Afghanistan, demanding
that some people be handed over to him.
Harith, son of Hirrath, would then emerge from Transoxiana
(Afghanistan), and another man named Mansur would lead his army.
The former (Harith) will be preparing the minds of Muslims to accept
the Mahdi when he comes. Muslims will be asked to listen to his advice.
He will provide protection to the Mahdi like the Quraish provided
protection for the Messenger of God in Medina before the Hijrah.
Mansur, along with his army, will aid him.
The man from Tamim, Shuayb, son of Salih, a dark man of medium
stature, and the bearer of the Mahdi’s flag, will appear at this time and
is variously mentioned as coming from Khurasan or Ar-Ray. Because
Ar-Ray is likely to be Tehran, he could be described as an Arab, or a
descendant of an Arab, who travels from Afghanistan via Iran to Iraq
146 The Future Is for Islam

and then to Medina. Similarly, al-Harith will be part of this group, along
with Mansur, who will be leading the army. Or Shuayb could possibly
be an Iranian leader.
The black flags that come from the east will be carried by mighty
men with long hair and beards who wear black turbans and white
clothes and whose surnames are taken from the names of their
hometowns.
Palestine will also be sanctioned, causing its people to receive
neither any money nor grain because of the Romans, and the Pales-
tinians will be conquered and then be cut off from the Islamic
mainstream (or, as the hadith says, “withhold their currency”).
Muslims are told not to rebuke the people of Syria (Palestine,
Syria, Jordan, Lebanon) because there are Al Abdal among them. The
Al Abdal (servants of God) are a group of eminent saints, said to be
40 in number, known only to God and appointed by Him. It is through
their goodness that the world continues to exist.
A flood of troubles will come upon the people of Syria (Palestine
or Iraq), which will disperse their groups in such a way that if foxes
attacked, they would be beaten.
The people from Syria (probably meaning Israel) will take prisoner
the tribes of Egypt. Egypt will be conquered and will be cut off from
the Muslim mainstream, and the Muslims will then recoil to the posi-
tion from which they came (i.e., Arabia). Following Iraq’s destruction,
the Nile River will dry up, and Egypt will also be ruined.
Then the Ethiopians will come after the Arabs, and they will be
defeated and thrown into the lowest part of the earth. There is a con-
flict underway in Darfur, Sudan, between the northern Muslim Arabs
and the animist rebels in the south, who are supported by the Ethiopians
and the West. These same Ethopians are also attacking Somalia under
western supervision.
Meanwhile, severe trials and tribulations will befall all the Muslims.
Their rulers will cause them severe trouble in such a way that there
will be no comfort for Muslims anywhere. These cruel rulers will
Interpretation of Events 147

frighten even the silent and submissive ones, in addition to those who
disobey them. There will be no home that strife will not enter, and no
Muslim will remain untouched by it. This will continue until a man of
gnosis and illumination from the household of the Prophet appears
(i.e., the Mahdi).

In terms of the order of the timing of events, we are approx-
imately at this stage as of May 2007. Events that we have
discussed up to now have mostly already occurred, and those
beyond this point are predicted to happen.

ATTACK ON IRAN

The forces of the Tyrant will attack Iran. Shuayb, the son of Salih,
will engage the Tyrant in Shiraz, Iran. Between them, there will be a
tremendously fierce battle, and the black banners of Shuayb with his
4,000 men will win, but the forces of the Tyrant will escape.
This obviously sounds like an attack on Iran that is nowadays (as
of May 2007) being publicly debated in the West, urged on by the rulers
of Israel. This attack is destined to fail in achieving its objectives.
Around that time, the people of Khurasan will cry for the Mahdi
because they need him. There will be an alliance between the black
banners of the Children of Al Abbas from Iraq and the black banners
of the people of Khurasan. The Muslim forces in Iraq and Afghanistan
will link up with each other, and Iran will be the facilitator or a party
to this alliance.
The “Children of Al Abbas” are descendants of Abbas ibn Abd al-
Muttalib, uncle of the Messenger of God and founder of the Abbasid
dynasty of Baghdad. The group with the large black banners will be
Iraqis, and the people with the small black banners will be from
Khurasan, two countries that are currently under U.S. occupation.
148 The Future Is for Islam

This occupation has created resistance movements that will benefit
the most from the appearance of the Mahdi; hence they are likely to
be among the first to support him.
Khurasan is an ancient name for an area that includes northeast-
ern Iran, Afghanistan, and parts of Central Asia. There is a province
nowadays in Iran called “Khorasan” (spelled in this manner) that
borders Afghanistan. So, the prophecies concerning Khurasan are
likely to mean Afghanistan, but may also mean Iran. Whichever it is
is immaterial because the Muslims of the whole region stretching from
northwest Pakistan to Iraq are likely to be involved in the struggle.
If the people of the black flag divide and fail, then the people of
the yellow banner (Egyptians) will attack; they will gather in the
canal of Egypt (Suez Canal), and the people of the East and the West
will fight.

FIGHTING DURING HAJ

Disagreement will occur at the death of a ruler, and three groups will be
fighting over the (possibly Saudi) kingdom before the Mahdi appears.
None of these three will win.
The year in which the Mahdi will emerge, people will perform Haj
together and gather without a leader.
There will be tumult in Shawwal (tenth Islamic month), talk of
war in Dhu al-Qi’dah (eleventh Islamic month), and the outbreak of
war, massacre, and carnage in Dhu al-Hijja (twelfth Islamic month),
as well as the plundering of pilgrims in Dhu al-Hijja, and it will not be
possible to cross a street because of bloodshed. Religious prohibitions
will be violated, and big sins will be committed near the Ka’ba.
There will be battles at Mina, during which many will be slain, and
blood will flow until it runs over the Jamra al-’Aqaba (pillar representing
Satan that the pilgrims stone), and legs will be buried in lakes of blood.
In Muharram (first Islamic month), when an innocent child (or
children) of the community of Muhammad will be killed, those in the
Interpretation of Events 149

heavens and those on earth will be angry, and an angel from the sky
will cry: “God is with him (the Mahdi) and with those who are with him.
Take heed. Such a person is of the auspicious ones of the people of
God. Listen to and obey him.”
Nowadays, the large-scale killing of innocent Muslim children is
an almost daily occurrence in Palestine, Iraq, and Afghanistan and is
considered absolutely justifiable by some countries and is referred to
as “collateral damage.”
Signs of the appearance of the Mahdi include:

1. The Tyrant reaches Iraq and kills the supporters of the family of
Muhammad. The Children of Al Abbas appear with black banners
in Iraq.
2. The Tyrant attacks Afghanistan. Harith appears with Mansur
leading the army.
3. The Tyrant attacks Iran. Shuayb, son of Salih, appears.
4. A comet with a luminous tail will rise from the east.
5. The emergence of a big flare, which is seen in the east, in the
sky for three nights. Sighting of an extraordinary redness, not as
red as the usual color of the dawn, and it is spread over the hori-
zon. This may be the result of oil fields in eastern Saudi Arabia
being ignited.
6. The purified soul, that is one or more innocent children, are killed.
7. Muslims will be experiencing great fear, disturbances, civil war,
and other disasters.
8. Chaos and violence during Haj, with fighting in Mina.

Most the above things have already happened or are in the process
of occurring. As of this writing, the attack on Iran is being talked about,
and when that happens, it would only leave the violence during Haj as
the last sign of the coming of the Mahdi.
During the Haj in 1987, there was a conflict when Iranian pilgrims
held a demonstration in which over 400 people died. But this did not
150 The Future Is for Islam

happen in Mina, and it was not a conflict for control of the country,
so that event is not the one that is predicted.
The messenger of God said regarding the comet that will be a
sign of the coming of the Mahdi: “When this comet first appeared, the
people of Prophet Noah perished, Prophet Abraham was cast into fire,
Pharaoh and his people who fought against Prophet Moses perished,
and John the Baptist passed away.” This could refer to Halley’s Comet
that last appeared in 1986, or to another comet.
We are advised to count two or three decades after the year/decade
of Hijri 1400 before the Mahdi emerges. While there is fighting going
on in Mina during Haj, seven knowledgeable men from Egypt, Syria,
Palestine, and Saudi Arabia will search for the Mahdi.
The Imam Mahdi (the guided one) Muhammad., son of Abdullah
(this will be the Mahdi’s name), the promised deliverer, will be inspired
by God, and preparations will be made for him in one night to carry
out his task successfully. God will assure him of his goal and impor-
tance. He will be tall with a medium complexion, having a broad
forehead and a prominent nose, with a mole on his right cheek. He
will have been born and raised in Medina and will be 40 years old or
less at the time of his appointment. He will be of the family of the
Messenger of God, from the descendants of his daughter Fatima, her
husband Ali, and their sons Hassan and Hussein.
During that night, when the seven men meet, they will ask one
another what brought them to Mecca, and each will say they have come
seeking the Mahdi. Their followers will search for him in Mecca, and
when they find him, they will ask if his name is Muhammad, son of
Abdullah. However, he will be overcome by the implications, and
through sincere humility he will say no, and then leave Mecca for
Medina. The followers will return to their knowledgeable leaders and
describe the man they met, whereupon these leaders will confirm that
the person with whom they spoke was the one they were searching
for. By then, however, the Mahdi will have left for Medina, and so they
will go to Medina to look for him, but he will already have returned
to Mecca.
Interpretation of Events 151

Upon their return to Mecca, they will search for him and will catch
up with him whilst he is standing beside Al Rukn, near the Ka’ba, and
say: “Our sins will be upon you and our blood upon your neck if you
do not stretch out your hand so that we may pledge our allegiance!
The army of the Tyrant is coming demanding us because there is a
wanted person (man from Jurm) amongst us.” So, he will humbly sit
between Al Rukn and Al Makam and receive their allegiance, even
though he will dislike the idea of being put in this situation.
There is an area around Mecca that is called Umm al Jurm, where
the Jurm tribe lived. Jurm could also refer to Jurm District in Bad-
akhshan Province, Afghanistan, where people from the Jurm tribe
could have settled. The people who forcibly pledge allegiance to the
Mahdi may be the “Afghans,” as those Arabs who fought in Afghanistan
are called.
At this time, God will sow love of the Mahdi in their chests, and
he will lead a nation, the people of which are like lions during the day,
but worshippers at night. They will lead him by the hand towards the
Hajare Aswad (the Black Stone attached to the Ka’ba), where people
will then formally pledge their allegiance to him as the Caliph. This
pledge will take place in front of The Holy Ka’ba, between the Black
Stone and the Maqaame Ibraheem (Station of Abraham, adjacent to
the Ka’ba), during or just after the days of Haj.
Initially, the number of people to pledge allegiance to the Mahdi
that night will be 313, which is the number of the companions of the
Messenger who took part in the Battle of Badr. This will all take place
in the month of Dhu al-Hijjah, the month of Haj (or the next month
in Muharram).

YEAR ONE OF THE MAHDI

The Mahdi will then emerge as the new Caliph of the Muslim commu-
nity in the following year. Shuayb, son of Salih, Harith, and Mansur
will learn of the coming of the Mahdi and will march to join him from
Talakaan, Afghanistan, or from Iran under three black banners, under
152 The Future Is for Islam

which will be 4,000 warriors ready to pledge their allegiance to the
Mahdi. This will be the army of the Mahdi. Their clothes will be white
and their turbans will be black. Every land they pass over, they will
conquer, establishing Islam. Muslims from Kufa, Iraq, Yemen, and
Tunisia will also march to join him.
When the Tyrant in Iraq hears of the Mahdi, he will immediately
dispatch an army towards Medina to kill him, and they will pillage
Medina for three days. A great battle will be fought at Ahjar Al Zayt —
The Stone of Oil — between the army of the Tyrant and the Muslims
of Medina, in which the people of Medina will suffer and those who
escape will flee to Mecca, amongst whom will be the Mahdi. Several
men from the Quraish will escape to Istanbul in Turkey, and the Tyrant
will send an extradition request to the leader of the Romans, who will
return them to the Tyrant, and he will slit their throats, as well as the
throats of their followers.
Afterwards, the army of the Tyrant will march towards Mecca,
where the Mahdi will be. This army will be destroyed by an enormous
earthquake at Baidaa, a place on the way from Medina to Mecca, and
will then be swallowed up by the ground. First, the rear of the army will
be devastated, and when those in front go back to see what has
happened, they, too, will meet the same fate. All but two members of
this army will perish, and these sole survivors will take back the news
of this disaster to the Tyrant.
Up until that time, Muslims around the world would have been
skeptical about the news of the Mahdi. The sinking of the army in the
desert will be the signal that the Mahdi is really here, and Muslims
from everywhere will rush to support him.
When the story of divine help being granted to the Mahdi spreads
throughout the Muslim world, over 300 of the Al Abdal (pious people)
of Syria will come to pledge allegiance to the Mahdi and join his ranks.
Similarly, other Muslims from Syria, Egypt, and the east (maybe Iran,
Afghanistan, and Pakistan) and elsewhere will also come to Mecca and
offer their support and allegiance to the Mahdi. The Imam will then
Interpretation of Events 153

leave Mecca for Medina, where he will offer respects at the grave of
the Messenger of God. Then the Mahdi will come out with the Banner
of the Prophet made from a marked woolen black square that will not
have been unfolded since the Messenger, and it will not be unfolded
until the Mahdi comes. Shuayb, son of Salih, will become the bearer
of the banner. The Mahdi will say his prayer and when he finishes, he
will go out and say: “O people, continuous trials came to the nation of
Muhammad, especially to the family of his House, and we have been
conquered and wronged.”
The supporters of the Mahdi will then seize control of Arabia
instead of the three claimants who were fighting over it. When this
happens, an unprecedented amount of bloodshed will occur. Muslims
are advised to support the army from Khurasan, as this is the army
of the Mahdi, and no one will be able to stop them until they have
captured Jerusalem.

Here, let us step aside from the narrative and discuss an issue
that is critical towards understanding the sayings of the
Messenger of God and to put them in the correct context.
When the Messenger of God mentions “The Great War” (Al-
Malhamah Al-Kubrah), is he talking about what is referred to
as Armageddon or is he talking about the Battle of Kalb? Or
are they all the same? There are clearly two distinct battles, as
the Battle of Kalb happens soon after the Mahdi appears and
another final conflict takes place near the end of his Caliphate,
when Jesus kills the Antichrist and destroys his army.
In all the sayings of the Messenger of God, the bigger war
by far appears to be the Battle of Kalb, for which the Muslims
gather in Damascus and the Romans gather troops from all
over the world, including the tribe of Kalb from Iraq under
the Tyrant. This battle is fierce and devastating for both sides,
with the Muslims eventually prevailing.
154 The Future Is for Islam

By contrast, the showdown with the Antichrist is com-
paratively a walkover, as Jesus pursues the fleeing Antichrist
all the way from Damascus to near Tel Aviv, where he slays
him. The Antichrist is depicted as melting away or losing his
power on the appearance of Jesus. His army is then hunted
down and totally annihilated.
In Christian prophecy, Armageddon is the war during
which the whole world gathers to destroy the believers. In
Muslim prophecy, a very similar battle is referred to as the
Great War or the Battle of Kalb. Therefore, it is most likely that
The Great War, the Battle of Kalb, and Armageddon refer to
the same event and that this happens before the Antichrist
and Jesus appear. The believers are, of course, the Muslims,
not their opponents.
Another viewpoint is that “The Great War” is a term for
the Third World War that starts with the invasion of Iraq and
ends with the killing of the Antichrist. The Battle of Kalb is
one battle of many during this war, and what is referred to as
Armageddon is either the Battle of Kalb or another battle,
perhaps the final one, during which the Antichrist is killed.
Since Armagaddon refers to an exact location in present-
day Israel (Har Megiddo), and since this location is on the
road from Damascus to Tel Aviv, a route along which Jesus
will be chasing the Antichrist, it is quite likely that Armagaddon
may be the battle between Jesus and the Antichrist. Therefore,
it will not be the biggest battle, but the final one.
By whatever name we refer to individual battles, what is
clear is that World War Three or the Great War (Al-Malhamah
Al-Kubrah) is now well and truly underway and will not end
until the total victory of Islam.
According to Islamic prophecies, there will be two great
battles that the Mahdi will fight. One will be with the Romans
and their allies who attack the Mahdi, and the second is the
Interpretation of Events 155

one against the Antichrist, during which Jesus will appear.
During both these battles, the base of operations for the
Muslims will be Damascus in Syria.
The following saying of the Messenger of God should
clear a point regarding the sequence of events:

• Narrated Abdullah, son of Busr: The Prophet said: “The
time between the Great War and the conquest of the city
will be six years, and the Antichrist (False Messiah) will
come forth in the seventh.” (Sunan Abu Dawud: Book 37,
Number 4283)

The sequence of events is:

1) The Great War;
2) Conquest of Constantinople six years later;
3) The Antichrist appears the year after.

Consequently, the Great War happens before the Antichrist
or Jesus appear and is therefore not the final battle during
which the Antichrist is destroyed. Israel will continue to exist
until the final battle and will only be wrapped up after Jesus
has killed the Antichrist and his supporters, the Israeli army.

Soon after the Mahdi appears and Muslims gather to support him,
and they’ve taken control of Arabia, the Mahdi and the forces with him
will march from Medina towards Damascus in Syria with the archangels
Gabriel, at his front, and Michael, at his middle. In other words, they
will have the support of God in their mission.
The Romans will muster strength against the Muslims. The Roman
coalition will consist of Christians and Jews and all anti-Islamic nations
of the world who will come to fight by land, sea, and air. The exceptions
156 The Future Is for Islam

will be countries with climates of extreme cold and extreme heat. This
will be very much like Gulf War I, when the Americans gathered the
whole world to fight against Iraq. The difference between the two is
that God did not support a secular Iraq at that time, whereas now, He
will be supporting the Muslims.
The Muslim army consisting of the best soldiers of the people on
earth at that time will gather in Damascus to oppose the Romans.
Muslim troops will also be gathered in Iraq and Yemen. The Messenger
of God advised Muslims to go to Syria at that time as it is God’s cho-
sen land, to which His best servants will be gathered, armed with the
best weapons.
The Mahdi will see the whole world plot against him, but he will
see that God’s plan is stronger than all, and he will see that the world
belongs to God and to Him it will return, and that the world is but a tree
that God wills him to rule from its roots to its branches.
It is predicted by the Messenger of God that all Muslims in the land
of the Romans will be killed, or that hardships will befall them. It may
be around this time in the narrative that this would happen. This means
that Muslims in America and Europe will be severely persecuted, so
Muslims would be better off leaving before things get really bad. Perse-
cution of Muslims is already happening and will only get worse once
the serious battles get underway in the Middle East. Muslims living in
those countries that have the most anti-Muslim sentiments should
make plans to move to safe locations. The lesson of recent European
history is that once an ethnic group is vilified, then concentration
camps and large-scale massacres are not far behind. In America, the
Japanese were transferred to concentration camps during the Second
World War, and after the events of 9/11, there was open talk of doing
the same to Muslims. There are rumors of very large concentration
camps being built in America.
The Romans will surround the Mahdi and his followers and say:
“Do not stand between us and those Muslims who took prisoners from
among us. Let us fight them.” The Muslims will say: “No, by God, we
Interpretation of Events 157

shall never hand you our brethren so that you may fight them.” In other
words, they will refuse to hand over fellow Muslims to be transferred to
Guantanamo Bay, unlike what the present-day rulers have been doing.
Thus, the battle will begin near Aleppo in Syria. The Muslims will
prepare a detachment for fighting to the death, which will vow not to
return unless victorious. They will fight until darkness intervenes. Both
sides will return without being victorious, and one third of the Muslims
will be killed. They will fight again on the second day, and again one
third or thereabouts of the Muslims will be killed. On the third day,
they will fight again, and there will still be no result. On the fourth day,
a new detachment from the remnant of the Muslims will be prepared
and God will decree that the enemy will be routed. They will fight a
fight the like of which has not been seen, so fierce that even if a bird
were to pass their flanks, it would fall down dead before reaching the
other end. The Roman forces will be decimated and the Muslims will
be victorious, but there will be little joy because so many will have
fallen in battle.
The Muslim fighters under the Mahdi will capture the Tyrant and
execute him under a tree, the branches of which grow in the direction
of Lake Tiberias. The tribe of Kalb will suffer the same fate. Syria
(maybe Palestine) and Iraq will thus be liberated from the tyrannical
rule of the Tyrant.
It is possible that the Muslims will capture all or part of Jerusalem
during this battle, as it is predicted that Jerusalem will be captured
some time during the Great War. The city of Medina will be in great
danger, as it has been prophesied that it will be damaged or destroyed
during the Great War after Jerusalem comes into the hands of Muslims.
It is possible that the enemies of Islam will attack Medina with weapons
of mass destruction, possibly nuclear. Whatever happens to Medina, it
will be rebuilt, as the later prophecies talk of Jesus being buried besides
the grave of the Prophet, so at least that area would survive intact.
During the battle, one-third of the Muslim army will run away,
whom God will never forgive. Another third of the army will fall in
158 The Future Is for Islam

battle and consist of excellent martyrs in God’s eyes. The remaining
third, who will never be put on trial on the Day of Judgment, will win,
and they will go on to conquer Istanbul and liberate Turkey.
Following this battle, an agreement will be made between the
Mahdi and the Romans, which will be signed in Jerusalem and medi-
ated by an Israelite descending from the prophet Aaron. This specific
agreement will be upheld for seven years until the appearance of the
Antichrist. As part of this agreement, the Muslims will gain access to
at least part of Jerusalem, where the Mahdi will travel to, if they will
not have captured it earlier.
It would be interesting at this point to speculate about what
happens to the “Romans” over the next few years of the narrative.
During the time of the Messenger of God, the Christians that he
interacted with belonged to the entity that was known as the Byzantine
Empire, with Byzantium (Constantinople) as its capital. This is also
referred to as the Eastern Roman Empire and had split off from the
Western Empire that had the city of Rome as its capital. So, the Mes-
senger of God referred to the Byzantine Christians as Romans, and
this description would have applied to any European Christian. When
he mentioned Rome, he would have been referring to Constantinople
or present-day Istanbul in Turkey, and not to Rome in Italy.
This issue has been a cause of some confusion among many
Muslims, as according to their interpretation of the prophecies, Rome
in Italy would be conquered. But this is most likely a misreading,
and in reality, Muslims will be defending and liberating their own
lands and will not be attacking or occupying any place else. There
are no sayings of the Messenger of God that support the contention
that any place in Europe other than Istanbul will be conquered, and
Istanbul is an Islamic city that happes to be controlled by forces
hostile to Islam.
The modern-day descendants of the Romans are the Europeans
and Americans. In the context of the prophecies as they apply to pres-
ent times, the Romans are most likely to be the Americans and their
Interpretation of Events 159

allies, who are deeply involved in the struggle against Islam and are
the main supporters of Israel.
After the Battle of Kalb, there is no more mention of the Romans
in the sayings of the Messenger of God, although there is a lot of men-
tion of them before this battle. After the peace treaty is signed between
the Mahdi and the Romans, they cease to be in any way involved in any
further conflict with the Muslims until the end of the world. Maybe
they will keep up their support of Israel, but are unlikely to continue
fighting on its behalf as they’re doing now.
There could be many reasons for the Romans (America and
Europe) no longer being mentioned:

• It may be that all the sayings of the Messenger of God in which
he mentioned Roman involvement in subsequent events have
been lost.
• The Mahdi will bring out the original Torah and convince many
of the Romans of the truth of Islam, so they will lose their
hostility towards Islam.
• Jesus will appear to destroy the Antichrist, and Jesus will be on
the side of the Muslims. Therefore, the Americans will no longer
fight them.
• The Americans will suffer such devastating losses in the war
that they will lose the will to continue fighting and will become
tired of getting involved in the area.
• They will suffer economic and natural calamities in their lands,
rendering them incapable of undertaking any more adventures
in the Middle East.

The truth is likely to be a combination of all of the above, and the
end result will probably be that America and its allies will abandon
the Middle East and leave Israel to its fate to deal with the conse-
quences of its actions. America will cease to be a major player in the
Middle East.
160 The Future Is for Islam

YEARS TWO TO FIVE OF THE MAHDI

The Mahdi is expected to stay for seven to nine years. If it is seven
years that he will stay, then the events discussed here will happen at
a quicker pace; otherwise they will follow the timetable we predict.
The Mahdi will become the supreme leader and reformer of the
Muslim Ummah (community), filling the earth with equity and jus-
tice, just as it had been filled with tyranny, oppression, and injustice.
He and his companions will liberate Syria, Egypt, Lebanon, Jordan,
and Iraq, possibly along with the rest of the Muslim world, from their
respective tyrants.
The Mahdi will then distribute wealth without count until he sends
a messenger saying: “Who is in need of wealth?” None except one
man will stand and say, “me.” So he will say: “Go to the treasurer and
tell him that the Mahdi orders you to give me wealth.” So the treasurer
will say to him: “Fill with your hands!” And he will put it in his clothing,
then tie it. Then he will become contrite and say: “I was the greediest
among the nation of Muhammad,” and he will attempt to return it, but
it will not be accepted, and it will be said to him: “We do not accept
what we have given.”
Upon releasing Syria (Palestine) and Iraq from the oppressive
rule of the Tyrant, the Imam will then send his forces to Antioch to
rest. Syria will then be reconstructed, and Iraq will be reconstructed.
This will all happen within the beginning to the middle of the Mahdi’s
second year as the Caliph, and his capital will be in Medina.
The caliphate encompassing most, if not all, the Muslim countries
will be established. There will be massive economic and technological
development, and the Islamic world will again become one of the
major civilizations of the world after a lapse of several hundred years.
The Mahdi will go to Jerusalem and will guide the people to the
location in Antioch, where the Ark of the Covenant has lain hidden for
over 2,500 years. The Ark of the Covenant will be brought forth at Lake
Tiberias and will be carried and placed before the Mahdi in Jerusalem.
Interpretation of Events 161

Its contents will include the Torah, Staff of Moses, Stone Tablets with
the Ten Commandments, and the Table of Solomon. The Mahdi will
hold a debate with the Jews based on this original copy of the Torah,
and many of them will become Muslims, and they will pledge allegiance
to the Mahdi in Jerusalem.
The remaining Jews will later become followers of the Anti-
christ when he appears. Under the Mahdi, the city of Jerusalem will
flourish, and the Temple Mount (Bayt al-Maqdis/Masjid al-Aqsa) will be
repaired and rebuilt. The rebuilding of the mosque on the Temple Mount
implies that it will have been damaged or destroyed during the
Great War.

YEAR SIX OF THE MAHDI

In the sixth year of the Mahdi, he will dispatch 70,000 soldiers of the
clan of the Bani Israel (new converts or Muslim descendants of Jews)
to re-conquer Istanbul, liberating it from Roman rule. They will enter
Turkey, and Istanbul will fall without a fight. The Muezzins of the
Muslims will then establish the five-times-daily calls to prayer through-
out the city. The Mahdi will also arrive at Istanbul and set up the
structure for his rule, appoint people to govern there, and, most impor-
tantly, make arrangements for the implementation of Islamic law. This
liberation will deliver untold fortunes into the hands of the Muslims.
As the Madhi and his men are busy celebrating the liberation of
Istanbul, a rumor will spread that “the Antichrist has broken loose in
Syria (Israel) and is wreaking havoc among your families.” This news
will be very disturbing to the Imam, and consequently, he will hurriedly
leave for Syria. In the meantime, 10 scouting parties will be sent ahead
to ascertain the truth. One of them will report that the story is false.
The Antichrist has not yet emerged. This was a lie fabricated by Satan
to try and disrupt the progress of the Muslims. The Mahdi will resume
his return journey to Syria with greater ease and comfort once he
learns that the Antichrist is not yet loose. He will stop over in all the
162 The Future Is for Islam

towns and cities along the route to survey the situation and make
the necessary arrangements for government.
Around this same time, a group of Muslims will be involved in a
war with either India or Pakistan, which they will conquer, and liber-
ate the Muslims from the oppressive rulers. The ending of this war is
predicted to coincide with the arrival of Jesus.

YEAR SEVEN OF THE MAHDI

Seven years after the war with the Romans will have begun in Syria,
in the seventh year of the Mahdi, after he returns to Damascus, the
great imposter, the Masih-ad-Dajjal (False Messiah/Prophet, “Anti-
christ”), will now truly emerge from the east and begin his campaign
of mischief and corruption between Syria and Iraq (probably Israel).
He will remain to do his mischief for forty days, one day like a year,
one like a month, one like a week, and the rest like regular days, so
these days will, in fact, cover the length of 428 normal days. The Dajjal
will have a large following of mainly Iranian Jews, Bedouins, and ille-
gitimate people (those born outside of marriage). He will be a young
man, short and stocky, with twisted, cropped hair and a bulging (maybe
glass) eye. He will appear to be driven by a fit of rage.
The same interests that promote the New World Order and who
would be witnessing their dreams of world domination being ruined
by the Mahdi will likely bring the Antichrist forth. It is also likely that
they will try to depict the Mahdi as the Antichrist or the False Prophet
of Judeo-Christian prophecies, while the real Antichrist will be pre-
sented as the Jewish Messiah. It is very easy to imagine the Western
media depicting the Mahdi as a terrorist and the Antichrist as the great
savior. In fact, many websites run by the pro-war elements in America
are already claiming this.
Later, in order to bring the Christians on side, the Antichrist may
be elevated to the status of being either Jesus Christ himself or a
god. He will start by saying that he is a prophet, and then he will say,
Interpretation of Events 163

“I am your Lord.” Not only will he claim to be the Messiah of the Jews,
but maybe also that of the Christians. Since the Christians worship
Jesus, therefore the Antichrist would expect to be worshipped. To
back up his claims, he will perform miracles, either by technological
or supernatural means. The Antichrist will know about his own reality
as an imposter, but will be putting on a show on behalf of the people
behind the scenes that will be his sponsors. He will be an actor putting
on a big-budget media extravaganza backed up by some very good
special effects.
The special effects team that gave us the 9/11 spectacular will
also bring us the Antichrist Superstar show. The evangelical Christian
crowds in America are likely to be ecstatic supporters of the Antichrist.
As the Messenger of God said, most of the followers of the Anti-
christ will be Jews, at least his army will be, and therefore the strategy
of bringing in outside powers may not entirely work, leaving the Israelis
alone to fight on behalf of the Antichrist. To cut off the Antichrist and
his followers from the mainstream Christian world and to neutralize
and destroy him, God will send the real Jesus.
The Antichrist will build up his power insidiously, rather than with
a dramatic appearance. His power and arrogance will rise in stages as
he builds himself up from a prophet to a god.
According to the Messenger of God, no tribulation on earth since
the creation of Adam will be worse than the tribulation of the Antichrist.
Every prophet since Noah has warned his people about him. He will
be a test by God to see if they believe in Him or in the Antichrist.
He will go everywhere except Mecca and Medina, which have
been forbidden to him by God. Medina will be shaken by three tremors,
after which every person of weak faith will leave, and it will be cleansed
of evil, as iron is cleansed of dross. That day will be called Yawm
al-Khalas (“The Day of Purification”).
His influence will enter into Muslim homes and especially affect
the women who are disbelievers or weak of faith to the point that
people will have to tie up their women to stop them from following
164 The Future Is for Islam

the Antichrist. However, the vast majority of Muslims will be able to
recognize him for what he is and will not be fooled by him.
Like a cloud driven by the wind, he will come to the people and
invite them to a wrong religion; they will affirm their faith in him and
respond to him. He will be riding a white airplane with a wingspan of
60 feet. God will send with him devils (jinns) that will speak to the
people. This means that he will have supernatural powers.
He will bring a great tribulation and will spread disaster right and
left. For those who support him, he will give a command to the sky,
and there will be rainfall upon the earth and it will grow crops.
He will then come to another people and invite them. But they will
reject him, so he will go away from them; they will have a drought and
nothing will be left with them in the form of wealth.
He will then walk through the desert and say to it: “Bring forth
your treasures.” The treasures will come out and gather before him like
a swarm of bees. He will say to the people: “I am a Prophet.” Then he
will give praise and say, “I am your Lord.” In reality, he would be neither
because the Messenger of God said, “I am the last prophet and no one
will see the Lord till they die.”
The Antichrist will be given power over a person whom he will
kill and cut into two with a saw. Then he will say, “Look at this slave
of mine; now I will resurrect him, but he will still claim that he has a
Lord other than me.” After this, the Antichrist will step between the
two parts of his body and address them saying, “Rise up!” whereupon
the man will become whole and stand up and the Antichrist will say
to him, “Who is your Lord?” The man will answer, “My Lord is God,
and you are the enemy of God. You are the Antichrist. By God, I have
never been surer of this than I am today.” The Antichrist will then try
to throttle him, but will be unable to do so, so he will fling him to his
death, and this man will be one of the greatest martyrs in rank before
the Lord of the Worlds. After that, the Antichrist will no longer have
the power to kill and bring people back to life. Meanwhile, the people
will say, “Can anybody do something like this except the Lord?”
Interpretation of Events 165

The Muslims, along with the Mahdi, will flee from Jerusalem to
Damascus in Syria, and the Antichrist with his followers will come
and besiege them. The siege will intensify, and they will suffer great
hardship.

RETURN OF JESUS

The Muslims will make preparations to fight the Antichrist and his
army in Damascus under the Mahdi. After the 40th day of the Antichrist
(near the end of his term), at the end of the eighth year of the Mahdi,
exactly at the time when the Mahdi will have stepped forward to lead
them in the morning prayer, the Messiah (Anointed One), Jesus, son
of Mary, shall descend upon them near the white minaret in the eastern
part of Damascus, Syria.
The location of Jesus’ expected appearance is the Umayyad Mosque
in Damascus, an impressive structure with three minarets (towers),
one of which is called the Minaret of Jesus, so named because this is
where Jesus is expected to appear.
He will be of medium height, ruddy-fair/brown complexion with
straight hair (not curly or wavy) and a broad chest, wearing two yellow
garments dyed with saffron, with his hands leaning on the arms of two
angels. The hair of his head will appear as though water was going to
trickle down from it, whereas it will not be wet. He will descend on a
group that will be righteous at the time and be comprised of 800 men
and 400 women.
He will call the people at dawn: “O people, what prevented you
from coming out to fight this evil liar?” They will say about Jesus, “He
is a jinn.” Then they will go out, and find Jesus, son of Mary. Upon his
reaching the congregation of the Muslims who are about to begin the
morning prayer, the Imam Mahdi will step back, so that Jesus may
step forward to lead the Prayer, but Jesus, placing his hand between
his two shoulders, will say, “No, you should lead, for the congregation
has assembled to follow you.”
166 The Future Is for Islam

DEATH OF THE ANTICHRIST

So, the Imam Mahdi will lead the Prayer. After the salutation, Jesus will
say, “Open the gate”; so the gate will be opened. Outside, there will be
the Antichrist along with 70,000 of the armed Jews (Israeli army). He will
indicate with his hand to move away between him and the Antichrist.
The Antichrist will then see Jesus. The Muslims will then come down
from the mountains and break loose on the army of Antichrist, and an
intense battle will erupt.
During the battle, any disbeliever whom the air of Jesus’ breath
reaches — and it will reach up to the last limit of his sight — will fall
dead. As the Antichrist will look at Jesus, he will start melting like the
salt in water, and will flee. Jesus will pursue the Antichrist. He will have
two flexible swords and one shield with him. Jesus will overtake the
Antichrist at the eastern gate of Lod, near Tel Aviv airport, and then
say to him, “I shall strike you a blow which will not let you live,” and
will then kill him. That day will be known as the “Day of Salvation.”
Thus God would cause the Antichrist and his followers to be defeated
and killed. The Israeli soldiers fighting for the Antichrist will have no
place to hide, and they will be hunted down and annihilated.
Jesus will go and show the blood of the Antichrist on his sword
to the Muslims. Then people whom God had protected will come to
Jesus, son of Mary, and he will wipe their faces and inform them of
their ranks in Paradise. Following this, Jesus will “break the cross”
and “kill the swine,” calling everyone back to Islam.
The implication of “breaking the cross” and “killing the swine” is
that Christianity will become defunct as a religion. The whole edifice
of the Christian religion is based on the belief that God crucified His
only son on the cross and caused him to suffer this “accursed” death,
so that he might thus expiate for the sins of man.
However, when Jesus proclaims, “I am not the Son of God; I did
not die on the cross, nor did I expiate for the sins of anyone,” the whole
basis of Christian belief will be demolished.
Interpretation of Events 167

All the prophets have declared the swine unlawful, but the
Christians have made it lawful. The consumption of pork was allowed
hundreds of years after Jesus in order to make Christianity more palat-
able to the pagan Romans, and no one can claim that Jesus permitted
it. This distinctive characteristic of Christianity will vanish when Jesus
will say: “I never declared the swine lawful for my followers, nor did
I proclaim them free from the restraints of Divine Law.”

WHAT HAPPENED TO JESUS?

According to the Gospel of Barnabas, Jesus knew that Judas
was going to betray him. On the day this was going to take
place, Jesus and the apostles were at a remote cottage belong-
ing to Nicodemus, the scribe. At night, Judas left them to
report Jesus’ whereabouts to the high priest, while Jesus was
outside praying.
When Judas returned with the soldiers, Jesus ran inside,
where the eleven other apostles were sleeping. Then Jesus
exited through the rear window and was taken away by
angles.
Then Judas entered the room and was immediately
transformed to look like Jesus. He started to wake up the
others to ask where Jesus was and they said: “Thou, Lord,
art our master; hast thou now forgotten us?” Just then, the
soldiers entered the room and caught hold of Judas and
arrested him.
After that, everything that is supposed to have happened
to Jesus actually happed to Judas, and even his mother Mary
thought that it was Jesus.
Some followers of Jesus later stole the body of Judas
from the grave and hid it. This gave rise to the idea of the
resurrection of Jesus.
168 The Future Is for Islam

A few days later, Jesus came back to see his mother and
his followers to confirm to them that it really was not him on
the cross. Then he left again in plain sight of his companions,
accompanied by angels and with the promise that he would
return near the end of time.
This information is in conformity with the Qur’an,
which states that Jesus did not die although it appeared so.

While Jesus is on earth, every harmful animal will be made harm-
less, so that a small boy will be able to put his hand into a snake’s
mouth without being harmed, a small girl will be able to make a lion
run away from her, and a wolf will go among sheep as if he were a
sheepdog. The earth will be filled with peace as a vessel is filled with
water. People will be in complete agreement, and only God will be
worshipped. A congregation will be held for Jesus for prayer; and he
will distribute so much wealth that people will be satiated with it; and
he will abolish the jizyah tax, and bring an end to all war.
The Messenger of God said: “The earth will be like a silver basin,
and will produce fruit so abundantly that a group of people will gather
to eat a bunch of grapes or one pomegranate and will be satisfied. A
bull will be worth so much money, but a horse will be worth only a few
dirhams.” Someone asked, “O Messenger of God, why will a horse be
so cheap?” He said, “Because it will never be ridden in war.” He was
asked, “Why will the bull be so expensive?” He said, “Because it will
plough the earth.” This implies that all weapons will become worthless
because they will no longer be needed, while the means of production
will increase in value.
People will then return to their respective countries, while one
group of Muslims will remain in the service and companionship
of Jesus.
At this same time, a group of Muslims will be returning from their
conquest of India (or Pakistan), with its kings chained, and find Jesus
Interpretation of Events 169

in Syria. Jesus will then travel to Mecca, and perform Haj (pilgrimage)
or Umrah or both.

DEATH OF THE MAHDI

A few months will elapse and the great Imam, the Mahdi, will pass away
in Jerusalem (Bayt al-Maqdis/Masjid al-Aqsa) at the age of between 47
and 49. The Muslims will perform his funeral prayers, which Jesus the
Messiah leads, and then they will bury him there. The Messiah, son
of Mary, will then become the Caliph of the Muslims, and thus the
Caliphate authority will be taken away from the Quraish. He will rule
in accordance with, and judge people by, the law of the Qur’an and the
Sunnah (traditions of the Messenger of God). Then, for seven years,
the people will live in such a state that no ill will and enmity will exist
between any two of them.

APPEARANCE OF GOG AND MAGOG

Then God will reveal to Jesus these words: “I have brought forth from
among My servants such people against whom none will be able to
fight; take these people safely to Mount Sinai,” and then God will send
Gog and Magog, and they will swarm down from every slope. The first
of them will pass Lake Tiberias and drink out of it. And when the last
of them passes, he will say: “There was once water there.” They will
drink all the water, and the people will entrench themselves in their
fortresses. Gog and Magog will fire their arrows into the sky, and they
will fall back to earth with something like blood on them. Gog and
Magog will say, “We have defeated the people of earth, and overcome
the people of heaven.” They will rush out in all directions, spreading
corruption, uprooting plants, and killing people.
The Haj at Mecca will continue during the time of Gog and Magog;
therefore, at least Mecca will be safe, and life in many places will go
on as usual, while Gog and Magog are rampaging in the Holy Land.
170 The Future Is for Islam

It is possible that God would set Gog and Magog loose as punish-
ment for those people who had been supporters of the Antichrist but
may have been forgiven by Jesus and allowed to remain in the Holy
Land. The reason for this thought is that the Qur’an says that when
the Gog and Magos are let loose, then the unbelievers will “stare in
horror” and be sorry for their lack of belief. It does not say that the
Muslims will “stare in horror.” It is likely that the remnants of the sup-
porters of the Antichrist will be wiped out by the Gog and Magog.
Jesus and his companions will then be besieged at Mount Sinai,
and they will be so hard pressed that the head of the ox will be dearer
to them than 100 dinars. God’s Apostle, Jesus, and his companions will
supplicate to God, Who will send to the armies of Gog and Magog
insects or worms, which will attack their necks, and in the morning
they will perish as one single person. Jesus and his companions will
then come down from the mountains, and they will not find on earth
as much space as a single span that is not filled with putrefaction and
stench. God’s Apostle Jesus and his companions will then beseech
God, who will send birds whose necks would be like those of Bactrian
camels, and they will carry the corpses away and throw them where
God wills. This seems to imply that cargo aircraft will take the bodies
and drop them somewhere, maybe at sea.
It is unclear who the Gog and Magog are. Some say that they are
wild tribes of Central and Northeastern Asia, including the Tartars,
Mongols, and Huns, or maybe even the Chinese. Some say they are
Russians. A wild guess could be that, because the Antichrist is said to
have supernatural beings with him, the Gog and Magog may be extra-
terrestrials or jinns coming to avenge his death. However, jinns do not
have physical bodies. Whatever the truth is, we’ll find out when they
come. What we can say for sure is that whoever it is that invades
Palestine after Jesus has killed the Antichrist will be Gog and Magog.
Obviously, someone will be unhappy about Jesus’ being around, and
Jesus may be the target of Gog and Magog, or they may want to steal
the oil resources of the region for themselves.
Interpretation of Events 171

THE GOLDEN AGE

Then, the people will be burning the weapons of Gog and Magog for
seven years. Large cargo airplanes will be used to remove the dead
bodies of the Gog and Magog and dump them in the ocean. God will
send rain, which no house of mud-bricks or tent of camel hair will keep
out, and it will wash the earth until it resembles a mirror.
Then the earth will be told to bring forth its fruit and restore its
blessing and, as a result thereof, there will grow such big pomegran-
ates that a single one will be sufficient for a group of people and they
would be able to take shelter under its skin; a dairy cow will give so
much milk that a whole party will be able to drink it. The milking-camel
will give such a large quantity of milk that the whole tribe will be able
to drink from it, and the milking-sheep will give so much milk that the
whole family will be able to drink from it.
Another seven years of peace will elapse. After this, Jesus the
Messiah will marry, and have children. Another 19 years of peace will
pass, and then Jesus will pass away after completing his 40-year term
on earth, and the Muslims will perform his funeral prayers and bury
him next to the Messenger of God in Medina.
For this very purpose, during the last 1,400 years, a space has been
reserved for Jesus right next to the grave of the Messenger of God
inside the Masjid Nabvi (the Prophet’s Mosque).

RULE OF THE QAHTAANI

Following the death of Jesus, after many years have passed, the people
of Mecca will leave, and only a few people will go there anymore. The
Caliphs will fail to maintain the religion (possibly coupled with the
discontinuation of the Haj), and consequently a man named Jahjah
from the tribe of Qahtaan in Yemen will seize control of the Caliphate
from them, thus restoring the authority of religion to the Qahtaan tribe
from Yemen (red-skinned people). The city of Mecca will then be
172 The Future Is for Islam

resettled and rebuilt. He will rule the people, driving them with a
stick. His rule as the Caliph of the Muslims will be with great justice
and piety. Eventually, he will pass away, and several more Caliphs will
succeed him.

DECAY OF SOCIETY

Islam will remain dominant for a while, and Muslims will try to main-
tain the situation. However, as years go by, the situation will deteriorate,
and disbelief will start to settle back into the hearts of the people. The
people will leave the city of Mecca again, and never return to it. Islam
will have become worn out like clothes are, until there will be no one
who knows what fasting, prayer, charity, and rituals are and the Haj
pilgrimage will be abandoned. The Qur’an will disappear in one night,
and no verse of the Qur’an will be left in the hearts of the people.
Some groups of old people will be left who will say, “We heard our
fathers saying ‘La illaha illa Allah’ (there is no God but Allah), and so
we repeat it.”
A man named Dhu’l-Suwayqatayn from Abyssinia (Ethiopia) will
emerge at the time of Caliph Muquad, and come against the Ka’ba. He
will climb onto the top of the Ka’ba and tear it down brick by brick,
and there will be no one to stop him.

THE SMOKE AND RISING OF THE SUN FROM THE WEST

A Smoke will appear all over the earth lasting for 40 days, which will
cause the believers to catch something similar to a slight cold, whereas
the unbelievers will be hit harder by it and fall unconscious. Then
there will be a night that is unusually long, and it will cause much rest-
lessness among the people. Travelers will become frustrated, while
children and adults will be overtaken by extreme anxiety, and they
will resort to repentance. Even the animals will become restless. After
a length of three nights, this night will finally come to an end. The
Interpretation of Events 173

following morning, the Sun will rise from west, with its rays being
extremely dull, and then set in the east. When the people see it, they
will all believe in God, but it will do them no good to believe now if they
did not believe before. God will not accept repentance anymore.
It is reported in the sayings of the Prophet that the two events — the
appearance of the smoke and the rising of the sun from the east —
will happen in short consecutive sequence. It is easy to speculate that
the smoke may occur because of a large meteor hitting the earth.
According to scientists, a meteor impact 65 million years ago caused
dust to envelop the whole planet and the sun to be blocked for a period
of time long enough to cause a severe drop in temperature and crops
to fail; this led to the extinction of dinosaurs all over the world. Sim-
ilarly, a meteor strike in the future may cause the whole world to be
enveloped by dust/smoke again and may also disturb the rotation of
the earth and cause it to reverse its direction of spin. If this happened,
then the sun would appear to rise from the west.

APPEARANCE OF THE BEAST

Some time later, at the forenoon, the word will be fulfilled against the
unjust; the Beast will come from the Earth, between Safaa and Marwaa
in Mecca. It will speak to mankind because they had no faith in the
signs of God. It will proceed towards the area between Hajr-ul Aswad
and Maqaam-ul Ibraheem by the Ka’ba. The people, on seeing it, will
flee in all directions, except for one group of people. It will approach
this group and illuminate their faces like shining stars. Thereafter, it
will set out and travel throughout the world at a great speed. It will
mark the foreheads of the believers with “Believer” and will mark the
foreheads of the unbelievers with “Unbeliever.”
The significance of the Beast is that it is mentioned in the Qur’an,
whereas the Antichrist is not. God will send the Beast as some kind of
punishment for the unbelievers; it will speak to them such that they
will regret not believing in God. But, as is mentioned in the hadith, the
174 The Future Is for Islam

Beast is one of those signs after the appearance of which it will do no
good to believe, if someone did not do so before.
The Messenger of God specified an exact location near Mecca for
the emergence of the Beast. Just what kind of creature this will be we
can only speculate.
The appearance of the Beast in Mecca also implies that in the
year that it appears, there will be relatively few true Muslims around.
So it would be fair to assume that this will be a few hundred years
from now.

END OF THE BELIEVERS

God will send a fragrant wind (the “Rapture”) from the direction of
Syria, which will take the souls of everyone who has the slightest speck
of faith in his heart. Even if a believer were to enter the heart of a
mountain, the wind would reach him there and take his soul, leaving
only the disbelievers on the earth.
Thus, the few Muslims who will be scattered all around the world
at that time will be taken away by God once He is convinced that there
is no more chance of the revival of faith in God. The removal of the
last remaining believers will save them from witnessing the horrors
of the destruction of the earth and the whole universe by God.
The logic of the “Rapture” is easy to figure out. Throughout his-
tory, God has destroyed those people who were totally evil, while
saving the good believers. In the past, the punishment was usually
a localized affair; however, in the future, when there are only a few
scattered believers in an overwhelming majority of billions of unbe-
lievers, then any punishment meted out to them will necessarily
entail the destruction of the whole earth. In that case, it would be
more convenient for God to first remove the believers in a more gen-
tle manner by way of a “pleasant musk-scented wind” and then to let
the evildoers experience the full horror of the subsequent destruction
of the earth.
Interpretation of Events 175

THE WORST OF PEOPLE LEFT

Now only the most wicked people will be left; they will be as care-
less as birds, with the characteristics of animals, and will have no
concern for right and wrong. Satan will come to them in the form of
a man and will say, “Don’t you respond?” They will say, “What do you
order us to do?” He will order them to worship idols, and in spite
of that, they will have sustenance in abundance, and continue to lead
comfortable lives.
The people will have reverted to the pre-Islamic days; worshipping
the idols Lat and Uzza, women of the tribe of Daus will be seen once
again going around Dhi al-Khalasa, and people will once again engage
themselves in the worship of multiple gods.
There will be abundant wealth at that time but also wide-
spread killing, corruption, and treachery. There will be commerce,
but people will not trust each other. There will be warfare, during
which once great cities will cease to exist. Earthquakes and other nat-
ural calamities will occur with increasing frequency. Illegal sexual
intercourse will be practiced openly in public. Homosexuality will be
widespread. Cross-dressing will be common. It is predicted that the
number of men would decrease and males would be a tiny fraction of
the population.
These and other signs of the last days seem to be very much like
what is already happening in many places around the world. The dif-
ference at that time compared to today would be that nowadays there
are millions of believers in God, and there is still potential of good
triumphing over evil, whereas at that time, there won’t be a single
believer in God left on earth, and there will be no hope of improvement.
Whatever evil will be happening will be getting worse, not better.
A few decades later, there will be landslides in three places; one
in the east, one in the west, and one in Arabia, at the end of which fire
will burn forth from the Yemen. Then the fire, which could be a super
volcano eruption, will stop.
176 The Future Is for Islam

COMMENCEMENT OF DOOMSDAY

According to the Qur’an, the exact time of doomsday is known only
to God. Even the Prophet didn’t know its exact timing. Therefore, the
years mentioned here for the end of the world are speculative. When
it comes, it will be very sudden, at a time when no one will be expect-
ing it. However, if you believe in God, then you have nothing to worry
about, because doomsday will not happen while there’s even one
believer on earth.
An interesting thought about doomsday is that what we consider
to be the end of the world may not necessarily be the end of the planet
earth and the universe. It may just be the end of the present species
of humans. The reason for this thought is that while the earth is bil-
lions of years old, human civilization as we know it has existed for
only a bit more than 10,000 years; and we may be gone within the next
1,000 years. In that case, the whole term of our existence would rep-
resent a tiny fraction of the time that the earth is capable of supporting
human life. Therefore, it is not unreasonable to assume that God may
have created, or may create, many human, or human-like, civilizations
on this very earth, apart from us.
Indeed, this is an idea supported by some Muslim sects. According
to them, there have been other civilizations before us, and there will
be more after we’re gone. Even some archeological finds lead to the
speculation that advanced civilizations have existed on earth millions
of years ago. However, this idea is not part of mainstream Muslim
belief. However, the Qur’an does state that there are multiple heavens
and multiple earths. If “heaven” means “universes,” then it implies that
there are many universes and many earth-like planets with many
species of beings.
Perhaps God didn’t tell us when doomsday and the the resurrec-
tion would take place because if people were told that the Day of
Resurrection would be 10 billion years from now, they would think that
it’s so far into the future that they needn’t worry about it too much.
Interpretation of Events 177

What they may not appreciate is that the resurrection will appear to
occur no more than a few hours after they die.
Even if our doomsday is a localized affair and the earth survives,
at some point in the future, the whole universe will be destroyed by
God and recreated. In this case, the people who experience the destruc-
tion may not even be our descendants, but an entirely different species
of humans.
So, after 100 years from when the believers’ souls were taken,
130 years after the sun rose from the west, and possibly around 530
to 930 years after the death of Jesus, the Messiah, when no one will
remain on the earth who says “Allah” or worships Him, and about four
to five years after the fire, Doomsday will begin, and it will occur on
a Friday.
Some will be busy plastering the walls, some eating food; in brief,
people will be busy with their chores when the angel Israfil will receive
the command to blow the Soor (Trumpet). Initially, its sound will be
very faint, but gradually it will become louder. All the people will hear
the sound everywhere at the same time, and there will be nowhere to
escape from it. As it grows louder, people will become increasingly
terrified and fearful. They will appear to swoon as if drunk. Soon it
will be louder than thunder, causing a great convulsion, and people
will flee from their homes out into the jungles in the hope of escap-
ing from it, while the animals of the jungle, who will also be terrified
of it, will come into the living areas of the people to escape it. Soon
all the creatures, large and small, will die because of the sound. It will
destroy everything and cause the earth to split all over. The seas will
burst forth, covering the nearby mountains in water, and it will not be
long that the mountains, too, will break up, and the pieces thereof will
crash against each other, totally disintegrating and flying into the air.
As the sound grows louder yet, the skies will split and the heavenly
bodies, the stars, the moon, and the sun will all crumble.
When all of mankind is destroyed, the Angel of Death will now
proceed towards Satan, who will be running helter-skelter, because that
178 The Future Is for Islam

life which he had requested from God will now have finally come to
an end. The Angels will apprehend him and beat him up with fiery rods,
and thus extract his soul. The extent of pain suffered by Satan in his
agonizing moments of death will be the sum total of all the pain that was
suffered by all of mankind during their respective moments of death.
The Soor will be blown for a period of time, after which nothing
will remain, except for eight things: The Arsh (Throne), Kursi (Chair),
Lowh (Tablet/Database), Qalam (Pen), Jannat (Paradise), Jahannam
(Hell), The Soor (Trumpet), and the Souls. The souls will lapse into a
state of unconsciousness. One by one, all of these things, including the
angels, will also be annihilated until they’re all gone. Finally the last
remaining angel — Israfil — too, will die.
Nothing will then exist anymore but the Face of the One and
Only God the Almighty. He will then say: “Limanil Mulkul Yaum” (Whose
is the Kingship today? — where are the oppressors, the arrogant?)
There will be no one to answer Him. He Himself will say: “Lillaahil
Waahidil Qahhaar” (Only [that of] God the One and Only the ever
Dominating One).
One bit of information for scientists to ponder is that the destruc-
tion of the universe and its subsequent resurrection appear very similar
to the Big Bang theory of the universe. According to this theory, the
universe is expanding and will one day collapse back to nothingness
and then (some say) a new Big Bang will occur and a new universe will
emerge out of the resultant singularity.
The sound of the Soor (trumpet) is mentioned as the means of
the destruction of the present universe and the creation of a new one.
Therefore, it is implied here that sound is the basic building block
of everything, including matter. This is something for scientists to
investigate further.

THE RESURRECTION

After a period known to God alone, He will bring Israfil and the
Soor back to life, and the command will be given to blow the Trumpet
Interpretation of Events 179

a second time, through which God will repeat creation and bring
everything back into existence, including the angels and the whole
universe.
After a period of time, that may be billions of years from now, the
earth will be recreated. It will be flat, pink, featureless, plain, and there
will be no trees, mountains, or seas. Then it will rain, and the bodies
of humans will grow in the ground from cells containing their DNA
taken from their spinal columns. Then, in one blast, everyone will come
back to life and rise up from the earth naked and in a state of fright.
People will begin to talk to each other; some will say that they’ve woken
up after sleeping for a day, while others will say that they’ve slept only
for a few hours. The wise among them will guess correctly that they
have slept till the Day of Judgment.
For those who try to figure out when the Day of Resurrection will
be, they should know that, as far as any individual person is con-
cerned, the Day of Resurrection occurs on the day that they die. This
is because when they wake up, after what would seem like a few hours
of sleep, it would be the Day of Judgement. On that day, good people
will be nervous, but will not suffer pain; however, for evil people, it
will be the most horrible experience imaginable.
The beloved of God, Prophet Muhammad (God bless him), will
be the first to come out of his blessed grave, followed by Jesus
(God bless him), and then the Prophets, the martyrs, and the pious,
who will be followed by the believing sinners and finally the
unbelievers.
The Messenger of God will lead all the Muslims to the Plain of
Hashr (The Plain of Judgment), upon which all others will also assem-
ble. The Messenger of God was shown a vision in which he saw that
his followers on that day would be so many that they would fill the
plains as far as the eye could see.
People will be in groups, and the true followers of other prophets
will follow them, and unbelievers will follow their own leaders.
The sun will be low overhead, causing people to drown in their
own sweat according to their sins, and thus the sky would be red like
180 The Future Is for Islam

molten brass, cleft asunder. God will be as plainly visible to the good
people as the sun is to us. God will gather all of creation there for
their reckoning on that day, the length of which is 50,000 years.
CHAPTER 5

Current State of the
Muslim World
In discussing the Islamic World today, one of the contentious issues
has been about how many Muslims there are in the world today. Some
people say that there are over 1 billion, while others say that there are
over 1.2 billion. So, let us start by clarifying this point.
There are 57 member countries of the Organization of Islamic
Conferences (OIC,) with a total population of 1,471 million. If you take
away the non-Muslims from this population, then you’re left with 1,190
million Muslims living in all the OIC member countries.
Then, if you count the number of Muslims living in non-OIC coun-
tries, you will get a number of 315 million, and adding this figure to
1,190, you get a number of 1,505 million, which makes up over 23
percent of the world population. Therefore, there are definitely over
1.5 billion Muslims in the world.
These figures were obtained from the CIA World Factbook web-
site and are supposedly current and, if anything, on the conservative
side. For example, we have counted only 26 million Muslims in China,
even though it is said that there are over 50 million, and we have only
counted 146 million in India, while some report a figure of over 200
million. So, there are potentially 80-100 million that we have not even
included, which if we did, would tip the total to almost 25 percent of
the world population — one person out of every four.

181
182 The Future Is for Islam

OIC member states 57

Muslim majority states 47

Muslims in OIC states (million) 1,190

Muslims in other countries (million) 315

Total number of Muslims (million) 1,505

THE POTENTIAL

The 57 OIC countries in the world have a combined Gross Domestic
Product (GDP) of 5.3 trillion dollars based on purchasing power parity.
That is a very healthy amount by any measure. This compares very
favorably with the figures of the newly emerging powers with similar
billion-plus populations — China with 8.2 trillion and India with 3.7
trillion. On a non-adjusted basis, the GDP of Islamic countries is higher
than China’s at 2.3 trillion compared to 1.8 trillion.
As a hypothetical exercise, if we project that Muslim countries in
the future will invest their resources within the Muslim world and
achieve a growth rate of 7 percent for 30 years, then their GDP will
grow by a factor of 8 to 40 trillion dollars by the year 2036 in today’s
dollars. This is not an impossible achievement, given that China has
sustained a growth rate of 9.5 percent for over 25 years.
In fact, at a 7 percent growth rate, the Islamic world would have a
GDP larger than the United States in 15 years or so, based on purchasing
power parity.
This is not just a fantasy because up to now, wealthy Muslims
have not been investing in their own countries or in other Muslim
countries and have transferred most of their countries’ funds to the
West. If this money had been invested in Muslim countries, then
the whole Islamic world would have been at an advanced stage of
development by now. China is developing at breakneck speed because
Current State of the Muslim World 183

it is getting foreign direct investment (FDI) of about $50-60 billion
per year. By contrast, Muslim countries have transferred over $1,000
billion to the West. If you count the money held abroad by private
individuals, in addition to official sources, then the total could be
double that. Meanwhile, Muslim countries are getting barely any
investment at all.
In the future, if the funds currently held abroad and newly gener-
ated funds are invested in the Muslim world, not only would these
monies be more secure from being confiscated, but they would also
generate far higher profits than the meager returns they get in the
stagnant Western economies. In addition, an economic boom would
occur that would have no precedent and would lift up the whole Islamic
world to the status of a world economic power and make it an engine
of growth benefiting the whole world economy.
The combined landmass in the control of Muslim countries is
over 30 million square kilometers. Russia, which is the world’s largest
country, has 17 million square kilometers, China and the U.S. control
just under 10 million square kilometers each, the European Union has
under 4 million square kilometers, and India about 3 million square
kilometers.
This gives the Muslim world 21.5 percent of the world’s landmass
and all the natural resources that are contained within it.
Oil reserves in Muslim countries are 950 billion barrels out of the
world total of 1,350 billion barrels, or over 70 percent of all the known
oil reserves in the world. This certainly counts as one of the greatest
miracles that have ever occurred in world history. At the very time
when they needed it most, God has given Muslims, wherever they hap-
pen to be, a resource that can enable them to rise out of the difficult
situation they had placed themselves in, and this is a cause of much
ill feeling among those who are hostile towards Islam.
At today’s oil prices of $60 a barrel, these reserves are worth over
56 trillion dollars. If inflation and price escalation are taken into account,
this figure may well be over 100 trillion dollars.
184 The Future Is for Islam

Figure 2. Countries of the Organization of Islamic Conference (OIC)

Country Population Area GDP PPP GDP
(million) (sq km) ($billion) ($billion)

1 Afghanistan 31 647,500 21.5 n/a
2 Albania 3.6 28,748 18 8.5
3 Algeria 33 2,381,740 234 86.4
4 Azerbaijan 8 86,600 37 10.7
5 Bahrain 0.7 665 14 11.3
6 Bangladesh 147 144,000 301 63
7 Benin* 8 112,620 8.7 4.3
8 Brunei 0.4 5,770 6.8 n/a
9 Burkina-Faso 14 274,200 16.8 5.4
10 Cameroon* 17.3 475,440 31.8 15.3
11 Chad 10 1,284,000 17.7 5
12 Comoros 0.7 2,170 0.44 0.4
13 Côte d’Ivoire* 17.6 322,460 26 16
14 Djibouti 0.5 23,000 0.6 n/a
15 Egypt 79 1,001,450 340 92
16 Gabon* 1.4 267,667 8 7.1
17 Gambia 1.64 11,300 3 0.43
18 Guinea 9.7 245,857 20.1 3.7
19 Guinea Bissau* 1.45 36,120 1.1 0.28
20 Guyana* 7.67 214,970 3.8 0.78
21 Indonesia 245 1,919,440 901 270
22 Iran 69 1,648,000 552 178
Current State of the Muslim World 185

Figure 2 (continued)

Country Population Area GDP PPP GDP
(million) (sq km) ($billion) ($billion)

23 Iraq 28 437,072 94 46
24 Jordan 6 92,300 27.8 44.6
25 Kazakhstan 15.2 2,717,300 133 43
26 Kuwait 2.4 17,820 53 56
27 Kyrgyzstan 5.2 198,500 9 2
28 Lebanon 3.88 10,400 20 20
29 Libya 5.9 1,759,540 48 33
30 Malaysia 24 329,750 248 121
31 Maldives 0.36 300 1.25 n/a
32 Mali 11.7 1,240,000 11.8 5.4
33 Mauritania 3.2 1,030,700 6.2 1.36
34 Morocco 33 446,550 141 52
35 Mozambique* 20 801,590 25.66 5.8
36 Niger 12.5 1,267,000 10.22 3.43
37 Nigeria 132 923,768 133 96
38 Oman 3.1 212,460 40.22 25.42
39 Pakistan 166 803,940 385 120
40 Palestine 3.9 5,641 5.8 4.5
41 Qatar 0.86 11,437 22.5 30
42 Saudi Arabia 27 1,960,582 340 273
43 Senegal 12 196,190 20 8
44 Sierra Leone 6 71,740 5 1.1
186 The Future Is for Islam

Figure 2 (continued)

Country Population Area GDP PPP GDP
(million) (sq km) ($billion) ($billion)

45 Somalia 8.86 637,657 4.8 n/a
46 Sudan 41 2,505,810 85 22
47 Suriname* 0.44 163,270 2 1.35
48 Syria 19 185,180 63 25
49 Tajikistan 7.3 143,100 8.8 2
50 Togo* 5.5 56,785 9 2
51 Tunisia 10 163,610 77 31
52 Turkey 70 780,580 553 336
53 Turkmenistan 5 488,100 30 14
54 UAE 2.6 82,880 74 101
55 Uganda* 28 236,040 46 8.2
56 Uzbekistan 27 447,400 53 10
57 Yemen 21.5 527,970 17.23 13.74
OIC TOTAL 1,471 32,081,038 5360.82 2332

China 1,314 9,596,960 8182 1790
India 1,095 3,287,590 3699 720
Russia 143 17,075,200 1539 740
EU 457 3,976,372 12,180 13,310
USA 298 9,631,418 12,410 12,470
WORLD 6,525 148,940,000 43,920 43,920

*Countries with Muslim minorities
Current State of the Muslim World 187

Of the 57 OIC member countries, 47 have Muslim majorities, while
10, mostly small sub-Saharan African countries, have substantial
Muslim minorities. Excluding the GDP and land area of these 10 does
not make a major difference to the total figures and still leaves the
Islamic World with a GDP of around 5.3 trillion and a land mass of
almost 30 million square kilometers.
Some pessimists contend that the Muslims are 1,000 years behind
in technology, while others say 100. The reality is that most of today’s
technology was developed only in the last century or so, and the time
it now takes for a new entrant to catch up is diminishing all the time.
China has nearly caught up with the West within the span of a couple
of decades.
If they put forth a concerted effort, the Islamic world can catch
up with the most advanced societies within 30 years in all areas of
science and technology, and even sooner in most other fields.
The 30-year figure represents the maximum time frame that may
be required to master the most difficult technical challenges. For
example, if seven major Islamic countries, namely Egypt, Saudi Arabia,
Turkey, Iran, Pakistan, Malaysia, and Indonesia get together, they could
conceivably launch a space program that will put a man on the moon
and build a permanent station there within 30 years or sooner.

CHALLENGES

As we can see in this chapter, the Muslim countries are in possession
of tremendous human and material resources. But this blessing from
God is being squandered by the incompetence and personal interests
of a small number of people making up the ruling class. Because they’re
greedy, they don’t want to share resources with their own people, let
alone with Muslims in less fortunate countries. Because they’re incom-
petent, they mismanage their countries and keep them backward.
If the current crop of rulers had been a bit more efficient in running
their countries, then it would have been a matter of some consolation.
188 The Future Is for Islam

But instead, most Muslim countries suffer from bad administration,
with a few exceptions. One country that deserves honorable mention
is, of course, Malaysia, which started from a low level of development
and transformed itself into one of the most advanced countries of East
Asia within a few decades. By contrast, Muslim countries with far more
resources are still lacking in technological development and have weak
economies. This shows that maladministration is the biggest problem
in the Muslim world.
Apart from a lack of investment in economic activity, the greatest
issue facing Muslim countries is the lack of education, especially higher
education that can lead to advancement in science and technology.
But we won’t dwell on the negatives here, as most people are
familiar with the problems; in fact, they often get an overexaggerated
view of the problems in the Islamic world. Instead, we want to focus
on the good things and how these can be utilized to start the biggest
economic boom known to man.
CHAPTER 6

The New Caliphate
The Messenger of God predicted that after him the first true caliphate
would last for 30 years and would be followed by semi-just monarchies,
after which there would be tyrannical rulers, and then in the last days,
there would again be a caliphate that followed the true guidance of Islam.
While many forms of government during Islamic history have been
called caliphates, especially the Ottoman Empire, in reality they were
monarchies masquerading as caliphates. The caliphate of the first 30
years was more akin to a republic than a monarchy. Since even these
pseudo-caliphates are now gone, what we presently have is the era of
tyrannical rulers that preside over much of the Muslim world. However,
their time is nearly up, and we’ll soon be entering the time of the first
real caliphate ever since the time of the rightly guided Caliphs of the
first 30 years of Islam.
Most Muslims have only a vague idea of what a caliphate would
be like, and some think that it is just a fantasy that will never mate-
rialize. However, hostile non-Islamic powers are already taking the
Caliphate much more seriously than most Muslim rulers. They fear it
and have already started taking preventative measures to stop it from
materializing, even before there are any signs of it.
For example, many western leaders, including the President of the
United States, have mentioned in their speeches the danger a caliphate
poses to them and how they intend to do do everything they can to
stop it from becoming a reality.

189
190 The Future Is for Islam

In the Islamic world, there is much confusion about what the
Caliphate is. Some fear that it would be a dysfunctional rule of Taliban-
like mullahs. Others see it as some kind of paradise on earth that will
be brought about in the vaguely distant future by the promised Mahdi,
and they believe they really don’t need to do anything apart from sit-
ting back and waiting for it to happen. Most people have probably not
even heard about it, and even if they have, they have no idea what it
would be like and how it would come about.
The reality is that the Caliphate is not a supernatural entity that
will descend from heaven or materialize spontaneously out of thin
air, but rather it is a form of government that will include all or most
Muslim countries that will have to be conceptualized from scratch by
humans and brought into being with blood, sweat, and tears. There is
no fixed form that it will take, and it can be anything that the people
want it to be. The things that will make it an improvement over the
current state of affairs are:

• It will be based on the concept that God exists and there is
only one God, and all His commands as revealed in the Qur’an
and explained by the Messenger of God in the Sunnah must
be obeyed.
• It will unite all Muslims and allow them to pool their resources
for their common good.
• It will provide good government.
• It will ensure justice.
• It will result in massive economic and technological development.
• It will ensure the security of Muslims.

It will be a man-made structure that will be based on the current
state of human knowledge that allows Muslims to be united, preserve
their values and culture, and benefit from good government and eco-
nomic and technological development. This is no different from what
all cultures and civilizations strive for.
The New Caliphate 191

The Caliphate will not aspire to develop massive military power
and conquer the rest of the world. The fact is that the Caliphate will
be a benign entity, which everyone will be welcome to visit and do busi-
ness with and will have no plans to invade and conquer other countries,
convert or kill their people, or steal their wealth. This will make it
much less of a danger to the world compared to some countries that
are openly committing all of the above crimes in the present times.

THE SOVEREIGNTY OF GOD

The notion of the Sovereignty of God is that God’s words have to be
obeyed in those matters where He has explicitly given instructions in
the Qur’an. Any deviation from this constitutes a coup d’état against
God and is tantamount to rebellion against God’s will. The will of God
is laid out in the Qur’an.
The reality is that the Qur’an has very few instructions. Most mat-
ters of human organization are actually left to people to work out for
themselves. While Judaism may have hundreds of instructions on how
to conduct daily life, in the Qur’an, all the rules that God wants Muslims
to follow can be summarized into a few pages. In fact, in the Qur’an,
God specifically mentions that the followers of the Messenger should
not ask too many questions, as answering these questions will cause
increased hardship. This is because once instructions are given by
God, then they have to be obeyed under all circumstances, and this
increases the burden on people and decreases their flexibility of action.
God says:

O ye who believe! Ask not questions about things
which, if made plain to you, may cause you trouble.
But if ye ask about things when the Qur’an is being
revealed, they will be made plain to you, Allah will for-
give those: for Allah is Oft-forgiving, Most Forbearing.
Qur’an 5:101
192 The Future Is for Islam

Obviously, God intended Islam to be an undemanding religion that
is easy to follow, requiring only a few minutes of time a day, and does
not burden its adherents with tons of rules, regulations, and rituals,
even though some zealots have made it seem so.
The Caliphate that will be established as a modern state of the
twenty-first century will rely for the bulk of its rules and regulations
not on the Qur’an, but on current human knowledge. This is simply
because the Qur’an has nothing to say about most areas that require
legislation in a modern state, such as building regulations, telecom-
munication policies, traffic rules, etc.
Most of the instructions in the Qur’an are actually general rules
like: be just, be kind to others, etc. Some specific instructions include
rules on inheritance, for example, that were revealed on the question-
ing of followers, and that was why the above verse was revealed by
God to stop people from asking too many questions.
The way the Caliphate differs from other systems is that on those
matters where God has given instructions, they have to be obeyed,
and no one is allowed to change those rules. For example, as opposed
to the Western version of democracy, in an Islamic democratic
system, a majority of voters cannot overturn a Qur’anic injunction.
However, if there is more than one interpretation, then a majority
can decide on which interpretation to follow. For the over 90 percent
of laws that exist or will exist that are not mentioned in the Qur’an,
citizens of the Caliphate will have total freedom to choose, provided
that they don’t violate the general principles that are laid down in
the Qur’an.
It is true that over the course of their history, Muslims have devel-
oped multiple layers of laws based on the Qur’an, the Sunnah (traditions
of the Messenger) and Ijtehad, the interpretations of various schools
of thought. In the New Caliphate, it would probably be better to start
from scratch and discuss everything in the light of current circum-
stances. However, dexterity would be required to sidestep controversial
issues on which people have very strong views, as long as there are
The New Caliphate 193

people who have not evolved to a level where they would not make
some matters into issues of life and death.
The major dilemma is that if much of the organization of the
Caliphate has yet to be decided, and if the same people that run Muslim
countries now are the ones who create this structure, what will prevent
them from running it to the ground before it even takes off?
There are ways of ensuring a successful outcome. The Caliphate
structure has to be visualized and created by people who have the
following basic qualities:

1. Belief. An unflinching belief in the one and only God and
Muhammad (God bless him) as the messenger of God and the
Qur’an as the Word of God.
2. Virtue. A clean heart uncompromised by conflict of interest
between their duties to the Islamic community and their personal
interests.
3. Skill. Knowledge and skills to create a world-class transconti-
nental super-state.
4. Vision. The vision to conceptualize a system that will last for
hundreds of years.

There is an abundance of Muslims who would meet these criteria.
There are already many good people who are working on figuring
out the basics of the Caliphate structure. One of the resources available
online is the website www.caliphate.co.uk, run by Mr. Abdul-Kareem
Newell, who has put together a proposal for the organizational structure
of the Caliphate.
However, producing a workable plan would require an organization
like a think-tank to be put in place and to be provided with resources
for drawing together all the collective wisdom and knowledge of the
Islamic world in order to come up with proposals. This organization
would study the circumstances of each country, its history, current
situation, and future potential. It would bring in Islamic scholars from
194 The Future Is for Islam

all over the world, as well as specialists from many fields of expert-
ise. Together, they would come up with a recommendation for how to
move forward.
As progress is made, ideas would need to be publicized and opened
to public debate, as general acceptance by the public will be critical to
the successful implementation of the Caliphate. The planning would
not need to be secret or conspiratorial in any way, as there will be noth-
ing to hide, and it would be for the benefit of all Muslims, including
the ruling classes, and would not be a threat to anyone else.
The benefit of publicizing the plans for the Caliphate and getting
public opinion to back the idea outweighs the danger of inimical forces
trying to subvert the process.
This organization needs to be privately funded and independent
of governments, as that would give rise to conflicts of interest. In addi-
tion, all methodologies outlined for the establishment of the Caliphate
would need to be based on entirely peaceful and just means, as Islamic
values don’t allow for unjust means to be employed, even for just ends.
Having the master plan of the Caliphate ready and waiting to be
implemented will have the beneficial result that when the fortune
of the Muslims turns, which, as we have seen, is very close to happen-
ing, then the blueprint will be in place for bringing the Caliphate into
existence very quickly.
Based on the sayings of the Messenger of God, the time for the
establishment of the Caliphate is almost here, and time is of the essence
in completing preparations for it. While the first new Caliph, the Mahdi,
would be able to make many major decisions, there is nevertheless
an immense amount of work that still needs to be done to ensure a
smooth transition.
The detractors will do everything they can in order to stop it, but
we don’t need to worry too much about them as they cannot beat God
and can do absolutely nothing to prevent the new Caliphate from
coming into existence on the schedule planned by God and prophesied
by His Messenger.
The New Caliphate 195

Here, we will speculate on the structure of the Caliphate.

THE STRUCTURE OF THE CALIPHATE

The Caliphate will be a political system based on the ideology of Islam
and will enshrine the rule of law, representative government, account-
ability by the people through an independent judiciary, and the principle
of representative consultation. It will be a government built upon a
concept of citizenship regardless of ethnicity, gender, or creed and will
be totally opposed to the oppression of any religious or ethnic grouping.

Federal Structure. The highest executive post will be that of the Caliph,
who will be elected for a specific term by an electorate consisting of
all adult citizens of the territories in the jurisdiction of the Caliphate.
One innovative idea may be to extend the voting rights of the Caliph to
all the Muslims in the world. This will ensure that the Caliph is looked
upon not only as a secular chief executive, but also as the spiritual
head of all Muslims in the world. This would make him a combination
of both Caesar and the Pope.
There will be one or more legislative assemblies elected from
throughout the territories. Whether to have a single or bicameral
legislature is open to debate.
The Caliphate will be based on a federal structure with a division
of responsibilities between three tiers of government. The central
government will be in charge of guaranteeing the correct application
of Islamic laws, foreign policy, monetary policy, and defense.
The first and foremost responsibility of the Caliphate would be
to ensure that God’s laws, as revealed in the Qur’an, are followed.
The Caliphate will be responsible for conducting a unified foreign
policy on behalf of all the territories. However, different territories
may be given the flexibility of establishing economic relations with
foreign entities, as long as these don’t contradict or clash with the
policies of the central government.
196 The Future Is for Islam

There will be a unified monetary policy with a single currency that
may be based on a gold standard. All business will be conducted on
Islamic principles, especially those related to the prohibition on inter-
est. This is an area where a tremendous amount of work has been done,
and Islamic principles of finance have been found to be quite robust
and are already in widespread use and rapidly gaining in popularity.
There will be a single unified command authority for all the defense
capabilities of the Caliphate, and the Caliph will be the commander in
chief of the armed forces. The military will be under civilian control,
and the personnel will be rotated throughout the territories. The
defense policy of the Caliphate will be based on a non-aggressive pos-
ture of minimum deterrence. It will have an avowed policy of striving
for complete disarmament in the world, with the objective of elimi-
nating the need for militaries and leaving only police forces to ensure
security. The resulting savings of hundreds of billions of dollars would
make funds available for the complete elimination of poverty and
disease from the world.
It is prophesied that the headquarters of the new Caliphate will
be based in Jerusalem after it is liberated. Until that happens, it will be
based in Medina.
The official language of the Caliphate will be Arabic, which will
serve as the lingua franca among Muslims, and the people of all the
territories will be required to learn Arabic as a first or second language.
However, all territories will be free to conduct their affairs in their pre-
ferred language. No language will be discouraged, and everyone will
have freedom to develop their local culture and language according to
their aspirations.

Gubernatorial Structure. The second tier of government will consist
of what are now individual countries. In the Caliphate, the existing
countries will become states ruled by governors and assemblies elected
by the local people.
Where a country joining the Caliphate has an existing federal
structure and the current federating units are colonial or unstable,
The New Caliphate 197

artifacts that are not reflective of ethnic, linguistic, or other ground
realities, then their boundaries would be redrawn according to the pref-
erences of the people living there. The government of these redrawn
and stabilized units will then constitute the second tier of govern-
ment and will report directly to the Caliphate, and the existing federal
government structures would be abolished.
Redrawing the borders of untenable and unjust administrative
units will help in removing a major source of conflict and lead to
greater stability. This formula will be applied with the consent of the
people involved, and if they prefer to stay together in a larger state,
then they will be allowed to do so.
The method for an independent country to join the Caliphate
would be by holding a referendum. If the majority votes to join, then
the Caliphate will accept it as a constituent federating unit subject to
the Caliphate’s authority. The country will be subject to a series of
administrative measures and adjustments that allow the new member
to be incorporated smoothly into the Caliphate structure.

Local Administration. The third tier of the Caliphate structure will
be at the local level, consisting of elected city, town, and rural councils.

Judiciary. The Caliphate will be based on the rule of law and an inde-
pendent judiciary. This will be the cornerstone upon which the state
structure will be built.
The laws will be based on the will of God as expressed in the Qur’an
and the Sunnah of the Messenger of God. On those matters where
there is more than one religious interpretation, a majority vote in the
legislature will decide. Secular laws will be enacted by the legislatures
at the various levels of government and enforced by the courts at the
appropriate level.
The Supreme Islamic Court will be at the federal level and will be
the final arbitrator for all judicial decisions.
The provision of justice is the most important element for the long-
term survival of any form of government. The Ottoman Empire that
198 The Future Is for Islam

lasted for over 500 years owed its longevity in large part to the fact that
it provided impartial justice to all its citizens.
Laws in the Caliphate will be uniformly applied regardless of
ethnicity, gender, creed, or social or economic status of a person.

Education. Education is a fundamental building block for any society,
and no country has yet achieved success without an educated popu-
lation. The countries that are the most successful are invariably the
ones with the best education.
In the Caliphate, education would be one of its foremost priorities.
It would provide the required resources to ensure the availability of
education for all its citizens.
It would be mandatory for all children, male, and female, to attend
school up to the age of 16. Any interference in this matter would be a
punishable offence.
As a matter of state policy, the Caliphate would strive for the pro-
vision of college level education to a maximum percentage of the
population. To achieve this aim, a significant amount of resources
will be invested, and the establishment of private universities would
be encouraged.
The acquisition of higher education would be encouraged, and
several hundred additional universities and colleges may be required,
including many centers of excellence.

Science and Technology. The Caliphate would have a strategic deci-
sion to invest heavily in catching up with the most advanced societies
in science and technology and to pull ahead of them.
The plan would begin with the creation of world-class univer-
sities that would then become the bases around which research and
development facilities would be built.
The Caliphate would try to leapfrog into the forefront of science
by investing in cutting-edge areas of science like nanotechnology,
biotechnology, and information technology.
The New Caliphate 199

Once the laboratories start generating new research, it would
result in the formation of new companies that will introduce innovative
new products for the world market.
The Caliphate will also start a space program for the purpose of
exploration and to exploit outer space for material resources.

Health. One of the first tasks to be undertaken upon the formation
of the Caliphate would be to assuage the negative effects of the wars
imposed on Islamic countries. This would include clearing up the
radioactive fallout from depleted uranium that has been extensively
used on civilians, resulting in severe diseases and birth defects in
babies. The mines that have been laid have to be cleared. The injuries
to tens of thousands of people have to be attended to, and psychological
damage from torture and abuse will have to be addressed.
Beyond dealing with the effects of the invasions, the Caliphate
would provide universal medical coverage to all its citizens.

Communications. An integrated network of road and rail links would
be built to connect all the territories and to ensure the free flow of
people and trade.
Modern interconnected highways will be built to interconnect the
Islamic world. It would be possible to drive from Islamabad to Cairo
and from Jeddah to Tashkent. A tunnel under the Straits of Hormuz
would shorten the distance to drive from Karachi to Dubai via Iran.
A high-speed rail network will be built to connect all major cities
in the Caliphate. This will be a cost-effective way for people to travel
and for the transport of goods.
A parallel Internet infrastructure will be built for the Caliphate to
make it independent of rival powers and to ensure that insidious
material like pornography is kept out.
200 The Future Is for Islam

LOW BARRIER TO ENTRY

The Caliphate will be the most cosmopolitan, wealthy, and hopefully
the most scientifically advanced civilization of the future. In it, people
from the whole world will be welcome, and it will have the lowest
barrier to entry. It may take an African several generations to be
accepted in the West, if ever, and it may take a Russian several genera-
tions to be accepted as a Japanese. But it will take only a few minutes
for someone to accept Islam and become a member of the Muslim
community, which is already the most diverse of all civilizations.

RESISTANCE TO THE CALIPHATE

Internal Opposition. The establishment of the Caliphate will be con-
strued as a threat by most, if not all, the ruling classes in the Islamic
world and will be even more fiercely resisted by them than by hostile for-
eign powers. What they need to realize is that at the pace at which events
are currently happening, it will not be long before they’re all swept aside
anyways to make room for the whole Islamic world to be remodeled
according to the plans of inimical forces. If that happens, not only
would the current rulers lose whatever they have at present, but their
future generations would be condemned to a bleak and hopeless future.
They should remember the example of Iraq and Afghanistan, which
were destroyed as part of the strategy of “creative destruction,” accord-
ing to which a country has to be first reduced to rubble to break the
will of the people before it can be remodeled to suit the requirement
of subservience to Israel and the Western hitmen working for it.
Another thing to keep in mind is that the Islamic world is not being
invaded to bring about prosperity for its people, but to recolonize it
and loot it. Once the spoils are divided amongst the conquerors, there
will be nothing left for the Muslims, including the current elites.
A few years ago, the direct descendants of the Great Moguls of
India were found living in a shack on a railway platform in Delhi. This
The New Caliphate 201

was the state of penury to which the British had reduced them. The
current rulers and their future generations will fare no better once
the present-day neocolonialists are finished with them.
The final thing to understand is that by cooperating with the estab-
lishment of the Caliphate, the ruling classes would ensure their place
within it and preserve their wealth, and would be able use their funds as
investment capital in the unprecedented economic boom that will occur
once the Caliphate is established. They would then be able to create
far more wealth than they would have otherwise been able to generate.
On the other hand, if they resist, then they would either cause
resentment among the people and risk violent overthrow or face being
gobbled up by hostile foreign powers. In both cases, they would stand
to lose everything.
Another vital reason for the need for the existing establishments
to cooperate is that they are often the most educated and experienced
people in the Muslim world. If there is revolution and chaos, then the
services of these people may be lost. In addition, a chaotic change
would cause unnecessary destruction and allow inept and overzealous
radicals to fill the gap. These radicals are often as destructive as the
Islamic world’s worst enemies.

External Opposition. A CIA report published in 2005 entitled “Mapping
the Global Future” had predictions about the state of the world in the
year 2020. It paints a negative picture of a struggling newly formed
caliphate as a malignant terrorist entity ruled by Al Qaeda-type figures.
This report started the tendency of some Western leaders to begin
mentioning in their speeches that an evil caliphate is being planned
and they need to stop it in its tracks. That is why they renamed the
“War on Terror” as “The Long War” and started saying that the struggle
against Islam will last for over 30 years.
The opposition of external powers will be less of a hindrance to
the establishment of the Caliphate than that of the local establish-
ments. If there is a consensus among Muslims to go ahead with it,
202 The Future Is for Islam

then outsiders will not be in a position to do much about it. They will
try their best, though, and Muslims will need to come up with a plan
to resist their interference.
The pressure that America, Britain, and Israel are applying on
Islamic countries is having an effect that is exactly the opposite of
what they desire. This has become the major reason for increasing
Muslim unity. The more they try to thwart the establishment of the
Caliphate, the sooner it will materialize with the will of God.

And (the unbelievers) plotted and planned, and Allah
too planned, and the best of planners is Allah.
Qur’an 3:54

REALISTIC EXPECTATIONS

It can be said with a fair measure of certainty that if today there were
referenda in Egypt, Saudi Arabia, Turkey, Iran, Pakistan, Malaysia, and
Indonesia for the establishment of the Caliphate, overwhelming majori-
ties of people would vote in favor of it and so would the people in
most other Islamic countries.
On the other hand, the likelihood of the rulers of these countries
giving their people this choice is near zero.
That the ruling elites will see the futility of resisting what is
inevitable is unlikely in the current circumstances. In their minds, the
short-term loss of power, wealth, and privilege overrides any gains that
they can imagine. That is why they would rather wait out the current
world situation with the hope that their turn for regime change will
never come, and they imagine that even if it does, they could try to
escape at the very last moment, leaving the public to enjoy the fruits
of democracy that the foreign invaders bring.
There is currently a wide gap between the aspirations of the people
and the interests of the rulers. The situation is therefore primed for
sudden and explosive change.
The New Caliphate 203

This change will occur when God sends a man who will become
the leader of the Muslims as promised by the Messenger of God. This
will fulfill the following promise of God:

Allah has promised, to those among you who believe
and work righteous deeds, that He will, of a surety,
grant them in the land, inheritance (of power), as He
granted it to those before them; that He will establish
in authority their religion — the one which He has
chosen for them; and that He will change (their state),
after the fear in which they (lived), to one of security
and peace: ‘They will worship Me (alone) and not
associate aught with Me. ‘If any do reject Faith after
this, they are rebellious and wicked.
Qur’an 24:55

NEW UNITED NATIONS

The Caliphate will sponsor a new and democratic international organ-
ization that will replace the current colonial-based United Nations.
The current United Nations is an obsolete relic of the colonial era
that was created by Western powers with the intention of maintaining
their influence over world affairs. These same nations have resisted
change in its organizational structure to reflect new realities and have
used it as a means of providing cover to justify their aggressive policies
around the world. This institution has therefore lost all legitimacy,
especially as long as it is controlled by narrow self-interests benefiting
a tiny elite within a handful of countries. Therefore, the time has come
for restructuring this organization or creating an alternate one.
The countries that currently control the United Nations are
involved in some way or the other in practically all major and minor
conflicts that have killed over a hundred million people since the
Second World War. They have caused the spread of wars, poverty,
204 The Future Is for Islam

disease, pollution, and drugs. They are the major cause of envi-
ronmental degradation, but have taken no significant steps towards
fixing this problem. No major conflict in the world has been fairly
resolved, while new wars are being threatened and massive military
buildups are occurring. These countries have very clearly failed in
their duty to the international community, and the world has to start
looking elsewhere.
The Caliphate will sponsor, host, and fund a new United Nations
organization that will either take over the functions of the current one
or be built from the ground up with international consensus.
The new United Nations will be democratic, and every country
will have equal voting rights without anyone having the right to over-
rule the majority. Each member state will get one vote per citizen,
giving each country voting power in proportion to its population.
All international laws will be reviewed, amended, and voted on
based on the new voting rights, thereby removing all anomalies that
exist in order to protect the interests of past powers.
The foremost priority of the new United Nations would be to
resolve all conflicts in the world by means of sponsoring the just
resolution of disputes and the vigorous enforcement of peace treaties
that are decided upon. Implementation would be ensured by means of
forces drawn from neutral countries.
The other priority would be to help in complete military disarma-
ment, not just nuclear disarmament. A 10-20 year plan would be agreed
upon for all countries to systematically reduce their military spending,
disband personnel, and decommission weapons to near zero by the
end of the term. After that, no weapons would be allowed apart from
the minimum required for law enforcement. All weapons of mass
destruction, including nuclear weapons and all heavy armaments, will
subsequently be banned, and a joint force of the United Nations would
enforce this. Any country that resists would be declared a rogue
nation, and the international community would be required to cease
all dealing with such a country, regardless of cost, until it complies.
The New Caliphate 205

The new United Nations will also have environmental protection
as a primary objective. In the present system, the most serious pol-
luters are the very same countries that wield the most power. Because
of their narrow short-term interests, they have no desire to take the
environment seriously. In the new system, a combined effort by all of
mankind will be organized to avert environmental disaster.
The new United Nations would sponsor a new universal declara-
tion of human rights that would ensure that the interests of all people
in the world are protected and they have access to a minimum accept-
able level of education and health care. An international fund would
be created, into which all countries would contribute, that would
ensure the delivery of basic services to every single man, woman, and
child in the world.
While the existing United Nations has similar goals, the problem
is that the self-interests of the controlling powers do not allow them
to implement any meaningful policy.
With the new United Nations that the Caliphate will sponsor, there
will be no vested interests and all policies will be based on what is of
the maximum benefit to the whole international community.
Once the new United Nations comes into being, the Caliphate
would be a member state within it with voting rights in proportion to
its population and would not have any controlling power over it.
CHAPTER 7

The West
To begin with, we need to define what constitutes “the West.” In Samuel
Huntington’s book The Clash of Civilizations, the West is defined as the
countries of the European Union and North America, minus Mexico.
What these countries have in common is the West European ancestry,
classical heritage of ancient Rome, and the religion of Catholic or Protes-
tant Christianity. They were part of the European renaissance and are
now western liberal democracies. In terms of religion, most of these
societies, especially European ones, are now “post-Christian,” as they’ve
become mostly secular and are reverting to the ancient Roman freewheel-
ing hedonistic lifestyle of a time they consider to have been a golden
age. In non-politically-correct terminology, they’ve dumped Christianity.
In Huntington’s view, the Eastern European Slavic countries are
not part of the West, as they have a different history and are thus part
of the Orthodox Christian civilization led by Russia. Latin America,
which is mainly Catholic, has gone its separate way and is now only
loosely affiliated with the West. In addition, they have too much Native
American blood to be considered truly western anymore.
This way, three out of eight current civilizations identified by
Huntington are Christian. The other five are Islamic, Sinic (Chinese),
Hindu, African, and Japanese.
Even though an ocean divides America and Europe, nevertheless
they share the same culture and racial background, since America
consists mainly of West European immigrants.

207
208 The Future Is for Islam

In looking at the current struggle between the West and Islam,
the thing to remember is that it would be wrong to say that the whole
Christian world is attacking the Islamic world, as in reality the vast
majority of the Christian world is actually neutral, if not opposed to,
what is going on. The only people who use Christianity to justify the
assault on the Islamic world are a hard-core group of evangelical
Christians in America, whom we will discuss later. On the other hand,
it is equally true that the countries that are leading the assault on Islam
are Judeo-Christian.
In fact, there are only three countries that are at the forefront of
the current crusades. We can refer to them as the unholy trinity con-
sisting of the Father, the Son, and the Holy Ghost, with the Father being
Britain, the Son being America, and the Holy Ghost leading them both
being Israel. It is really these three that have declared a fight to the
finish with the Islamic world and are inciting other countries to come
and join them in their campaign.
Without this unholy trinity, it is doubtful if the rest of the West
would have the inclination or the capacity to do what is being carried
out in their name.

THE COST/BENEFIT RATIO OF RELATIONS
WITH THE WEST

There are still many Muslims who cling to the view that somehow they
cannot survive without the West and are willing to forget or ignore
every insult and forgive every injury. However, what the West has given
the Islamic world in the past or what it can give the Islamic world in
the future is highly debatable. Also debatable is whether the negative
consequences outweigh the benefits from the relationship in the past
and whether they will do so in the future.
While discussing the past, the answer to this question will be
based on a lot of “what if” questions, such as, What if the British had
not subverted the Mogul Empire, would the Muslims have imported
The West 209

technology and good business practices from outside, like Japan, and
maintained parity with the developed world? What if the West had not
destroyed the Ottoman Empire, would there have been an advanced
and united Islamic Caliphate today? The answers to these questions
would be based on hypothetical scenarios about what may have hap-
pened if the Muslims had been left to their own devices to develop
peacefully at their own pace.
If I were to hazard a guess, I would say that the Muslims have lost
more than they have gained. Their countries have been invaded and
occupied, colonized, and robbed. The Muslims have been divided into
tiny countries, and worst of all, have suffered a loss of self-respect
and pride in their own culture.
As if the job had not been properly finished previously, the West
has taken it upon itself to apply more of the same medicine to the
Islamic world. Again they are on the move, invading Muslim countries
to reoccupy and recolonize them, rob their resources, divide them into
even tinier factions, destroy their culture, and make them lose any
remaining sense of self-confidence or self-respect.
Iraq is a classical example of all these methods being applied. It
was occupied, its infrastructure was destroyed, its museums were
systematically stripped of artifacts, its communities were made to fight
each other, its people were deliberately and publicly humiliated in the
infamous Abu Gharib prison so as to shame and frighten the popu-
lation. These are examples of methods that have not been invented
recently, but are tried and tested and have been used effectively for
the last couple of centuries by the British and other Western powers
all over the world.
There should now be little doubt that if the West is not stopped,
it will apply these methods to whatever remains of the Islamic world
until it consists of an ever larger series of tiny squabbling states totally
dependent on the West for protection from outsiders and from each
other. When its people are totally helpless, they will be informed that
the Islamic God — Allah — is an idol that cannot help them and that
210 The Future Is for Islam

they should now choose to become westernized and accept changes
in the Qur’an, as it’s too anti-Semitic to be acceptable in its current
form. If the Muslims agree to do that, then they will be given the status
of second-class citizens of the empire. No one likes losers, and losers
are never treated as equals.
Within weeks of the occupation of Afghanistan, an Afghan woman
was paraded in a beauty contest wearing a bikini, and burka-burning
events were televised to show how the Americans had liberated the
women of Afghanistan. The Christian preachers in America say that
Allah is an idol, and Muslim organizations in America have already
started censoring themselves to remove any negative references to
the Jews. The Jews, however, feel no compulsion to stop denigrating
Muslims, and they do so with wild abandon. All this is already happen-
ing, and it will be more so in the future if the West is totally triumphant
over the Islamic World.
The real question is that if the West does not completely subjugate
the Muslims and take away their choices from them, then to what extent
is the West essential for the advancement of the Islamic World?
The answer to this question is: not much. Today, almost every-
thing that is required is available from multiple sources. Science
and technology, education, infrastructure, medicine, and defense and
consumer products are all available to anyone with the money to buy
them. In fact, the West does not give anything to the Muslims for free
anyways; everything has to be paid for in hard cash. It is a fallacy that
the West or anyone else will not sell their products to Muslims who
are willing and able to pay for it, just as it is a false belief spread by
some that Muslims will not sell oil unless they are occupied.
The reality is that the two situations where Western countries
could have helped Muslims would have been to allow access to their
markets for export of goods from Muslim countries, and for the West
to invest in the economies of Muslim countries. On both counts they
have failed. They don’t allow free market access, and they don’t invest
anything. Western countries invest hundreds of billions of dollars
The West 211

abroad, but none of that comes to any Muslim country where it could
help in developing the economy. Rather, the Muslims are net exporters
of investments into the West that keep their factories running and
their workers employed, while Muslim workers sit jobless.
Whatever foreign investments the West makes go to East Asia,
Latin America, and now India, while Muslims sit twiddling their thumbs
waiting for crumbs to be tossed their way.
Whatever benefits were doled out in the past have been severely
restricted further, and Muslims have found themselves unwelcome
to even invest in the West anymore, or to go there for an education or
even to visit. Apparently, most Arab businessmen who want to do
business in America have to conduct it from London, England, as that
is the nearest to America that they’re allowed to come.
Muslims don’t need to obsess too much about these people, as
they don’t have anything to give to the Muslims that is not available
elsewhere. In fact, if tomorrow there were a grand rapture and every-
one in the U.S. and its allies were lifted up to heaven in bodily form,
leaving their clothes behind, then no one would miss them, and if
anything, there would be a collective sigh of relief by everyone who
is left behind. There would probably be a big party with lots of used
clothes to give away as presents.
The only relevance the West has for the Islamic world today is for
Muslims to figure out how to get rid of Western influences from their
midst and protect themselves from their violence.

9/11 AND OTHER BLACK OPERATIONS

It is high time that Muslims get over their guilt about what happened
on September 11th, 2001. This was an inside job carried out by rogue
elements of the American government and had nothing to do with
Muslims, apart from their being the chosen scapegoats for it.
The purpose of this book is to talk about the future of the Muslim
world and not about the West or America or how these countries
212 The Future Is for Islam

are organized or how they operate, so we will not spend too much time
on this topic. However, we have briefly discussed those countries
that have had some negative impact on the Muslims in the past and
will do so again in the near future. In the longer run, they will be of
no relevance.
9/11 was an event organized by those with twisted dreams of an
Israeli-controlled American World Empire with a secure Israel in
control of Middle Eastern resources.
The prime purpose of this event and the series of events that
followed was to provide everlasting security to Israel. Control of oil
is only a secondary benefit that is being used to justify things to those
who do not believe that America is occupying countries to free them.
If there had not been a single drop of oil in the Middle East, the whole
scenario would nonetheless have unfolded just as it did, as long as
Israel was under threat from the surrounding countries. Afghanistan’s
lack of oil did not save it.
Suffice it to say here that the official version of the 9/11 tale has
holes big enough to fly a jumbo jet through, piloted by a nine-year-old.
The only people who still believe this fairy-tale are the diehard
fans of CNN and FOX News who have no knowledge of the fact that
the mainstream Western media, particularly the American media, is
more highly controlled than the media in the former Soviet Union was.
These kinds of acts are called Black Operations, “black-ops” for
short, and they are conducted by one group and set up to look as if
another group were responsible. The West, particularly Israel, is a
master of carrying out black-ops, and surely has many more planned
for the future.
Similarly, the underground bombings in London, the train bombs
in Madrid, and the killing of Australians in Fiji all served the purpose
of shoring up public opinion in these countries to support the War on
Terror and commit their troops for various invasions. These and many
other terrorists acts blamed on Muslims fall under the category of
black-ops.
The West 213

There is enough material available for those who want to carry
out their own research on this topic, and they’re invited to look it up
themselves if they’re interested. The main source of extensive infor-
mation is, of course, the Internet, which is still relatively free of control,
although for how long it will remain so is difficult to say.

SHOCK AND AWE THERAPY

A discussion of the West would be incomplete without mentioning
this verse from the Qur’an:

And (the unbelievers) plotted and planned, and Allah
too planned, and the best of planners is Allah.
Qur’an 3:54

Until recently, the Islamic world was a comatose and near-dead
civilization that the West probably thought it could finish off quickly
with a little bit of shock and awe. But the best laid plans of mice and
men often go awry, and instead of killing Islam, the West’s tactics are
serving as electric shocks to wake up the patient.
The status quo is the worst enemy of the Muslims, as the existing
situation had too many odds stacked up against their being able to make
any meaningful progress. The West exerted tremendous influence indi-
rectly through the the fascination of the ruling and middle classes with
everything Western and the overall indifference of the general public.
However, the West led by Israeli interests managed to blow away its
advantage and completely destroyed its credibility and exposed its dark
reality for the entire world to see. America managed to reduce itself from
a giant in the eyes of the Muslims to a dwarf that few take seriously
anymore, apart from its capacity to bomb. Every provocation it commits
leads to a renewed commitment of the Muslims to the Islamic cause.
Now if the West leaves the Muslims alone, they will feel free to
establish the Caliphate without let or hindrance, but if the West tries
214 The Future Is for Islam

to prevent it, then the Muslims will establish the Caliphate even sooner
as a backlash against the West’s mechanizations.
Indeed, God also plans and His plans are the best.

CRIME AND SOCIAL DISINTEGRATION

Civilizations rise and fall, and the West is in a state of terminal decline
in relation to the rising powers of tomorrow. China and India are gen-
erally accepted as countries of the future, but the purpose of this book
has been to show that the Islamic world will become the foremost
civilization of the future.
The West’s greatest power in relation to the rest of the world was
at the end of the First World War. At that time, a few old men from
Europe could sit down and decide the fate of the whole world, includ-
ing drawing up boundaries of countries they created. Since then, their
relative power has been declining, as other nations of the world have
caught up.
Now the West is facing a dead end as their mature economies
stagnate, their population ages, and social deterioration sets in. As
the people in the West have lost their faith in Christianity, they seem
to have lost their moral compass. Where Christianity used to provide
answers to questions about what was right and what was wrong, now
everything is up for debate. Extramarital sex, abortion, homosexuality,
gay marriage, pornography — it is all acceptable. No wonder, then, that
no one blinks an eye at killing women and children, as long as it saves
them a few dollars in gasoline prices.
The Western propaganda against Islam is mostly based on lies,
the chief one being that Muslims attacked America on 9/11. Another
one is that somehow the people in the West are more civilized, pre-
cisely because they have gone beyond primitive religious belief.
However, if crime figures are a measure of being civilized, then the
reality shows otherwise.
The West 215

Country Population Murder Rape Car Theft Prison
Population

USA (2004) 292,000,000 16,137 94,000 1,237,114 2,000,000

Indonesia (2000) 245,000,000 2,200 1,372 29,000 62,886

Britain 60,600,000 850 12,350 290,600 64,379

Saudi Arabia 27,000,000 105 87 5,573 23,720

As can be seen in the above figures, compared to Muslim countries,
the crime rate in the West is very high. For example, if we compare
Indonesia and the U.S., two countries with relatively similar popula-
tions, we find that the U.S. has over seven times more murders, 68
times more rapes, and 42 times more car thefts, and there are 32 times
more people in prisons. The conclusion that can be drawn from these
figures: The rate of crime in Muslim societies is a fraction of what it
is in the West. In a country like Saudi Arabia, where Islamic laws are
strictly enforced, the crime rate is near zero.
Over 20-30 percent of women in the U.S. experience rape at least
once in their life. Men, too, are not spared, and 10 percent of men in
the U.S. will be raped in their lifetime. Including unreported crimes,
the number is 683,280 women raped every year in the U.S. In Canada, it
is estimated that at least 40 percent of women will be raped or sexually
abused at least once in their lifetime.
Nearly 50 percent of marriages in the U.S. end in divorce, while
in the UK, the figure is around 40 percent. In the U.S., over 33 percent
of all children are born out of wedlock, and in the UK, the figure is 42
percent. While these things also happen in Muslim countries, the figures
are negligible in comparison.
To be a woman in the West is particularly disadvantageous. Not
only are women more likely to be robbed, raped, and abused, but they
also have a slim chance of getting married before having children, and
216 The Future Is for Islam

if they do get married, there is a high likelihood of getting divorced
and being forced to raise children alone.
Because of extramarital births and divorce, a large percentage of
children live in single-family homes and grow up to become dysfunc-
tional adults, which keeps the cycle repeating itself.
Despite their own shortcomings, Westerners lecture Muslims
to do things their way, but the Muslims need to ask why any country
or society would want to go down this road. If the above figures
prove anything, it is that Muslim countries should be running in the
opposite direction.

THE CONTINUING CRUSADE

“This crusade, this war on terrorism, is gonna take a while. And
the American people must be patient. I’m gonna be patient.”
George Bush, September 16, 2001

The First Crusade was launched 1095 AD, and for the next 200 years,
the European Christians kept invading Islamic lands, despite being
defeated repeatedly.
In 1099 AD, the Christians managed to seize control of Jerusalem.
In one day, the crusaders murdered almost every inhabitant of
Jerusalem — Muslims, Jews, and even Eastern Christians. In 1187,
Saladin, Sultan of Egypt, recaptured Jerusalem after 88 years of cru-
sader rule. In contrast to the Christian slaughter of Muslims, Saladin
spared the lives of the Europeans and allowed them to go home.
This European Christian tendency to invade other countries and
kill women and children never really ended throughout history
and continues to this day, as can be witnessed in Iraq and Afghanistan.
When he marched into Jerusalem captured from the Turks in 1917,
a British general, Sir Edmund Allenby, put his foot on Saladin’s grave
and proudly declared: “Today the wars of the Crusaders are completed,”
and the British press celebrated his victory with cartoons of Richard
The West 217

the Lion-Hearted looking down at Jerusalem above the caption, “At
last my dream come true.”
It is as if history were repeating itself. Then, too, they occupied
Jerusalem for 88 years, and today they have again partially occupied
Jerusalem for 55 years, and all of it for the last 29 years. Then they
lost and were thrown out, and it will be no different in the near future,
as prophesied by the Messenger of God.

EVANGELICAL CHRISTIANS OF AMERICA

Of the nearly two billion Christians in the world, most have a benign,
if not positive, attitude towards Islam in accordance with God’s mes-
sage in the Qur’an that of all the people in the world, the Christians
will prove to be the best friends of Muslims.
However, the evangelical Christians of America that make up the
Christian Right are among the bitterest enemies of Islam. They make up
the core support for the Republican Party, and the President of America,
George Bush, holds values that reflect core evangelical beliefs.
The evangelicals give great importance to biblical prophecies
and are diehard supporters of Zionism and Israel. It is their belief that
turmoil leading up to Armageddon will trigger the Second Coming of
Christ, so they are very enthusiastic backers of all wars in the Middle
East. They would like to speed up events if it seems to them that they
are not unfolding fast enough.
The main evangelical preachers, or televangelicals as they’re called,
have huge audiences running into tens of millions, and they all preach
hatred towards Islam. On their websites, inflammatory material can be
found against Allah, whom they call in idol, and against the personality
of the Messenger of God. Billy Graham, who is close to the President
of the United States, publicly called Islam an “evil religion.” What he
may have been telling the President in private may be even worse.
The actual knowledge that these preachers have about Islam is
very limited — actually almost none. Jerry Falwell, one of the big-ticket
218 The Future Is for Islam

evangelical preachers, was once talking on a television news show
against Islam and was asked if he had read the Qur’an. He said that
he hadn’t. Although he is a person with a large following of people
who rely on his advice, which he freely dispenses, he had never
bothered to read the Qur’an before forming his own opinion and
publicizing it.
Incidentally, Tony Blair of Britain, another great backer of Middle
Eastern wars, is also driven by values similar to those of the evangelicals.
The evangelical Christians of America have had great influence
on American attitudes towards Islam and will continue to do so until
Armageddon has been fought and Jesus is here. It is then that their
balloon will burst.
In a way, the evangelicals are right about Jesus’ coming during
the present-day turmoil. However, they will be disappointed when Jesus
turns his back on them and disowns them. Because of the closeness
of the evangelical movement to Zionism and Israel, they are likely
candidates to fall for the Antichrist and support him. Because the
people who will sponsor the Antichrist are very clever, they will manip-
ulate the Antichrist, who will be a fraud, to fit in with the evangelicals’
view of Jesus and fool them. To the evangelicals, the Mahdi will be
sold as the Antichrist, and the Antichrist as Jesus.

CHRISTIANITY

A Canaanite woman from that vicinity came to
him, crying out, “Lord, Son of David, have mercy on
me! My daughter is suffering terribly from demon-
possession.”
Jesus did not answer a word. So his disciples
came to him and urged him, “Send her away, for she
keeps crying out after us.”
He answered, “I was sent only to the lost sheep
of Israel.”
The West 219

The woman came and knelt before him. “Lord,
help me!” she said.
He replied, “It is not right to take the children’s
bread and toss it to their dogs.”
“Yes, Lord,” she said, “but even the dogs eat the
crumbs that fall from their masters’ table.”
Then Jesus answered, “Woman, you have great
faith! Your request is granted.” And her daughter was
healed from that very hour.
NIV Bible, Matthew 15:22-28

In the above verses from the Bible, a non-Jewish woman from
Canaan pleads to Jesus to heal her daughter. Jesus refuses to do so at
first, but then relents and helps her out. He later explains to his disci-
ples that the powers bestowed to him are a gift of God for the benefit
of the believers in God (Jews), and he did not want to distribute this
favor to non-believers.
In the Gospel of Barnabas, it is stated that when his disciples
enquired as to why he called non-believers “dogs,” Jesus explained that
in his view, they were worse than dogs because dogs are at least loyal
to their masters who feed them, while non-believers are ungrateful to
God, who gives them everything.
The significance of the story is that Jesus plainly says that he was
sent to the “lost sheep of Israel,” in other words, to the Jews. During
his time in the Holy Land, Jesus spent all his efforts in preaching to
the Jews and did not try to convert the non-Jews that lived in adjoining
towns and villages.
Jesus was himself a Jew and did not claim that he had come
with a new religion. He had come as a reformer of the Jews and
strictly followed the commandments of God as laid down in the Laws
of Moses.
But the Jews of his time had already made amendments to the
Torah and did not follow it as much as they followed the traditions
220 The Future Is for Islam

and customs, known as the Talmud, which the priests had developed
over time.
Therefore, anything that Jesus taught that was different from the
teachings of the Jewish priests was because he was following the cor-
rect form of Judaism, as opposed to the priests who were following
the corrupted form.
Even during the time of Jesus, his disciples had differing views
about his teachings, but after his time, a great variety of opinions
developed in the way Jesus’ teachings were interpreted and taught.
The founder of Western Christianity was a Jew by the name of
Saul, who had never met Jesus, was initially opposed to his teachings,
and had, in fact, persecuted the followers of Jesus. Later, he converted
and became known as Paul and went on to establish many of the
ideas that Christians follow today. It is considered that many beliefs
about Jesus later adopted by Christianity came from the writings of
Paul: Jesus’ being a descendant of King David, the Resurrection
of Jesus, the Ascension of Jesus after his crucifixion, original sin,
and Jesus’ return from heaven, all make their first appearance in the
letters of Paul.
One of the contemporaries of Paul, who was an actual compan-
ion of Jesus, and one of the apostles, Barnabas, developed a dispute
with Paul about his teachings, and they parted ways. According to
the Gospel of Barnabas, Jesus rejected the idea that he was the
Son of God, but predicted that people would believe this after him.
Christians reject the Gospel of Barnabas, as it goes against their
Pauline beliefs.
It was perhaps more than 200 years after Jesus that his followers
began calling themselves Christians and started establishing a sepa-
rate religion. By the time of the Roman Emperor Constantine, around
300 AD, there was still neither a single Christian text nor a single opin-
ion about Christian theological beliefs. Rather, there were pockets of
Christians scattered in many places throughout the Roman Empire,
and there was a wide variety of opinions amongst them about Jesus
The West 221

and his teachings. Some thought that he was a man and a prophet of
God; some thought he was the Son of God, and some thought that he
was God. There were dozens of gospels and writings about the life of
Jesus that existed at that time, and different groups taught different
versions of the story of Jesus.
Roman Emperor Constantine became a Christian in 312 AD after
he won a critical battle and associated it with the vision of the cross
that he had seen in the sky. He proclaimed Christianity to be the state
religion and decided to codify a Christian text and adopt one version
out of the many opinions being propagated about Jesus.
For this purpose, Constantine called all 1,800 bishops of the
Christian Church to the First Council of Nicaea in 325 AD. The purpose
of the council was to resolve disagreements over the nature of Jesus
in relationship to the Father; in particular whether Jesus was of the
same or of similar substance as God, the Father. Nicaea is a town in
present-day Turkey.
There was a great debate, during which some argued that Jesus
was a man and a prophet of God, while others argued that he was the
Son of God. The argument at times got so heated that it is said that
hundreds of bishops were killed in the combat that followed.
Ultimately, this council and the subsequent ones decided that Jesus
was the Son of God and gave official endorsement to the concept of
the Trinity. They also decided on what content was to be included in
the New Testament and chose four Gospels out of the dozens that
existed at that time.
Christianity as it exists now was therefore codified during this
time into an approved official version and any opinion or text that
differed from the consensus was banned under pain of death.
Thus, Christianity as we know it today came into being as a new
religion independent of Judaism and subsequently spread all over the
Roman Empire that controlled most of Europe.
Since Jesus never claimed to have brought a new religion, it would
be correct to state that Christianity was really an artificial creation that
222 The Future Is for Islam

took Judaism as its foundation and then added layers of new ideas on
top to create a new religion.
The Christian Bible includes the Hebrew Scriptures as the Old
Testament and adds the New Testament that was finally compiled dur-
ing the Third Council of Carthage in 397. Even this council did not settle
the matter, however, and certain books continued to be questioned
until the late 16th century.
Even though Christians claim to be monotheists, the strangest
concept in Christianity is the claim that Jesus is the Son of God and
worthy of worship in addition to, or instead of, God. This raises more
questions than can ever be answered. Is the son a replica of God who
would one day become as great as God? Will the son ever grow up?
Would the father god be supplanted? If so, then would there be two
gods? Does God have more than one son, and if not, will He have more
in the future? These and a hundred other questions come to mind that
no one can answer, and there is no logic in them. Many Christians agree,
and that’s why Western scientists and philosophers gave up Christianity
a long time ago, and most Europeans gave it up more recently.
It is suggested by some Muslim scholars that if the Christians had
only believed in one God, as originally taught by Jesus, then God would
have never sent another prophet after Jesus. In that case, Christianity
would have been the final religion of God.
Islam teaches that there is only one God who is beyond compre-
hension and is not made from anything that we can imagine, as all
matter is a creation of God, including light, time, and subatomic par-
ticles. Anything that humans are capable of touching, sensing, seeing,
or imagining is a creation of God, and therefore God is not made of
that substance. In addition, God does not tolerate any competition to
His power and is unlikely to create a being that will one day challenge
him. Satan challenged Him and will suffer the consequences when the
time granted to him runs out.
According to the Gospel of Barnabas, Jesus knew that he would
be called the Son of God and said that he would be answerable to God
The West 223

about it, even though God knows that Jesus is innocent of this claim.
To refute this point is one of the reasons that he will be sent back to
earth one day.

And behold! Allah will say: “O Jesus the son of Mary!
Didst thou say unto men, worship me and my mother
as gods in derogation of Allah?” He will say: “Glory
to Thee! never could I say what I had no right (to
say). Had I said such a thing, thou wouldst indeed
have known it. Thou knowest what is in my heart,
Thou I know not what is in Thine. For Thou knowest
in full all that is hidden.
Qur’an 5:116

Behold! Allah said: “O Jesus! I will take thee and
raise thee to Myself and clear thee (of the falsehoods)
of those who blaspheme; I will make those who follow
thee superior to those who reject faith, to the Day of
Resurrection: Then shall ye all return unto me,
and I will judge between you of the matters wherein
ye dispute.
Qur’an 3:55

Those who follow Jesus are the Muslims as they hold him in the
highest honor and don’t attribute to him things that he did not claim.
When he comes back in the near future, he will make this point clear,
and it will be the Muslims who will be his supporters.

CHRISTIAN VS. ISLAMIC PROPHECIES

Compared to Christians, especially evangelicals, Muslims don’t have
a huge body of ancient or recent literature on prophecies, nor do they
have a vast prophecy industry with a multitude of organizations and
224 The Future Is for Islam

publishing houses churning out periodicals, books, films, and other
material based on apocalyptic predictions.
As the study of Christian prophecies is a very extensive subject,
we won’t cover everything, but we will briefly look at some ideas that
Christianity has in common with Islam.
According to Islamic belief, the central message that every single
prophet brought was the same. This message was that God exists and
created the universe and there is only one God. Beyond this, the
prophets had different instructions on how to worship God and what
rules to follow based on circumstances. Prophets came to all cultures
and peoples at all times until the last prophet Muhammad (God bless
him). They spoke different languages and belonged to the different
nations that they were sent to. Therefore, it is safe to assume that the
major personalities of China, India, and other cultures were prophets.
This would include Confucius, Buddha, Krishna, Zoroaster, etc.
Judaism, Christianity, and Islam are all Abrahamic religions
because their prophets are all descendants of Abraham, including
Muhammad (God bless him). He was a descendant of Abraham’s son
Ishmael, just as the Jewish prophets, including Jesus, were descendants
of Abraham’s son Isaac (God bless them all).
Because all the prophets got their inspiration from the same
source, namely God, therefore it follows that the prophecies they made
about the future would have been the same. Just as the teachings of
the prophets got lost or were corrupted, similarly their prophecies also
got jumbled up. This is why God had to keep sending more prophets to
keep renewing the message until the time of Muhammad (God bless
him), the final Messenger of God, whose teachings survive to this day.
Another Islamic belief is that messengers of God made predic-
tions about those prophets that would follow them in order to enable
the righteous people of later time to recognize them when they came.
This has led to another thing in common between Judeo-Christianity
and Islam — they all expect a savior to come at some time in the
future. Muslims, in fact, believe in two: the Mahdi (Guided One) and
The West 225

Jesus (God bless him). Because Muhammad (God bless him) was the
last prophet, therefore the Mahdi would not be a prophet but a leader,
and Jesus will be a previous prophet who will reappear and follow
Islam, the religion of the last prophet.
The expectation of the coming of the Antichrist is common to
Judaism, Christianity, and Islam. According to the Messenger of God,
all prophets, including Noah, warned their followers about him.
Similarly, there are several other ideas like Armageddon, The
Beast, and the Rapture that are common to Judeo-Christianity and
Islam. However, their interpretations are different.

ISHMAEL, HAGAR, AND THE WELL

We will look at a few things from the past starting with the biblical
account of Abraham and what happened to Ishmael and his mother
Hagar when Abraham left them in the desert, according to the Bible.

Early the next morning Abraham took some food and
a skin of water and gave them to Hagar. He set them
on her shoulders and then sent her off with the boy.
She went on her way and wandered in the desert
of Beersheba.
When the water in the skin was gone, she put the
boy under one of the bushes.
Then she went off and sat down nearby, about a
bowshot away, for she thought, “I cannot watch the
boy die.” And as she sat there nearby, she began to sob.
God heard the boy crying, and the angel of God
called to Hagar from heaven and said to her, “What is
the matter, Hagar? Do not be afraid; God has heard
the boy crying as he lies there.
Lift the boy up and take him by the hand, for I
will make him into a great nation.”
226 The Future Is for Islam

Then God opened her eyes and she saw a well of
water. So she went and filled the skin with water and
gave the boy a drink.
NIV Bible, Genesis 21:14-19

The well of water that Hagar found is still flowing and is called
the well of Zamzam located in the Ka’ba complex in Mecca.
In Islamic tradition, Hagar ran seven times between two hills, Safa
and Marva, to see if she could spot anyone who could help her and
her son. It was then that the well appeared. In commemoration of this
event, Muslims run between these same two hills as part of the Haj
rites every year and also during the lesser Haj, the Umrah that happens
all year round.
After the appearance of the well, a tribe that was passing by set-
tled in the locality, and Hagar and Ishmael lived with them. Abraham
used to visit his wife and son in Mecca, and he and Ishmael built the
Ka’ba that is the center of Islamic worship.
The great nation that is mentioned in the Bible consists of the
Arabs who are the descendants of Abraham’s son Ishmael.

THE NEW JERUSALEM

And he carried me away in the Spirit to a mountain
great and high, and showed me the Holy City,
Jerusalem, coming down out of heaven from God.
It shone with the glory of God, and its brilliance
was like that of a very precious jewel, like a jasper,
clear as crystal.
NIV Bible Revelation 21: 10-11

The angel who talked with me had a measuring rod
of gold to measure the city, its gates and its walls.
The city was laid out like a square, as long as it
was wide. He measured the city with the rod and
The West 227

The Bible’s description of the “New Jerusalem” sounds very much like the Ka’ba

found it to be 12,000 stadia in length, and as wide
and high as it is long.
NIV Bible Revelation 21: 15-16

I did not see a temple in the city, because the Lord
God Almighty and the Lamb are its temple.
The city does not need the sun or the moon to
shine on it, for the glory of God gives it light, and
the Lamb is its lamp.
The nations will walk by its light, and the kings
of the earth will bring their splendor into it.
On no day will its gates ever be shut, for there
will be no night there.
The glory and honor of the nations will be brought
into it.
Nothing impure will ever enter it, nor will any-
one who does what is shameful or deceitful, but only
those whose names are written in the Lamb’s book
of life.
NIV Bible Revelation 21: 22-27
228 The Future Is for Islam

The prophecies regarding the New Jerusalem are thought by many
to be about Paradise in the next world, but on closer examination, it
seems like the Ka’ba is being described in this vision as reported by John.
To start with, the name New Jerusalem implies that it is a holy
city that is a new version of Jerusalem. In fact, the Muslims started
off facing Jerusalem for prayers and then were told to switch to face the
Ka’ba that subsequently represented the new center for the worship
of the One God, just like Jerusalem did previously.
Verse 21:16 states that it is a cube just like the Ka’ba. A normal city
would not be a cube, but the Ka’ba is.
These are some of the descriptions of the Ka’ba, the House of God,
and Mecca, the land of sanctuary, from the Bible. We will cite some of
them word for word, and summarize others:

1. The New Jerusalem = the Messianic Jerusalem during the age of
the promised savior.
2. In the wilderness or mountains of Paran, where Ishmael and his
mother lived, God brought forth a spring to save them.
3. It is a city towards which Abraham would turn in longing. In fact,
Abraham is said to have originally built the Ka’ba, along with his
son Ishmael.
4. Its residents are the tribe of Kedar (Arab descendants of Ishmael).
5. It is the city of the trustworthy and truthful one, the leader of
humanity.
6. There is no temple therein.
7. The Temple of Solomon in all its glory cannot compare to the
new house.
8. The new house is in the shape of a cube.
9. The cubical house contains a valuable stone. The Ka’ba has a
black stone fixed to one corner.
10. It is festooned with garlands and jewels like a bride.
11. Everyone who opposes it is filled with dread. Fear does not
approach it.
The West 229

12 The health-giving water of life springs from the vicinity of the
cube-shaped house, free for all who desire to drink. The Ka’ba has
the well of Zamzam within its precincts.
13. Its gates are open day and night and never close.
14. Every knee in the world bends before it.
15. There is a road there called the Holy Road, on which no unclean
person may pass.
16. No unclean thing may enter it.
17. Its children are greater in number than the children of Jerusalem.
18. It is crowded with residents and worshippers.
19. Kings bow down before it and lick its dust.
20. The mountains and hills may pass away, but God’s kindness and
peace towards it do not pass away.
21. The treasures of the sea are sent there, and the wealth of the
nations is brought to it.
22. The people gather there from afar.
23. Its land is crowded from the camels and sheep brought there from
East and West, Sheba, Midian, Paran, and Kedar. The men of
Maarib serve it.
24. There is a holy mountain there to which the nations come to
worship God.
25. Everyone there is equally free to worship God.
26. The name of God is written on the foreheads of its people.
27. The people gathered around the house restrain themselves from
the call of nature.
28. The man bares his head, and the woman covers her head. They
cover from their loins to their legs, and shave the hair of their
heads (the clothing worn during the state of ritual dress and the
shaving of the head upon completion of the rites of pilgrimage).

All the above descriptions fit the Ka’ba, where the one and only
God is worshipped 24 hours a day, seven days a week, and this has
never come to a stop for the last 1,400 years. And today, almost a
230 The Future Is for Islam

quarter of humanity faces the Ka’ba every day when praying to God
in every corner of the world.

MILLENNIALISM

Blessed and holy are those who have part in the first
resurrection. The second death has no power over
them, but they will be priests of God and of Christ
and will reign with him for a thousand years.
NIV Bible Revelation 20:6

Millennialism is a belief expressed in some Christian denominations
and literature, that there will be a thousand-year-long Golden Age or
Paradise on Earth, where “Christ will reign” prior to the final judgment
and future eternal state. This belief is primarily derived from the Book
of Revelation 20:1-6.
In Christianity, this is not the “end of the world,” but the penulti-
mate age, prior to which it is believed that the world will end. Some
believe that between the millennium and the final end of the world,
there will be a brief period to allow a final battle with Satan, or a time
of the Antichrist, followed by the last judgment.
There is a difference of opinion about Christ’s thousand-year rule
on earth regarding whether it directly precedes or immediately follows
the Second Coming of Jesus and the Day of Judgment.
Premillennialists see Christ’s Second Advent as preceding the
millennium, thereby separating the second coming from the final judg-
ment. Postmillennialists see Christ’s second coming as subsequent to
the millennium and concurrent with the final judgment.
Most current-day evangelical Christians support Premillennialism
and believe that once Jesus appears, he will usher in a golden age
lasting a thousand years. In fact, even Adolf Hitler was a subscriber
to this viewpoint, and this was the basis of his claim for establish-
ing a Thousand Year Reich. Similarly, the present-day evangelicals in
The West 231

America are bent on starting wars that will bring about the second
coming of Jesus and start the thousand-year-long reign of Christ.
An Islamic viewpoint on Millennialism would support the idea of
Postmillennialism, as Muslims would argue that the Islamic empire
lasted over 1,000 years and this was, in fact, the golden millennium
referred to. The worship of God in the New Jerusalem in Mecca has
lasted over a thousand years, and now Jesus is due back at the end of
that to fight the final conflict with the Antichrist.
In Islamic belief, no one can know for sure the date of the end of the
world, except God, but it is predicted that when Jesus appears, there
will be very little time left. Because advances in technology are causing
the world to shrink, time is passing ever faster and events are hap-
pening ever more quickly; ideas and technologies that may have taken
hundreds of years before now take days to spread all over the world.
As a result, not only do good things happen at a faster pace, but
bad things do as well. According to Muslim belief, the end of the world
will come neither because of a natural nor man-made disaster, but it
will happen when there is no longer anyone left who believes in God,
and people will have become evil. The remaining humanity will be of
no more use for God, and He will then finish off the world.
God expects people to worship Him as the one and only God.
Today, Muslims are the only people who meet this criterion, therefore
it follows that the earth will continue to exist until no more Muslims
remain, and then God will put an end to it.
Since there are over 1.5 billion Muslims today and they are increas-
ing in number, we may have a few hundred years left before they all
lose their faith. But because Muslims have as much of a propensity as
anyone else to degenerate and lose their belief, especially if given a
long-enough period of prosperity, we are most likely to have much less
than 1,000 years left. This is especially so because time is passing at a
faster pace.
Therefore, the millennium of the golden age can be said to have
passed already, and it was the thousand-year-long golden age of Islam.
232 The Future Is for Islam

Islamic prophecies have no mention of a thousand-year period after
the coming of Jesus.

THE ABOMINATION OF DESOLATION

“So when you see standing in the holy place ‘the
abomination that causes desolation, spoken of through
the prophet Daniel — let the reader understand —
then let those who are in Judea flee to the mountains.”
NIV Bible Matthew 24:15-16

Jesus spoke of the abomination of desolation in answer to the disci-
ples’ question, “When shall these things be, and what shall be the sign
of thy coming, and of the end of the world?”
There is difference of opinion among Christians about what the
abomination of desolation is and when it will occur.
The thing that is generally agreed upon is that it refers to the
desecration of the temple in Jerusalem that was dedicated to the wor-
ship of God. The thing that is most abominable to God is the worship
of anything or anyone other than Him. Some think that the abomi-
nation is the placing of an idol in the temple or the worship of false
gods there.
Some Christians believe that the abomination of desolation already
occurred during the Roman occupation of Jerusalem prior to its
destruction, and some believe that it will occur before the Second
Coming of Christ.
Muslim prophecies don’t have anything to say about the abomi-
nation of desolation. However, if they were to have an opinion on this
matter, then it would be that the abomination of desolation refers to
the occupation of Jerusalem by the Israelis and their interference in the
worship of God at the Al-Aqsa Mosque.
In Islamic belief, Solomon was one of the great prophets of God.
The Temple of Solomon was dedicated to the worship of God, and it
The West 233

is considered to be venerable to Muslims who look upon the good
people of that time as brothers in faith.
When the Jews did not keep their commitments to God, He allowed
the temple to be destroyed by the Babylonians in 586 AD. Later, He
relented and allowed the Second Temple to be built. When the Jews
again became corrupt, the Romans destroyed it for the second time in
70 AD. When the Muslims arrived in Jerusalem in 638 AD, they found
nothing at the site but rubble and heaps of rubbish because of which
Caliph Umar ibn al-Khattab was very distressed. The Al-Aqsa Mosque
was constructed, and God has been worshipped there ever since. This
is the same God to whom the First and Second Temples were dedicated,
although the method of worship is different based on God’s instructions
to the Messenger of God. The Al-Aqsa Mosque is, therefore, the Third
Temple and has been on the site for the last fourteen centuries.
Since the Israeli occupation of Jerusalem, all sorts of abomina-
tions have been occurring in and around the holy places. Worshippers
of God are being persecuted and killed in the mosque and its vicinity,
and access to the mosque is severely restricted based on Israeli pref-
erence. Prayer services are held in the shadow of jack-booted Israeli
soldiers toting machine guns.
In addition, the Zionists are continuously planning to demolish
the mosque and build what they call the Third Temple on the site. There
are several organizations dedicated to this, and they have the designs
and material ready to start work as soon as they can gain control of
the site.
Consider the city of Mecca. In deference to God, there are no
brothels there, no nightclubs with drinking and dancing; nor are gay
rallies held on the streets of Mecca. Yet all these things are happening
in Jerusalem. To Muslims, these are abominations. The worst possible
abomination, however, is to restrict people from worshipping God.
According to Muslim prophecy, when the Mahdi comes and Jesus
returns, then Al-Aqsa Mosque will be repaired and rebuilt, and God will
again be freely worshipped there.
234 The Future Is for Islam

TRIBULATION

For then there will be great distress, unequaled from
the beginning of the world until now — and never to
be equaled again.
NIV Bible, Matthew 24:21

Christians believe that the tribulation will be a seven-year-long period
of time during which believers will experience worldwide persecution
and be purified and strengthened by it.
There are a variety of opinions on when the tribulation will occur.
Some believe that it already happened when Roman legions destroyed
Jerusalem. Others believe that it will happen in the future. Pretribula-
tionists believe that all Christians then alive will be taken bodily up
to Heaven (called the Rapture) before the Tribulation begins. Post-
tribulationists believe that Christians will not be taken up into Heaven
until Christ returns at the end of the Tribulation. There are many other
opinions as well.
From the Islamic viewpoint, the time of tribulation is already here
and the Muslims, as the true believers, are the victims. Every depre-
dation known to man is being inflicted upon them, especially on the
people of the Holy Land, the Palestinians.
Muslims are having their lands invaded, and men, women, and
children are being killed without mercy. Future generations are being
poisoned by the use of depleted uranium ordinance. People are having
their countries and their livelihoods destroyed. They are being perse-
cuted everywhere, and abuse is being heaped upon their religion. The
list goes on and on.
The Messenger of God predicted that a time would come when
Muslims would be severely persecuted and no home would be left
untouched by this.
It would be hard to imagine a tribulation that could be worse than
what the Muslims are going through during the present time. It is likely,
The West 235

however, that their tormentors have even worse torments planned.
God also has a showdown planned to put an end to this, and relief is
now likely to be very near.

THE ANTICHRIST

In Christianity, the Antichrist has come to mean a person, image of
a person, or other entity that is the embodiment of evil and utterly
opposed to truth, while convincingly disguised as wholly good and a
bringer of truth.
The Antichrist is variously understood to be an individual, an
organization, or a system of government that is evil and will introduce
a false religion. Many who consider the Antichrist to be an individual
believe that he will set himself up in the temple of God, on the false
pretense that he is God Himself. He will come in the End Times during
the tribulation before the appearance of Jesus and will be destroyed
by Jesus in the battle of Armageddon.
Islamic prophecies agree with Christianity on this matter. The
Messenger of God said that every prophet since Noah has warned his
people about the Antichrist.
Muslims refer to the Antichrist as the Masih Ad-Dajjal (false
Messiah). Like the Christian belief that there will be many false
prophets, the Messenger of God talked about many deceivers (daj-
jals) who will come and claim to be prophets. However, the worst
trial will be the Antichrist, who will come in the last days and invite
people to a false religion and claim to be God and demand to be
worshipped.
The Antichrist was described in the sayings of the Messenger of
God in great detail. His physical appearance was described, and it
was foretold that he would have great powers, including the ability to
bring a dead person back to life.
The Antichrist is described as having a large group of Jewish
followers fighting on his behalf, while the Muslims will be fighting
236 The Future Is for Islam

alongside Jesus. The Antichrist will ultimately be killed by Jesus in
Lod, a city that is located near the Tel Aviv airport in Israel.
The Antichrist is likely to be brought forward by the same inter-
ests that brought us 9/11 and the War on Terror, and which are planning
the New World Order. The same movie production studios that are
busy producing special effects, such as videos depicting beheading,
speeches by dead people, etc., attributed to Muslims, will be the sup-
port team for the Antichrist, who is likely to be no more than a good
actor selected for the job.
The Israeli army will be the army of the Antichrist supported by
whichever country chooses to back him, and it will be the Muslims
with Jesus as their leader who will destroy them.

SECOND COMING OF JESUS

The passages in the Bible that are cited for the belief in the Second
Coming of Christ refer to the “Son of Man” coming in latter times and
reviving the Kingdom of God. There is ambiguity in this term, as Jesus
was born without a father, so the description of “Son of Man” does not
appear suitable. Nevertheless, the vast majority of Christians believe
that Jesus will return in the End Times.
Many Muslims would argue that the Son of Man that Jesus referred
to was the next great prophet that was due, and it was the Messenger
of God. This would be in keeping with the belief that every prophet
described the next prophet that is due to appear, in order to enable
people living at the later time to recognize him.
In the Gospel of Barnabas, which is rejected by Christians, it is
very clearly stated by Jesus that a great Messenger of God is due after
him, and that near the end of time, he himself will return.
In quite a few authentic sayings of the Messenger of God, it is
declared very unambiguously that Jesus will be coming back in the last
days, and he will kill the Antichrist.
The main twist in the Muslim version of the second coming of
Jesus is that he will be a Muslim and become the leader of the Islamic
The West 237

community, the Caliph. He will refute the belief that he is the son of
God and invite the Christians to Islam.

THE WHORE OF BABYLON

One of the seven angels who had the seven bowls came
and said to me, “Come, I will show you the punish-
ment of the great prostitute, who sits on many waters.
With her the kings of the earth committed adultery
and the inhabitants of the earth were intoxicated
with the wine of her adulteries.”
NIV Bible Revelation 17:1-2

Chapter 18 in the Book of Revelation describes in spine-chilling detail
the destruction of a great and wealthy kingdom that will rebel against
God. The kings and merchants of the world will cry for the great loss
they will suffer, while the saints, apostles, and prophets will rejoice as
God judges the Whore of Babylon for the way she treated them.
This great country will be brought down by God sending a mighty
angel to slam a boulder into the sea, and it will suffer plague, death,
mourning, and famine and will be consumed by fire. The end will be
sudden, and people will cry, “In one hour your doom has come!”
Some Christians believe that the Bible here refers to Iraq because
that is where ancient Babylon was located. But this certainly cannot
apply to Babylon, or Iraq, as its destruction wasn’t a cause of nearly
as much grief to the world as is described for the Whore of Babylon.
In addition, Iraq’s destruction didn’t come about at the hands of God,
as is stated in the Bible.
While Islam has no equivalent prophecies, there are many Chris-
tians, including Americans, who believe that the Whore of Babylon
refers to America. It is certainly a sufficiently important country in world
history to merit mention in the Bible, but maybe not indispensable
enough to escape the wrath of God if it goes astray.
238 The Future Is for Islam

ARMAGEDDON

The word Armageddon comes from the Hebrew name Har-Magedon,
which literally means “Mountain of Megiddo,” and can also be trans-
lated as “the mountain of assembly of troops.” This place is located in
Israel south of the city of Nazareth.
In Christian prophecies, Armageddon is anticipated as the final
battle between the forces of good and the forces of evil. During the
battle, the kings of the earth will unite against God’s appointed king,
Jesus, and will be defeated by him.
Evangelical Christians believe that the righteous believers are the
Israelis and their Christian American supporters who will fight the evil
people, presumably Muslims, who will come to destroy Israel.
However, Muslims believe that it is they who are the righteous
believers and will be fighting on the side of Jesus, and it is they who
will win this battle.
While Muslims do not use the term “Armageddon,” the sayings of
the Messenger of God mention that there will be a great battle during
which the Romans (European Christians) will besiege the Muslims along
with their leader, the Mahdi, and will be defeated. In the same battle
or a later one, the Muslims will witness the appearance of Jesus, who
will lead them to destroy the Antichrist and his Jewish army.

GOG AND MAGOG

Blessed and holy are those who have part in the first
resurrection. The second death has no power over
them, but they will be priests of God and of Christ
and will reign with him for a thousand years. When
the thousand years are over, Satan will be released
from his prison and will go out to deceive the nations
in the four corners of the earth — Gog and Magog —
to gather them for battle. In number they are like the
The West 239

sand on the seashore. They marched across the breadth
of the earth and surrounded the camp of God’s people,
the city he loves. But fire came down from heaven
and devoured them. And the devil, who deceived them,
was thrown into the lake of burning sulfur, where the
beast and the false prophet had been thrown. They
will be tormented day and night for ever and ever.
NIV Bible Revelation 20:6-10

There is much confusion in Christianity about who or what the Gog
and Magog are. They are variously presented as humans, supernatural
beings (giants or demons), nations, or as lands. They will attack Israel
in the End Times and will be destroyed there by God.
The Islamic view of Gog and Magog is very much the same. They
are mentioned in the Qur’an:

But there is a ban on any population which We have
destroyed: that they shall not return,
Until the Gog and Magog (people) are let
through (their barrier), and they swiftly swarm from
every hill.
Then will the true promise draw nigh (of fulfil-
ment): then behold! the eyes of the Unbelievers will
fixedly stare in horror: “Ah! Woe to us! we were indeed
heedless of this; nay, we truly did wrong!”
Qur’an 21:95-97

There is just as much uncertainty among Muslims about who
these people are as there is among Christians. The sayings of the
Messenger of God state that they will emerge at the time that Jesus is
present in Jerusalem, and God will inform Jesus to take his followers
to Mount Sinai to save them. Then Gog and Magog will invade the Holy
Land, and Jesus will pray to God to rid his followers of this problem,
240 The Future Is for Islam

upon which God will send a disease or insects to attack the Gog and
Magog, and they will all die as one. After that, their bodies will be taken
away by birds (or cargo planes) and thrown away.
The interesting thought here is that the Qur’an says that the unbe-
lievers will stare in horror when Gog and Magog appear. Based on this
Qur’anic verse and the hadith mentioned earlier we know:

1) Gog and Magog will invade Palestine after Jesus has returned and
defeated the Antichrist.
2) Jesus will take his followers to Mount Sinai.
3) Gog and Magog will not be attacking Muslims in general, as the
pilgrimage in Mecca will continue as normal.
4) It is the unbelievers who will stare in horror when the Gog and
Magog attack, and will wish that they had taken heed and not
done wrong.

Based on the above information, it is possible to surmise that the
sequence of events is that once Jesus defeats the Antichrist and his
Jewish followers, which would be the Israeli army, then Jesus will apply
the Islamic principles of war to the defeated Israeli population, and
pardon them.
Despite everything, these people will still be refusing to believe
in Jesus and will not believe in Islam, which Jesus will be preaching.
Therefore, they will be punished by God Himself, who will unleash Gog
and Magog on them.

THE BEAST

He also forced everyone, small and great, rich and
poor, free and slave, to receive a mark on his right
hand or on his forehead, so that no one could buy or
sell unless he had the mark, which is the name of
the beast or the number of his name. This calls for
The West 241

wisdom. If anyone has insight, let him calculate
the number of the beast, for it is man’s number. His
number is 666.
NIV Bible Revelation 13:16-18

The Beast, also called “The Beast from the Earth,” is believed to refer
to an entity controlled by the Antichrist. Beyond this, speculation about
who or what the Beast is, is a debatable subject open to conjecture,
as is the meaning of the number 666.
In the Qur’an, the Beast is mentioned; it is uncertain whether the
reference points to the same thing as Christian prophecies do..

And when the Word is fulfilled against them (the
unjust), we shall produce from the earth a beast to
(face) them: He will speak to them, for that mankind
did not believe with assurance in Our Signs.
Qur’an 27:82

There is also mention of the Beast in the sayings of the Messenger
of God. He pointed out an exact location near Mecca where it would
emerge and said that it would have the rod of Moses and the ring
of Solomon. With the ring, it will mark people as believers or unbe-
lievers and they will start addressing each other as “O Believer,” and
“O Unbeliever.”
The appearance of the Beast will occur a very short time before
or after the rising of the sun from the west, and it will be one of the
signs of God upon seeing which repentance will no longer be accepted.
In Islamic prophecies, there is no direct connection between
the appearance of the Beast and the second coming of Jesus or the
Antichrist. Rather, the prophecies seem to imply that the Beast will
appear at a time when there are very few people left who continue to
believe in God. This will probably be a time many hundreds of years
after the Second Coming of Jesus.
242 The Future Is for Islam

THE RAPTURE

The Rapture is an event in certain systems of Christian eschatology
(the study of the End Times), whereby it is believed that all Christians
will be taken from earth by God into heaven. Although almost all forms
of Christianity believe that those who are “saved” will enter Heaven,
the term “Rapture” is usually applied specifically to the belief that
Christians will be taken into heaven prior to the Second Coming of
Christ, and there will be a period of time where non-Christians will still
be left on earth before Christ arrives to set up his earthly kingdom.
There are many opinions on when the Rapture will occur. In the
pre-tribulation view, it will happen before the tribulation befalls the
Christians just prior to the coming of Jesus. The post-tribulation view is
that the rapture will happen after Jesus comes, and all good Christians
will suffer the tribulation together. There are many other variations of
opinion on this subject.
Many Christians believe that they will be lifted up to heaven in
bodily form during the Rapture.
In Islamic prophecies, an event is predicted that is very much like
the Rapture. It is not mentioned in the Qur’an, but is mentioned in the
sayings of the Messenger of God, which state that right before the end
of the world, God will send a fragrant wind that will take the life of all
believers who have even a speck of faith in their hearts, after which
only evil people will be left on earth. This will save the believers from
witnessing the horrors and turmoil that will follow, leading up to the
folding up of the heavens and earth by God.
Conclusion
The main point of this book has been to show that the followers of
Islam have a few extremely tough years ahead of them, but once
they are past this period, there’s a glorius future to look forward to.
The reason for the optimism is that there are sayings of the Prophet
Muhammad (God bless him) that almost exactly match up with current
events and predict that the Muslims will emerge out of their troubles
as the victors.
Out of all the information that has been presented in this book,
people may debate the correctness of some point of detail or the other,
but it is to be hoped that most, if not all, readers will agree on the
major points:

1) The Mahdi is a leader that God will send;
2) The Antichrist will appear;
3) Jesus will come to defeat the Antichrist and lead the Muslims;
4) A united Muslim Caliphate will be established;
5) These events will occur very soon.

Beyond these main points, we are free to debate the details, such
as which battle will be fought first, which country will play what role,
in what year exactly the events will occur, etc.
It is safe to say that the most exciting thing that the Muslims look
forward to is the coming of the Mahdi. Once that happens, then all the
rest of the prophecies will fall into place, and the light at the end of
the tunnel will become visible.

243
244 The Future Is for Islam

So when will the Mahdi come? While God says that no one knows
the exact time of the end of the world, the Prophet did say that some
Muslims would, in fact, know the exact time and location for the com-
ing of the Mahdi. That is why they will travel to Mecca looking for him,
and will forcibly pledge allegiance to him.
My own conclusion is that the state of the Muslim world will
deteriorate much beyond what it is now, if that is at all possible. The
final piece of news to watch out for is massive violence during the Haj
pilgrimage in one particular year. Once that happens, then expect the
Mahdi to be revealed and the rest of the events to unfold.
GLOSSARY

Al-Malhamah Al-Kubrah The Great War
Ayah Verse
Bayt al-Maqdis Tomb of the Rock in Jerusalem
Dajjal Deceiver, Antichrist
Dhu al-Hijjah Twelfth month of Islamic calendar,
month of Haj pilgrimage
Dinar Form of money
Dirham Form of money
Eidul-Adha Celebration at end of Haj pilgrimage on the
twelfth month of the Islamic calendar
Fajr prayer Morning prayer
Hadith The sayings of the Prophet (the same
spelling is used for both singular
and plural)
Haj The yearly Islamic pilgrimage to Mecca
Hajare Aswad Black Stone attached to the Ka’ba
Hijri Islamic calendar
Imam Leader, prayer leader
Irdab A measure
Ijtehad A consensus of Islamic scholars on an
issue of law
Jizyah Tax on non-Muslims
Ka’ba The cubic structure within the Grand
Mosque in Mecca that Muslims turn
towards during prayer
Kafir Unbeliever
Kalimah Word
Kiswah Cloth covering
Kunya Honorific title, surname
Maqaame Ibraheem Station of Abraham, adjacent to the Ka’ba
Mahdi Leader, the promised leader of the Muslims

245
246 The Future Is for Islam

Masih-ad-Dajjal The false messiah, Antichrist
Minaret Tower of a mosque
Mudd Form of money
Muezzin The person who calls to prayer
Muharram First month of Islamic calendar
Munafiq Hypocrite Muslim who does not really believe
Qafiz A measure
Qiyamah Doomsday, Day of Judgment
Soor Trumpet that will be blown at the End of
the World
Sufyaani Tyrannical ruler, descendant of Abu Sufyaan
Sunnah The way of the Prophet
Surah Chapters of the Qur’an
Shawwal Tenth Islamic month
Talbiyah Intention
Tawaf Walking around the Ka’ba
Ummah Muslim community
Umrah A shortened version of the Haj pilgrimage that
is performed in Mecca all year round
Yawm al-Khalas Day of Purification
BOOKS CITED OR RECOMMENDED

The Gospel of Barnabas (1993) New York: A&B Publishers Group
NIV Study Bible (2002) Grand Rapids: Zondervan
The Holy Qur’an, Abdullah Yusuf Ali (2000) UK: Wordsworth
The Bible, The Qur’an and Science, Maurice Bucaille (2003) New York:
Tahrike Tarsile Qur’an
The Singularity is Near, Ray Kurzweil (2005) New York: Viking
The Age of Spiritual Machines, Ray Kurzweil (2000) New York: Penguin
The Sahih Al-Bukhari
The Sahih Al-Muslim
The Venture of Islam (Volumes 1, 2 & 3), Marshall G. H. Hodgson (1977)
Chicago: The University of Chicago Press
A History of Islamic Societies, Ira M. Lapidus (2005) Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press
The Clash of Civilizations and the Remaking of World Order, Samuel
P. Huntington (1997) New York: Touchstone
Jesus Will Return, Harun Yahya (2001) London: Ta-Ha Publishers
Signs of the Last Day, Harun Yahya (2004) McLean: Global Publishing
The End Times and Mahdi, Harun Yahya (2004) McLean: Global
Publishing
A Call to an Islamic Union, Harun Yahya (2006) McLean: Global
Publishing
Jesus Did Not Die, Harun Yahya (2006) McLean: Global Publishing
The Qur’an, M. A. S. Abdel Haleem (2005) New York: Oxford
The Holy Qur’an, Abdullah Yusuf Ali (2000) Hertfordshire: Wordsworth

247
WEB SITES CITED OR RECOMMENDED

Islamic Sites
Harun Yahya : http://www.harunyahya.com/
The Future is for Islam (The inspiration for this book): http://
www.geocities.com/muslimapocalyptic/future_is_for_islam.htm
Sufi interpretation of End Time events:
http://www.muhammadan reality.com/
The Caliphate: http://www.caliphate.eu/
Dinar Standard: http://www.dinarstandard.com/
Islamic City: http://www.islamicity.com/

Online Bookstores
http://islamicbookstore.com/
http://soundvisioncanada.com/
http://www.astrolabe.com/

Qur’an
MP3 Arabic Recitation: http://www.al-quran.ca/en_index.html
Three different English translations:
http://cwis.usc.edu/dept/MSA/quran/
Translations in various languages:
http://www.islamicity.com/mosque/Quran/
Translation in English by Abdullah Yusuf Ali:
http://www.islamicity.com/mosque/surai.htm

Hadith
A searchable database of Hadith:
http://www.usc.edu/dept/MSA/reference/searchhadith.html

Christian Sites
Gospel of Barnabas: http://www.barnabas.net/
Christian Writings: http://www.earlychristianwritings.com/
Bible: http://www.biblegateway.com/

248
Web Sites Cited or Recommended 249

Christian Prophecies
Rapture Ready: http://www.rr-bb.com/
Lampholder publications: http://www.lampholderpub.com/
Mission of Maitreya: http://www.maitreya.org/
Texe Marrs: http://www.texemarrs.com/

Alternative News Sites
Jeff Rense: http://www.rense.com
Michael Rivero: http://www.whatreallyhappened.com
Alex Jones: http://www.prisonplanet.com/
Justin Raimondo: http://www.antiwar.com/

Israeli Sites
http://www.templemountfaithful.org/
http://www.templeinstitute.org/
http://www.donmeh-west.com/

Information Sites
CIA World Factbook:
https://www.cia.gov/cia/publications/factbook/index.html
Mapping the Global Future:
http://www.dni.gov/nic/NIC_globaltrend2020.html
Bernard Lewis map of the Middle East:
http://cloakanddagger.de/media/Tarpley/lewis%20plan%20map.htm
INDEX
A Antioch:
Abdul-Nasser, Gamal caves in, location of Muslim
Egyptian leader referenced in treasures referenced in
hadith, 50 hadith, 90
Abu Dawud: Arab-Israeli conflict, referenced in
hadith scholar, 41 hadith, 56-57
Adam: Ark of the Covenant:
creation of, discussed in Gospel of contents of, 161
Barnabas, 15 to be brought forth by the Mahdi,
Afghanistan, 91, 160
invasion of, possibly referenced in Armageddon:
hadith, 53, 61-63 end of the Antichrist, 112-116
Al Abdal (servants of God), 146 in Christian prohecy, 238
Allah. See God Ar-Ray. See Tehran
Al-Aqsa Mosque, as the Third
Temple, 233 B
Antichrist, the: Babylon, Whore of:
appearance of, 85, 129, 162 referring to America, 237
in sequence of events, 92-93 Baghdad:
army of, 114 destruction of, referenced in
in Islamic and Christian prophecy, hadith, 57
235-236 Bani Israel. See Children of Israel
killing of, by Jesus, 104-105, 114, Barnabas, Gospel of:
130, 166, 236 report of Jesus’ discussing the
cutting a person in half and restoring creation of man, 14-15
to one piece, 101-102, 164 rejected by Christianity, 236
deceptive actions employed by, 99 Battle of Kalb:
details regarding, 96-107 different from Armageddon, 84, 153
physical description, 97, 99, 103, See also Great War
119, 162 Beast, the, 127-128
possessing supernatural appearance of, 173-174
powers, 164 in Christian and Islamic prophecy,
pursuit of, by Jesus, 154 240-241
referenced by the Prophet mentioned in Qur’an, 173
Muhammad, 118-120 different from Antichrist, 127-128
time of appearance of, 88 marking foreheads of believers and
tribulation of, 163 unbelievers, 173
Index 251

Bible, the: Children of Israel (Bani Israel), 94, 140
scientific inaccuracies in, 12, as new converts or Muslim
Big Bang theory: descendants of Jews:
similarities to destruction and soldiers of, dispatched by the
subsequent resurrection of Mahdi to re-conquer
universe, 178 Istanbul, 161
Bin Laden, Osama, 62 Christianity:
Black Operations, 211-213 becoming defunct as a religion, 106
September 11, 2001, attack, evangelical Christians of America,
211, 236 217-218
Boutros-Ghali, Boutros backers of wars in Middle
Egyptian ruler referenced in East, 217
hadith, 50 First Council of Nicaea:
Breeze from the south, 128-131, 174 decreed Jesus’ status as Son of
See also Rapture God, 221
Bukhari founded by Saul/Paul, 220
hadith scholar, 41, 110 Christian vs. Islamic prophecies,
223-225
C Millennialism, 230-232
Caliphate (The New Caliphate): Constantinople. See Istanbul
as benign entity, 191
as form of government for Muslim D
countries, 190 Dajjal. See Antichrist
based on belief in one God, 190 Day of Judgment. See Judgment Day
communications system, 199 Day of Resurrection, 137
educational system, 198 Doomsday:
expected opposition to: blowing of trumpet on, 136
internal, 200-201 commencement of, 176-178
external, 201-202 different from Judgment Day, 13
federal structure, 195-196 events preceding, 130
fight for, 60 occurring on a Friday, 177
gubernatorial structure, 196-197
health care system, 199 E
judiciary of, 197-198 Euphrates:
local administration, 197 halting of, 145
new United Nations established as portent of the Mahdi, 59
under, 203-205
scientific and technological F
programs, 198-199 Fire in Yemen, 175
252 The Future Is for Islam

as one of the signs of the Last Hour, Hitler, Adolf:
134-135 referenced in hadith, 141-142
Hussein, Sadam:
G Iraqui dictator referenced in
God: hadith, 54-55
existence of:
discussion regarding, 11-14 I
God not wanting to prove His Idolatry:
existence, 14 as one of the signs of the Last
ninety-nine names for, featured in Hour, 132-133
Qur’an, 20 India:
putting end to all communities conquest of, 95
except Islam, 110-111 concurring arrival of Jesus, 95
sovereignty of, 191-194 Iran:
Gog and Magog 117-121, 171 attack on, referenced in hadith,
appearance of, 169-170 147-148
besieging Jesus and his Iran-Iraq War, referenced in hadith,
companions, 120 54, 143
invading Palestine after killing of Iraq:
Antichrist by Jesus, 170 example of destructive methods
Great War (Al-Malhamah Al-Kubrah): employed by the West, 209
different from Armageddon, invasion of, referenced in hadith,
84, 153 61-63
in Christian and Islamic prophecy, sanctions against, referenced in
238-239 hadith, 56
in sequence of events, 92-93 Islam:
place of assembly of Muslims belief in one God, 9, 19
during, 113 God’s promise of Islam’s
See also Battle of Kalb acknowledgment as premier
See also World War III religion, 38
Islamic vs. Christian prophecies,
H 223-225
Hadith: Israel, state of:
age of, 42 as root cause of clash between
Harith, son of Hirrath: Islam and the West, 141
preparing Muslims to accept the Israfil, angel, the:
Mahdi, 145 blowing trumpet (Soor):
providing protection to the initiating destruction of universe,
Mahdi, 145 177-178
Index 253

initiating resurrection of physical description, 108, 110, 120,
humans, 129 130, 165
Istanbul (Constantinople): second coming of, 236-237
conquest of, referenced in hadith, stepping back to let the Mahdi
91-94 lead in prayer, 99, 104, 111,
in sequence of events, 92-93 113, 165
story of, as told in Gospel of
J Barnabas, 167-168
Jerusalem: time of peace established by,
capture of, during Great War, 157 105-106
flourishing of, in sequence of See also Judas
events, 92-3 Judas:
headquarters of new Caliphate, 196 died on cross instead of Jesus,
New Jerusalem, The, 226-230 106, 167
similarities with Ka’ba, Judgment Day:
228-229 different from Doomsday, 13
Jesus, son of Mary, 97, 99, 107-112 length of, 180
Antichrist dissolving at sight of, 86, See also Resurrection
99, 104
return of, 162, 165 K
breaking cross, killing pigs, Ka’ba (center of Islamic worship):
abolishing Jizyah, 105-106, black stone attached to (Hajare
109-110, 166-167 Aswad), 151
bringing end to all communities built by Abraham and Ishmael, 226
except Islam, 114 destruction of, 133-134
burial place of, 117 similarities with New Jerusalem,
death of, 171 228-229
descent of, 85, 86 Khalifa, Rashid, Dr:
as sign of coming of the Last discovery of Qur’an code based on
Hour, 110 number nineteen, 29-35
did not claim to be the Son of Khurasan:
God, 220 army from, constituents of the
did not die on the cross, 106 Mahdi’s army, 77-79
expected time of descent of, 88, geographical area referenced in
114, 119 hadith, 62, 148
killing the Antichrist, 104-105, Kuwait:
114, 115 leader of, fighting army of the
marriage, children, and death of, Mahdi, 143
116-117 referenced in hadith, 143
254 The Future Is for Islam

L Medina:
Landslides: abandonment of, 13
as one of the signs of the Last cleansed of evil on Yawm al-Khalas
Hour, 134 (Day of Purification), 163
in three places, 175 destruction of, in sequence of
Lod: events, 92-93
city near Tel Aviv where Jesus kills experiencing earth tremors, 100,
the Antichrist, 107, 115 104, 163
safe from the Antichrist, 100
M Messenger of God:
Mahdi, the (Muhammad, son of sayings of,
Abdullah), 62-74, 147 See Hadith
as supreme leader and reformer See also Muhammad, Prophet
of Muslim community, 160 Middle East:
banners from the west, as signs of conflicts in, discussed in hadith,
appearance of, 55 49-51
caliphate established by, 80, 160 Millennialism (in Christianity), 230-232
death of, 169 Mina:
emerging with banner of the battles in, during year of appearance
Prophet, 153 of the Mahdi, 66, 148
expected length of rule, 89, 160 Minaret of Jesus:
golden age during reign of, 121-122 location of expected descent of
physical description, 72, 73, 89, Jesus, 108
112, 150 white minaret of Umayyad Mosque
meaning of name, 90 in Damascus, 108
peace treaty signed by, with Miracles:
Romans, 159 failure to convince people to
signs of coming of, 63-66, 148-150 believe in God, 18
sinking of the army that comes to performed by prophets through
kill him in the desert, 74-75 history, 26
time of appearance, 115 Muhammad, Prophet, the:
wars to be fought by, 154-155 confirmed the coming of Jesus, 110
year one of, 151-159 received revelation through the
years two to five of, 160-161 angel Gabriel, 13
year six of, 161-162 referenced Gog and Magog,
year seven of, 162-165 117-118
Mecca: sayings of, See hadith
free of abominations, 233 Multiple heavens and earths:
safe from the Antichrist, 100 mentioned in Qur’an, 176
Index 255

Muslim: miraculous qualities of, 26
hadith scholar, 41, 110 providing sequence of events in
Muslim countries: creation, 29
challenged by maladministration, scientific accuracy of, 12, 28
187-188
GDP statistics, 184-186 R
population statistics, 181-182 Rapture, the, 128-131, 174
potential economic power of, in Christian and Islamic prophecy,
182-187 130, 242
Muslims: See also Breeze from the south
only true believers in one God, 23 Religious knowledge:
internal rifts as cause of downfall loss of, 131-132, 172
for, 42-46 as sign of the Last Hour, 131
lack of unity as greatest challenge Resurrection:
for, 36 recreation of the earth by God, 179
mainstream Muslims as righteous recreation of humans from spinal
Muslims, 44 column DNA cells, 179
See also Judgment Day
N
Nukrashy Pasha, Mahmoud: S
Egyptian leader possibly referenced Sadat, Anwar:
in hadith, 50 Egyptian ruler referenced in hadith,
49, 51, 142
P Satan:
Prophet, the (see Muhammad, Prophet) creation of, discussed in Gospel of
Prophets: Barnabas, 15
messengers sent by God, 17-18 stone pillar representing, 66
September 11, 2001, attack, 236
Q See also Black Operations
Qahtaani, the: Saudi Arabia:
holder of the caliphate after the possible invasion of, referenced in
Mahdi and Jesus, 122-123, hadith, 63
171-172 Sham (See Syria)
Qur’an, the: Shuayb, son of Salih, 61
as the Word of God, 9 appearance of, 145, 151
code based on number nineteen, bearer of the Mahdi’s banner, 64,
29-35 79, 82, 153
initialed chapters in, 31-34 fighting the Tyrant, 147
mathematical miracle of, 29-35 leading army from Khurasan, 80, 81
256 The Future Is for Islam

Smoke, the: descendant of Abu Sufyaan, 144
as one of ten signs of the Last dispatching army against the
Hour, 124 Mahdi, 152
creating the “night of three nights,” falling of army of, 152
126, 172-173
possible scientific explanations U
of, 124 United Nations:
Sound, as building block of matter, 178 new United Nations created under
Spinal bone: New Caliphate, 204-205
from which bodies are reconstituted democratic nature of, 204
on Day of Resurrection, 136-137 military disarmament promoted
Sun: under, 204
rising from the west, 126-127 obsolete status of current United
as first sign of the Last Hour, 127 Nations, 203
Syria (Sham), 140
W
T West, the:
The Bible, the Qur’an, and Science cost/benefit ratio of relations with,
(Bucaille), 27-28 for Muslim countries, 208-211
Tehran, 140 crime and social disintegration
Time: occurring in, 214-216
as a creation of God, 16 statistics, 215
Torah, the: World wars:
to be brought forth by the Mahdi, discussed in hadith, 47-49
91, 159 I and II, 141-142
Tribulation, the, 234-235 III, 144-147, 154
Turkey:
liberation of, from anti-Muslim Y
forces, 94 Yawm al-Khalas (Day of Purification),
Tyrant, the, 60-61, 144 of Medina, 163
capture of, by the Mahdi’s
fighters, 157